The Victorian Naturalist The Magazine of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Volume 103, 1986 КОМУНА EI EID BY K INE BELL AUST. NAT. HIST. MEDAL:. Hyett, J., 28. Medal Fund, 113. Pizzey, G.M., 186. Previous winners, 187. AUTHORS: Adams, P.B., 142. Albrecht, D.E. and Walsh, N.G., 75. Archer, W.R., 160, 178. Aston, С.Е. and Dunn, K.L., 119. Banks, C.B., 158. Barnett, P. and Beattie, S., 7, 168. Beardsell, C. and D., 140. Beattie, S. and Barnett, P., 7, 168. Bird, ЕС. and Rosengren, N.J., 106. Bren, W.M. and Emison, W.B., 123. Brown, GW., 48. Brown, G, and Simmons, D., 19. Browne, J.H., 150. Brunner, H. and Wallis, L.R., 79. Collins, A.C. and Gill, E.D., 117. (ађан рака Ed. Crichton, G.A. and Willis, J.H., 4. Doery, M.K., 56 (Excursion report). Douglas, J., 104 (President’s Note), 185. Dunn, К.Г. and Aston, C.E., 119. Emison, W.B. and Bren, W.M., 123. Forbes, S., 183. Gill, E.D. and Collins, A.C., 117. Hawkeswood, T.J., 58 (Book review), 122. Kershaw, В.С. and Smith, B.J., 16. Koehn, J.D., 36. Loyn, R.H., Traill, В.Г. and Triggs, B.E., 147. MeVilly, D., 125. Ollier, C.D. and Wallace, D.A., 175. Rosengren, N.J. and Bird, E.C., 106. Salkin, A., 43. Shulz, M., 124 (Book review). Simmons, D. and Brown, G., 19. Smith, B.J. and Kershaw, R.C., 16. Taylor, G., 26 (Excursion Report). Traill, B.J., Triggs, B.E. and Loyn, R.H., 147. Triggs, B.E., Loyn, К.Н. and Traill, B.J., 147. Turner, E.K., 88 (Excursion Report), 132 (Excursion Report). Wallace, D.A. and Ollied C.D., 175. Wallis, L.R. and Brunner, H., 79. Walsh, N.G. and Albrecht, D.E., 75. Webb, G.A., 12, 114, 170. Willis, J.H., 189 (Book review), 191 (Excursion Report). Willis, J.H. and Crichton, G.A., 4. Winsor, L.,9. BIRDS: Brown Falcon, taking Yellowfaced Whip Snake, 123. Sooty Owl, prey of, pre- and post- fire, 142. BOOKS: Birds and Vertebrates of S. W. Tasmania, 124. Ferns and Allied Plants of Vict., Tas., S. Aust., 189. History of Aust, Exploration., 58. BOTANY: Adiantum capillus-veneris, New record for Vict., 160. Banksias, Breeding systems in East. Aust., 43. Dendrobium speciosum, Fire damage and regeneration of, 142. Distribution, Swamp Gums, Yarra Valley, 19. Eucalyptus, Review of recent studies, 183. Ferns of Mornington Pen., 178. Finger Fern, New Aust. record, 7. Fire damage, Regeneration of Dendrobium speciosum, 142. Flower visiting Beetles, N.S.W., 170. Gunn’s Orchid, Host of, Otway Ra., 168. Kunzea ambigua, Insect pollinators of, 12. Leptospermoidea, Flower visiting beetles of, 170. Malvaceae Family, NW. Vict., 150. Mirbelia pungens, new sp. record, 75. National Herbarium of Vict., notes from, 183. Pterostylis woollsii, Rediscovery of, 140. Sarcochilus australis, host of, Otway Ra., 168. Swamp Gums, Distribution of, Yarra Valley, 19. EXCURSIONS: Baw Baw Plateau, 191. Point Cook, 26. Porepunkah, 130. Queensland, 56. Tasmania, 88. EN.CV.: Annual Reports, 60, 93, 128. Library Reports, 25, 126. Meeting Reports, 29, 66, 95, 130, 161, 193. V.E.N.C.A. Meeting Report, 27. FISH: Fauna of Badger Ck., Coranderrk Bushland Res., 36. FUNGI: Calostoma, new sp. of, 4. GEOLOGY: Cainozoic Lava flows, Barfold Gorge, 175. Cliff morphology changes, Black Rock Pt., 106. Fossil Sea lion, Queenscliff, 117. INSECTS: Butterflies, S.E. Australia, 119. Chauliograthus pulchellus, aggregation, 114. Longicorn beetle, Observations on, 122. Pollinators of Kunzea ambigua, 12. Tritocosmia roei, Observations on, 122. breeding INVERTEBRATES: Kontikia orana, Land Planarian, 9. Land Planarians, Introduced in Aust., 9. Punctid Snail Genera, Таз., 16. MAMMALS: Petaurus australis, twins, litter size, reproductive strategy, 72. Predator scat analysis, 79. Yellow-bellied glider, twins, litter size, ees MISCELLANEOUS: Frank Pinchen, Artist, 125. Honorary Member, R.C. Kershaw, 121. Instructions to Authors, 134. Koala Survey, 105. Legacy, 18. President’s Note, 104. Vegetation Map, Guide, East Gippsland, 11. Vegetation Survey, Melb., 105. OBITUARY: Gill, E.D., 185. PLACES AND LOCALITIES Badger Ck., Fish Fauna, 36. Barfold Gorge, Cainozoic lava flows, 1758 Black Rock Pt., Cliff changes, 106. Coranderrk Bushland Res., Fish fauna, 36. Mornington Pen., Ferns of, 178. Otway Natl. Park, Gunn’s orchid, 168. Point Cook excursion, 26. Porepunkah excursion, 132. Queenscliff, Fossil sealion, 117. Yarra Valley, Swamp gum distribution, 19. REPTILES: Krefft’s Tortoise, induced colour changes, 158. Pseudomoia spenseri, diet of, 48. Yellowfaced whip snake, taken by Falcon, 123. х АКО ов ol. 104, Мо. 1 2. eu á January/February 1987 = Les м: y EA -R he ene Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Registered by Australia Post. Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 tru "TVTTTE* 2T ЕМСУ DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Monday, 9th February, 8.00 p.m. Mr. Max Dean. “Aboriginal Rock Paintings? Monday, 16th March, 8.00 p.m. Mr. Max Campbell. “Venomous Animals in Australia?’ Monday, 13th April, 8.00 p.m. Prof. Roger Short. *Chimps and Gorillas in the Wild?’ New Members Metropolitan: Ms. Wendy Bicknell, 51 Erskine Street, Middle Park, 3206. Mr. Bohdan Durnota, 363 Mascoma Street, Strathmore Heights, 3041. FNCV EXCURSIONS Saturday, 7th-Monday, 9th March. Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association combined weekend will be held at Inverloch this year and leaders will include Mr. and Mrs. Brewster and Mr. and Mrs. Love (Geology). There will be an excursion Saturday afternoon and an evening meeting. On Sunday there will be a full day outing with an evening get-together and Monday, a morning excursion before departing for home after lunch. A coach has been chartered for the weekend which will leave Flinders Street outside Gas and Fuel Building at 8.45 a.m. Bring a pienic lunch. Cost for accommodation К.О. and coach for the three days approximately $95. Exact cost may vary according to numbers. Please book with excursion secretary as soon as possible sending a $25 deposit. The Saturday afternoon excursion will leave from the Inverloch Motel, Bass Highway at 1 p.m. Sunday, 5th April, Yarra Glen. Fossils. Leader: Mr. Graeme Love. Bus leaves Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m., fare $12. Bring a picnic lunch. Sunday, 3rd May. Lysterfield Park. Details in next Naturalist. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Meetings. Day Group - Third Thursday Thursday, 19th February. St. James Old Cathedral, Flagstaff Gardens and Meat Market Craft Centre. Meet at Flagstaff Garden Station Exit at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Dan McInnes 211 2427. Thursday, 19th March. Ferntree Gully National Park, Train leaves Flinders Street Station at 10.20 a.m. Leader: Marg. Wilson 836 3521. Wednesday, 15th April (note change of day). Planetarium. Museum of Victoria. Meet at Swanston Street entrance at 11.30 a.m. Session begins at 2.00 p.m. Leader: Andy Blackburn 379 8960. At the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Botany Group - Second Thursday Thursday, 12th February. "Port Phillip Bay: Yesterday. Today and Tomorrow?' Mr. Bram Dawson. Thursday, 12th March. “Some Wildflowers of Kakadu National Park? Miss Betty Terrell. Thursday, 9th April. “Western Australia – Darling Range and Northern Sand Plains? Mrs. Hilary Weatherhead. Geology Group - First Wednesday Wednesday, 4th February. “Further Developments in the Voyager Saga. Planets? Dr. A. Prentice. Wednesday, 4th March. To be announced. Wednesday, Ist April. “Тће Geological Time Scale — How did we get it?” Mr. Neil Archibald. Mammal Survey Group - First Tuesday Tuesday, 3rd February. “Pigmy Possums”. Mr. Simon Ward. Tuesday 3rd March. To be announced. Tuesday, 7th April. To be announced. Microscopical Group - Third Wednesday Wednesday, 18th February. “Rotifers” (including a film by the late Mr. Раш Genery) Mr. Dan McInnes. Wednesday, 18th March. ''Objectives and Eyepieces?’ Mr. John Dawes. Wednesday, 15th April. “Parasitic Wasps? Mr. Urwin Bates. (Continued on inside back cover) The Victorian Naturalist Volume 104, Number 1 January/February, 1987 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: В. Thomson. Assistant Editors: D. McClellan, V. Spencer БЕТОНИ ОВЕ ЕКОО АН Жүк D A № 4 Delma nasuta (Lacertilia: Pygopodidae), An addition to the Herpetofauna of New South Wales and Victoria, with a Note on Rapid Colour Change in this Species by С. M. Бћеа................ 5 Influx of the Grey-headed Flying-fox Pteropus poliocephalus (Chiroptera: Pteropodidae) to the Melbourne area, Victoria, in 1986 РЕ АТОН waar PP fe shade opens aah enone te А 9 Nature Notes: A Boobook Ninox novaeseelandiae) preying on an Eastern Rosella (Platycercus eximius) by М. J. Lewis ............... 13 Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria - 2. Review of recent studies in Eucalyptus - the species by S. J. Forbes ................... 14 Nature Notes: A Clothes-Peg variety of the Orb-Web Spider by INGEUS OM CIRCE ayant йа Р К E I АНЫ cd тете АНИ, 20 Report of Springtime Get-together of Victoria Field Naturalists Clubs Association at Ballarat, October 4th and 5th, 1986 by E. K. Turner 23 FNCV Reports of Recent Activities by C. M. Shankly.............. 28 Cover Illustration: River Red Gum (E. camaldulensis) (see page 14) Photo: H. T. Reeves President’s Note Your Council is very much aware that of our 670 elected Members and 172 subscribers (paid up at October last) only 100-150 attend General Meetings, Group Meetings or Excursions. Now this is, of course, the normal state of affairs in a Club like ours, where the majority contribute a great deal, often at some sacrifice, by maintaining their membership, We certainly could not continue to publish 6 issues per year of the Victorian Naturalist without this support. This means, however, that being away from the action, so to speak, the majority will be unfamiliar with many aspects of the Club. One that comes to mind is our base of operations – where we house our possessions and where we meet, and I am elaborating a little on this theme as my message in this issue. Since March 1948 we have had our General and Council Meetings at the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, and the majority of Group meetings are held here also. Here is our legally Registered Office, in a partioned-off and secured part of the main hall of this building, which is controlled by the Director General, Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands. Our library is housed here, along with our files and archives, and other memorabilia, lecture aids and other such items as the collection of Amy Fuller wildflower paintings, and the Neil Douglas painting awarded to the Club as the Victorian Conservation Prize by the Conservation Council of Victoria in 1980. We use the remainder of the hall for our General Meetings (other organizations also have use of this portion) and auxiliary rooms for our Council meetings. We cannot afford an executive officer in full or part-time attendance, but the Librarian and Secretary for example make regular visits to process correspondence, accession library material, etc. Our amiable association with the Officers of the Herbarium has continued for nearly forty years, and has been acknowledged to the extent that we have been consulted about the proposed extensions funded by the Bicentenary Authority. We have not always been in the Herbarium. The inaugural meeting of the Club was held in the Melbourne Town Hall in May 1880, with the subsequent meetings in the Temperance Hall, Russell Street, until June 1881. An extremely long association with the Royal Society then began when its Victoria Street Hall became our home until May 1945. For the next three years we met in the Public Library until our move into the Herbarium in 1948. Further research might reveal some interesting stories as to why we changed headquarters from time to time. Of course much Club work is done at other venues. The Editorial Committee, for example, meets elsewhere to prepare copy for the Naturalist, and between advertised meetings work goes on in members’ homes and by phone to keep the Club functioning as smoothly as possible. Our office and library is not open on a regular basis during the day, but anyone who can attend a General or Group meeting is welcome to look around our present home. Jack Douglas, President 4 Victorian Nat. Delma nasuta (Lacertilia: Pygopodidae), An Addition to the Herpetofauna of New South Wales and Victoria, with a Note on Rapid Colour Change in this Species ' By С. М. SHEA* Recent collections of reptiles in the south-west of New South Wales demon- strate the presence of a distinctive herpetofaunal element associated with mallee-7Fiodia habitats (Shea and Wells, 1985; Sadlier, 1985). This paper records another member of this faunal assemblage in New South Wales and Victoria. Five species of Delma have previously been recorded from New South Wales and Victoria: D. australis, D. impar, D. inornata, D. plebeia and D. tincta (Kluge, 1974). During fieldwork in south-western New South Wales in October-November 1984, several Delma specimens were collected that agreed with the diagnosis of D. nasuta Kluge and with South‘Australian material of this species, althouth they could not be clearly differentiated from D. inornata using the key to the genus provided by Cogger (1983). Morley and Morley (1985) experienced similar diffi- culties in differentiating D. inornata and D. nasuta. Subsequent examination of all D. inornata material in the Australian Museum and Queensland Museum reveal- Fig. 1. Distribution of D. inornata (circles) and D. nasuta (triangles) in south-eastern Australia. Closed symbols are specimens examined; open symbols are literature records from Kluge (1974), Menkhorst and Gilmore (1979), Jenkins and Bartell (1980), Thompson (1980), Annable (1983) and Morley and Morley (1985). *Dept. of Veterinary Anatomy, University of Sydney, N.SW., 2006. Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) ed several additional N.SW. and two Victorian D. nasuta specimens, including two of the paratypes of D. inornata Kluge (Australian Museum R17982, R27922), and extended the known range of D. nasuta eastwards to Round Hill Fauna Reserve (Fig. 1). Mr. A. J. Coventry kindly checked identifications and provided data for D. nasuta material in the Museum of Victoria, which included a further six paratypes of D. inornata (MV R10810-11), D8746, D13945, D15453-54) and confirm- ed the presence of D. nasuta in Victoria. D. nasuta from the southern part of the range lack the dark ventral pigmentation of northern populations, and superficially resemble D. inornata in colouration. The two species may however be readily differ- entiated on scalation (Table 1; Fig. 2), althouth two of the diagnostic characters used by Kluge (1974), number of loreal and ventral scales, are of little practical use in identification. D. nasuta in N.SW. and Victoria lack the dark edging to dorsal and lateral scales often seen in D. inornata (Fig. 63 in Kluge, 1974; Fig. 485 in Cogger, 1983), and frequently possess a light speckled appearance to the lower temporal region, due to light centres and darker rostral or caudal margins to individual temporal scales (Fig. 71 in Kluge, 1974; Fig. 3). There may additionally be some difference in ventral colouration in life. D. inornata has been recorded as having a Fig. 2. Laterodorsal view of snouts of A: Delma inornata with single pair of nasals (AM R59308), В; D. inornata with two pairs of nasals (AM R55618; CN = caudal nasals), C: D. nasuta (AM R115906). Table 1. Scalation characters differentiating D. inornata and D. nasuta. D. inornata Caudal nasal scales* Usually present, broadly separated from nostril, less D. nasuta Present, in contact or barely separated from nostril (Fig. 2c). commonly absent (Fig. 2a,b). Gular scales** SD 1.01, n 61. Nuchal scales** SD 0.75, n 62. * posterior nasal scales of Kluge (1974). **sensu Kluge (1974). 6 12-16, mode 15, x 14.3, 12-16, mode 13, x 13.3, 15-19, mode 18, x 17.4, SD 1.01, n 19, 15-18, mode 17, x 16.2, SD 1.01, n 19. Victorian Nat. lemon-yellow throat and flesh coloured body venter in life (Cogger, 1983; Jenkins and Bartell, 1980; notes accompanying Australian Museum R37482-83, R55617-18) while the six southern D. nasuta for which I have noted ventral colouration had body venter yellow and throat white (yellow body venter also recorded for AM R97914). Kluge (1974) noted that 10% of the D. inornata he examined had only a single pair of nasal scales, with no evidence of any geographic trends in variation. How- ever, in the material examined here, loss of caudal nasal scales was not uniformly dis- tributed. Overall, 23% of individuals examined lacked caudal nasals. Loss was most frequent in the area between 29? and 3295 and east of 147°E (71%, n 14) and between *Yandembah" and Hillston (100%, n 3). In the remainder of the range, the frequency of loss was only 7% (n 45). Re-identification of D. inornata and D. nasuta records simplifies the known habitat preferences of these species. South- ед йн, ni < П eastern records of D. nasuta agree with western populations (Kluge, 1974) in being restricted to 7riodia, while D. inornata inhabits grasslands (Menkhorst and Gil- more, 1979; Jenkins and Bartell, 1980; Annable, 1983; field notes accompanying АМ R55616-18, R55620, R80577, R110626-27, R113384). Colour change has not previously been reported in pygopodids. The six D. nasuta examined in life (AM R114366, R115906, R116019-20, R120847, R121052) all showed an ability to rapidly change the intensity of the yellow ventral colouration. When first handled, all had dull or bright lemon- yellow venters. Immediately following ecdysis, AM R116020 retained a bright yellow venter. Within 20 seconds of slough segments being removed, the venter became pure white, and regained its yellow colouration one day later. Placing individuals with dull yellow venters on moistened tissue paper or spraying them with a fine mist resulted in a change over Fig. 3. Delma nasuta from 14km М Coombah Roadhouse, N.SW, Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) 5-10 minutes to a bright lemon-yellow venter, which returned to dull lemon- yellow within 30 seconds if the animal was disturbed. Mild cooling (5 minutes refrig- eration) or heating (10 minutes under 100W incandescent globe at 20 centi- metres) did not induce any change in ventral colouration. SPECIMENS EXAMINED (All specimens prior to AM R37482, ОМ 128999 and MV D33336 also examined by Kluge, 1974). Рата inornata (n 72) АМ: R679-82, R952, Cootamundra, N.SW.; R973, "Yandembah", 20mi W Hillston, N.SW.; №6988, Gerogery, N.SW.; К10118, RIOI26, Barmedman, N.SW.; R10497-98, Hillston, N.SW.; #1763, Quantong, Vic; R12584, Marmor, Qld; R13428, Bringagee, N.SW.; R13890, Finley, N,SW.; К15451, Pericoota, via Moama, N.SW.; R15495, “Merah”, N.SW.; R15946, К111637-41, Holbrook, МУ; R15977-80, Vic.; R17163, Yanco, N.SW.; R17656, Lake Narran, N.SW.; R20587, Moombooldool, N.SW.; R20729, Wymah, N.SW.; R27986, Albury, N.SW.; R30278, Bellata, N.SW.; R30329, Riverina district, N.SW.; R37482-83, 21mi 5 Condobolin, МУ; R37485, 14пи W Gilgandra, N.SW.; R39507, *Klon- dyke”, N.SW.; R42721, Nhill, Vic; R55616, 5.5mi W Bowning, near Hume Highway, N.SW.; R55617-18, 2.7mi N Gocup, N.SW.; R55619, 30mi N Narrabri, N.SW.; R55620, Ипи S Yass on Wee Jasper Road, N.SW.; R59308, 5.7mi E Nevertire on Mitchell Highway, N.SW.; R64188, R70111, I5mi W Gilgandra, N.SW.; R64932-34, Galarganbone (?Gulargambone), N.SW.; R69726, “Myallvale’, N.SW.; R80577-78, *Murmungee", near Beechworth, Vic; R80580, *Hattah, Vic? (probably in error); R92527, 19mi E Walgett, N.SW.; R95269, Moura Creek, 50km М Warren on Carinda Road, N.SW.; R95413-14, Benalong, N.SW.; R102856, Old Gunnedah Road, Narrabri, N.SW.; R110626-27, Blakney Creek, near Yass, N.SW.; R112443, Yenda, 15km NE Griffith, N.S.W.; R113384, NW side Oakey, Qld, QM: 114753, near Pittsworth, Qld.; 128999, 134157, J45498-99, Oakey, Qld. J32262, Lurg Firetower Hill, Vic; 137821-23, Grid Reference 347662, Deniliquin 1:250 000 topographic map, N.S.W., Delma nasuta (n 26) AM: R17982, Nymagee, N.SW.;; R27922, R41088, R90491-95, R112224, Round Hill Fauna Reserve, N.SW.; R80575, R80579, Hattah, Vic; R97914, "Tarawi", N.SW.; R98347-48, 62mi S Broken Hill on Silver City Highway, N.SW.; R105536-38, 22km ENE Kimba, S.A.; R114366, 6.4km 5 Top Hut HS on “Old Arumpo" Road, N.SW.; R115231, 4km S Double Tanks, “Top Hut", N.SW.; R115906-08, Pandappa Hill, S.A.; R116019-20, 14km, N Coombah Roadhouse on Silver City Highway, N.SW.; R120847, 166km N Wentworth on Silver City Highway, N.SW.; R121052, 5.9km S Top Hut HS on “Old Arumpo” Road, N.SW. 8 OTHER RECORDS FROM MUSEUM OF VICTORIA Delma nasuta (n 33) Е10810-И, Woomelang, Vic; R10833, Е11137-38, Mallee, Vic.; D8746, Hattah, Vic.; D13945, Annuello, Vic; D15453-54, Renmark, S.A.; D33336-37, 11.3km NE Millewa South Bore, Vic.; D38851, Rockhole Bore, Vic.; D40171, D47829, D47892, Millewa South Bore, Vic; D52433, 2.9km NNW Chinaman Well, Vic. D52757, Ross's Springs, 13km S Tutye, Vic.; 053565, Nowingi, Vic; 054566-67, 054639, D55218-19, D55308, 2.75km NNW Chinaman Well, Vic.; 254585, 3.5km SSE Chinaman Well, Vic.; D54586, 10km SSE Chinaman Well, Vic.; 054811-12, 0.9km N Chinaman Well, Vic.; 054983, 0.6km NE Chinaman Well, Vic; D54984, 1.7km NNW Chinaman Well, Vic.; D55042, 2.8km NE Chinaman Well, Vic; D55533, Ikm М Chinaman Well, Vic,; 258470, 30km WNW Kiamil, Vic. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Ithank B. Coulson, M. Peterson, R. Sadlier and К. Wells for their help in fieldwork. G, Swan kindly allowed be to examine one of the live D. nasuta, and A. Greer and J. Covacevich allowed be access to the Australian Museum and Queensland Museum collections respectively. J. Coventry generously offered records from the Museum of Victoria collection. A. Bauer, H. Cogger, B. Farrow, А. Greer and В. Sadlier offered helpful suggestions on the manuscript. REFERENCES Annable, T. (1983), Some observations on vocalisation and the use of limb flaps in the pygopodid lizard, Delma inornata Kluge. Herpetofauna 14(2): 80-82. Cogger, H. G. (1983). Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia. A. Н. and A. У. Reed, Sydney. Jenkins, R, and Bartell, К. (1980). А Field Guide to Reptiles of the Australian High Couniry. Inkata Press, Melbourne. Kluge, А. G. (1974). A taxonomic revision of the lizard family Pygopodidae. Misc. Publ. Mus. Zool. Univ: Michigan (147): 1-221. Menkhorst, P. W. and Gilmore A. M. (1979), Mammals and reptiles of north central Victoria. Мет. Nat. Mus. Vict. (40): 1-33. Morley, Т. P. and Morley, PT. (1985). An inventory of the reptiles of Danggali Conservation Park. Herpetofauna 15(1,2): 32-36. Sadlier, R. (1985). Fauna Study: Reptiles and Amphibians of the Willandra Lakes World Heritage Area. Report to New South Wales National Parks and Wildlife Service. Shea, G. M. and Wells, R. W. (1985). New records of а skink and a gecko from western New South Wales. Herpetofauna 15(1,2): 1-4, Thompson, M. B. (1980). Delma inornata Kluge (Reptilia, Pygopodidae) in South Australia. S. Aust. Nat. 84: 42-43. Victorian Nat. Influx of the Grey-headed Flying-fox Pteropus poliocephalus (Chiroptera: Pteropodidae) to the Melbourne area, Victoria, in 1986 By HELEN I. ASTON* Introduction Menkhorst and Dixon (1985) have summarised and mapped the pre-1983 known occurrences of the Grey-headed Flying-fox Pteropus poliocephalus in Victoria. They detailed the abnormally large autumn influxes of 1981 and 1982, in which years the number of P. poliocephalus in daytime camps in the Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, peaked at about 100 and 800 individuals respectively. The present paper details the influx of this species to the Melbourne metropolitan area in 1986, when the daytime camp established in the Royal Botanic Gardens was the largest ever recorded for the area, peaking at about 1000 individuals and extending in time well before and after the usual autumn months of prior visitations. Brief com- ments on known occurrences of the species in Melbourne since 1982 are also made. The Royal Botanic Gardens camp 1. Numbers and duration In 1983 no flying-foxes were reported anywhere in Melbourne but in 1984 a daytime camp of about 150 individuals was established throughout autumn in the Fern Gully in the Royal Botanic Gardens (37° 49' S.; 144° 58 ' E.). Their arrival commenced about the end of March, 10 or 12 first being reported pre- sent on 1 April. Numbers built up to a peak in early June, with P. Menkhorst counting 130 and estimating a total of about 150 on 9 June. Numbers then declined, the last sighting, of 8 in- *7/5 Hazel Street, Camberwell, Victoria 3124. Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) dividuals, being by W. Schulz on 9 July. In autumn-winter of 1985 flying-foxes were absent but in 1986 the largest known influx for the Melbourne metropolitan area occurred and extend- ed for the longest duration yet recorded. The daytime camp for this influx was again in the Fern Gully of the Royal Botanic Gardens. K. Allen and D. Chur- chill first noticed about 12 Pteropus pre- sent on 22 December 1985. Numbers re- mained small until mid January 1986 when a steep rise commenced and con- tinued at least into February (Fig. 1). No counts were made between 2 February and 7 May 1986 but general observa- tions indicated that the peak of approx- imately 1000 individuals was held from at least late March to mid April. A decline in numbers (observations by K. Allen) had occurred apparently 3 or 4 weeks before 12 May when a count of 925 flying-foxes was obtained during a branch-by-branch count through the gully. Numbers dropped steeply in the last half of May and less steeply but steadily throughout June to mid September. The last individuals to desert the camp left on 20 or 21 September. However, 10 to 15 remained until early December, when they were joined by new arrivals. Counts of 18 to 20 and of 39 were made on 1 and 12 December respectively. This increase in numbers could be the commencement of an influx for 1987 and raises the possibility that a permanent camp of P. poliocephalus may become established in the Royal Botanic Gardens. First arrivals in 1981, 1982 and 1984 were in late March, early March and late March respectively. Last departures for the same years were mid July (with most gone by late June), early June and early 9 INDIVIDUALS OF NUMBER 15 30. 14 29 13 28 15 30 14 29 14 29 13 28 13 28 12 27 11 26 11 26 10 25 10 25 D peal mU OM: clearly Maat КА | c Stele Ome E ars? 1985 1986 DATE Fig. 1. Numbers of Preropus poliocephalus at the Royal Botanic Gardens camp during 1986. Ф = counts by H. Aston; M = midpoints of estimates by P. Menkhorst (range shown by vertical line); A = estimates by others; | = peak estimated by K. Allen. July respectively. The period of the 1986 influx from late December 1985 to late September 1986, with a few individuals remaining until at least mid December, was therefore quite abnormally extend- ed. The year 1986 is the first for which Р. poliocephalus has been recorded in the Royal Botanic Gardens throughout every month, 2. Camp site The Fern Gully is approximately 140 metres long and 55 metres wide. During the peak of 1986 influx P. poliocephalus camped in groups dispersed throughout most of the gully but chiefly in the nor- thern two-thirds of it. The camp oc- cupied an area of about 4,500 square metres, with an average density of c. 0.22 individuals per square metre. The camp first established in the nor- thern end of the gully, expanding 10 southwards along its full length as numbers increased and contracting back to the extreme northern end as numbers declined. On 12 May 1986, when the highest count of 925 was made shortly after the peak, dispersal was still throughout most of the gully with the flying-foxes in 29 groups of from 1 to 99 (mostly 4-58) individuals per group. By 16 June, with numbers decreased to 325, the flying-foxes were concentrated in only four trees at the extreme northern end of the gully and by 25 June all (c. 305) had concentrated further into only two of these trees. The same two trees remained the major camp trees from then until 20 or 21 September, with several palms also occasionally being us- ed by a few individuals. One of these palms was adopted as the sole camp site by the 20 or less P. poliocephalus which Victorian Nat. remained after 20 ог 21 September. Large trees of Moreton Bay Fig Ficus macrophylla, Elm Ulmus spp., Plane Platanus sp., White Poplar Populus alba, Lilly-pilly Acmena smithii and River She-oak Casuarina cunningha- miana and also tall palms were heavily utilised either throughout or for a notable portion of the camp period. Both evergreen and deciduous trees were used, the latter during all stages from heavily-foliaged to leafless. 3. Effect of weather Contraction of the camp as numbers declined was presumably due to the gregariousness of the species but the selection of the final site of four, then two, trees at the north end of the gully appeared to be influenced by weather. Pteropus poliocephalus normally in- habits warmer locations than Melbourne and, when it does visit this area, departs soon after the coldest period from June to August has begun, Individuals re- maining throughout winter during the 1986 influx therefore could be expected to seek warmth and the trees at the north end of the gully were well-placed to receive any sunshine available. Table 1 gives the numbers of Preropus present in the final northern camp site and the minimum and maximum temperatures for eight days on which counts were made during June to August 1986. On 16 June, with the temperature nearly 17°C, approximately 72% of the 325 individuals were in the leafless or near-leafless sections of three deciduous trees, mostly in sunny posi- tions. The remainder were generally in shade in an adjacent, heavily-foliaged, Moreton Bay Fig. Nine days later, on 25 June, following colder weather (max- imum temperature 11°-12°C over the previous five days), the camp had con- tracted to only one of the deciduous trees, a White Poplar, and the fig tree. The number of flying-foxes had not decreased markedly and more in- dividuals had moved to the fig, only c. 51% remaining in the poplar. As winter progressed, numbers in the poplar drop- ped further, ranging from about 33%-44% on fairly calm, mild, and more or less sunny days. However, on 14 and 25 July the poplar was complete- ly deserted and all individuals camped in the fig. The 14 July was extremely windy with whole trees in motion and the 25 July was cold (maximum temperature 8°C) with rain and sleet. The dense foliage of the fig was obviously sought for shelter in adverse weather whereas the bare branches of the poplar were utilised for warmth in sunnier, milder weather. Number of P. poliocephalus Per cent Tempertaure Date present present (deg. C.) Fig Poplar in Poplar Min. Max 1986 16 June 90 235* 72% 6.9 16.8 25 June 150 155 51% 6.0 13.6 14 July all nil 0% 4.4 15,0 21 July 112 88 44% 8.8 14.9 25 July all nil 0% 2:5 8.2 8 August 114 70 38% сре 16.6 22 August about 2/3 about 1/3 с.33% 9.7 21.0 of total of total 27 August 103 65 39% 7.5 177 Table 1. Numbers of Pteropus poliocephalus present in an evergreen Moreton Bay Fig and a leafless White Poplar, together with minimum and maximum temperatures, on eight occasions during June to August, 1986. (* = three leafless trees used, thereafter one only.) Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) 11 Other Melbourne occurrences 1. Night dispersal There were no reports of Preropus in the Melbourne metropolitan area in 1983 and 1985 but, coinciding with the daytime camps in the Royal Botanic Gardens, there were reports in 1984 and 1986 of night flying and feeding in suburban Melbourne. No other camps were reported and the night dispersals presumably originated from the Gardens camp. Between mid March and 6 May 1984, occasional sightings of from 1 to 12 flying foxes were reported from Northcote, North Fitzroy and Kew, all locations being less than 8 kilometres in north to north- easterly directions from the Royal Botanic Gardens. In 1986, fourteen night sightings of from 1 to 20+ individuals extended from 26 January to 4 July. Reports were from Albert Park, East Melbourne, North Fitzroy, Richmond, Kew, Hawthorn and Canterbury. All loca- tions were within 2 to 10 kilometres of the Royal Botanic Gardens and all ex- cept Albert Park, south-west of the Gardens, were in north to easterly direc- tions from them. The 1984 and 1986 records are consis- tent with the findings of Menkhorst and Dixon (1985), who reported that 78% of foraging records came from within a 10 kilometres radius of the Royal Botanic Gardens and that directions of dispersal were wide, although concentrated in the eastern and south-eastern suburbs. 2. Feeding Flying-foxes were reported at night feeding on Moreton Bay Figs, cultivated figs, apricots and apples. Individuals ap- parently return regularly to the same food source each night over a period of several weeks if the food source persists. For example, Ms Kramer reported 3 to 5 regularly present each night from 5 February to mid March 1986 feeding on 12 cultivated figs and apricots at a house in Holden Street North Fitzroy, and Pauline Duncan reported 20+ in- dividuals feeding in a Moreton Bay Fig in Richmond on 20 January, 21 January and 11 February 1986. Audrey Wain made regular observa- tions of flying-foxes feeding in a large Moreton Bay Fig in Burke Road, Hawthorn, between 26 January and 9 February 1986. They would arrive bet- ween 21:25 and 21:30 hours eastern summer time and mostly depart about 03:00. On the nights of 29 and 30 January at least 20 individuals were pre- sent, flying in from the direction of the Royal Botanic Gardens, i.e. from the west to south-west, By 5 and 6 February the number had decreased to a max- imum of 10 to 12 and the arrival was more from the north-west to north. On- ly a few individuals appeared on the next three nights and none visited the fig after 9 February, probably because of depletion of food supply. On 5 February 1986, at about 21:00 hours eastern summer time on a hot evening (maximum day temperature 26°C), Kathy Preece observed flying- foxes streaming out of the Royal Botanic Gardens. Many flew to the ad- jacent Yarra River and drank by skimm- ing the surface with their mouth open. Victoria outside Melbourne There have been few reports of Р. poliocephalus in Victoria for 1983 to 1986 inclusive apart from scattered East Gippsland sightings of small numbers. The regular autumn camp site at Dowell Creek, near Mallacoota Inlet, East Gippsland (Menkhorst and Dixon, 1985) has not been checked but it is probably still in use. The most interesting record is of one individual electrocuted on power lines on the outskirts of Cobden (38° 20' 5.; 143° 04 Е.) оп 30 January 1986. It is unusual for this species to ex- tend so far west, especially in summer. Victorian Nat. Acknowledgements I particularly thank Peter Menkhorst, Ar- thur Rylah Institute of Environmental Research, Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands, for making sundry records including his own counts at the Royal Botanic Gardens available to me, and for commenting on this manuscript. Ken Allen, Michael Burston, Warren Worboys and Col- in Pratt, Royal Botanic Gardens, have also been particularly helpful in observations within the Gardens during 1986 and Bill Schulz made regular Gardens counts in 1984. To them and to others whose records have been incorporated in this account, I am most grateful. REFERENCE Menkhorst, P. W. and Dixon J. M., (1985). Influxes of the Grey-headed Flying-fox Pteropus poliocephalus (Chiroptera, Pteropodidae) to Victoria in 1981 and 1982. Australian Mammal. 8: 117-121. Nature Notes A Boobook (Ninox novaeseelandiae) preying on an Eastern Rosella (Platycercus eximius). ВУ М. J. LEWIS* On the 13 May 1986 at the Australian National University, Canberra, 1 was walking across from the Zoology Depart- ment to the Hancock Library at 1930 hours when I heard the distress calls of a Rosella. As I turned to approach the area from where the calls had originated an Eastern Rosella (Platycercus eximius) flew straight towards me about 40cm above the ground, with a Boobook Owl (Ninox novaeseelandiae) in pursuit about 2 metres behind. The Rosella landed on a footpath about 10 metres away and the owl in a nearby tree. My presence obviously disturbed the owl’s pursuit. ] approached to within about 1 metre of the exhausted female Rosella and observed that its back was devoid of * Zoology Department. Australian National University. P.O. Box 4, Canberra, 2601. Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) feathers and bloody, obviously having already been attacked by the owl and having escaped. After a few moments the Rosella flew off, low above the ground, with the owl again in pursuit. Boobooks primarily feed on insects and occasionally small marsupials and rodents but have also been known to prey on birds up to the size of small parrots (Schodde and Mason 1980, Vestjens 1973). As Schodde et. al. (1980) note this is probably not a common event but with insect activity becoming low, as would be the case in Canberra during this period of the year, birds may form an important source of protein. REFERENCES Schodde, R. and Mason, I. J., (1980) Nocturnal Birds of Australia. Melbourne: Lansdowne. Vestjens, W. J. M., (1973). Wildlife Mortality on a road in New South Wales. Emu 73: 107-112. 13 Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria - 2 Review of recent studies in Eucalyptus - the species. By S. J. FORBES* The search for a natural classification scheme for eucalypts has accelerated the resolution of specific and subspecific problems in Victoria. Recent investigations of eucalypts have resulted in the discovery or redefinition of many Victorian taxa. Brooker (1983) and Costermans (1981) both provide as excellent guides to pub- lished taxa. The list below draws attention to new names and taxa recognised in Vic- toria since the publication of Willis (1972), and indicates some presently unresolved problems. Investigations of individual taxa throughout their range have provided the basis for the resolution of many problem taxa (see below, for example, Eucalyptus willisii Humphries, Ladiges and Brooker). Numerical techniques have assisted sub- sequent definition of taxa and emphasized the value of seedling and juvenile leaf characters. Amateur eucalyptologists тау still make significant contributions to resolving problem taxa through systematic obser- vation, recording and collecting. Accurate identification of eucalypts may depend on characters not obvious from a pressed specimen such as leaf colour, flower colour, bark and habit (see Brooker 1983). Eucalypt collectors should be prepared to provide detailed notes, properly pressed duplicate specimens and preferably, a photograph. Notes should include: Collector's name, collection number and date of collection. Locality - sufficiently accurate to allow population to be relocated. * National Herbarium of Victoria, Department Con- servation Forests and Lands, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. 14 Eucalyptus obliqua UHerit. (Messmate), the first species described under Eucalyptus. A widely distributed tree in cooler, southern parts of eastern Australia. Photo: НЛ. Reeves, courtesy library of National Herbarium of Victoria. Habitat – associated species (especially eucalypts), geology and soil, aspect and slope. Habit - height, form, branching. Bark - type, persistance, colour. Juvenile & adult leaves - texture, colour, note whether upper and lower leaf surfaces are the same or differing colours, i.e. concolorous or discolorous.). Flower colour Collections should be from a single mature tree and surrounding juveniles. (A population sample may include a number of separate collections from a single population.) Victorian Nat. A collection should include: Bark Leaves — juvenile and adult (selection of conspecific juveniles can present prob- lems). Buds (and flowers if possible), Fruits Seed (store surplus mature fruits in paper bags for seed). If seedling or juvenile leaves are absent, accurate identification may depend on growing seed from fruits collected with specimens. Seed collections, accompanied by voucher specimens, are also required for the Royal Botanic Gardens seed exchange program. Notes on collection and preservation of specimens are available from the National Herbarium of Victoria. The following list of new taxa and un- resolved problems in Victorian eucalypts is arranged according to the informal classification of Pryor and Johnson (1971). Only subgenera, sections and series or subseries have been used. These levels of classification serve adequately to bring related eucalypts together to assist discussion. Recent modifications to Pryor and Johnson's classification are conven- iently disregarded for this purpose. Eucalvptus regnans Е, Muell, (Mountain Ash), the tallest flowering plant in the world, Restricted to wet sites below 1,100 metres in eastern Victoria and Tasmania. Photo: Н.Т. Reeves, courtesy library of National Herbarium of Victoria. New names and taxa recognised in Victoria since the publication of Willis (1972). Subgenus MONOCALYPTUS Section Renantheria Subseries Capitellatinae E. alpina Lindley (Grampians Gum) E. baxteri (Benth.) Maiden & Blakely (Brown Stringybark) Grampians popula- tions include two undescribed species previously referred to E. alpina. An inland (e.g. Big Desert and adjacent areas in South Australia) form of E. baxteri is also presently undescribed (see Marginson 1984). Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) Subseries Eugenioideinae Е. globoidea Blakely (White Stringybark) Stunted coastal stringybarks in East Gippsland may be referable to Е, globoidea from the concolorous adult leaves, and sessile buds. The closely related E. eugenioides Sieber ex Spreng. (Thin- leaved Stringybark) occurs in southern NSW and may possibly be expected in East Gippsland, The pedicellate buds and narrow juvenile leaves of E. eugenioides contrast with the sessile buds and broad 15 juvenile leaves with long petioles of E. globoidea. Subseries Strictinae E. stricta Sieber ex Spreng. (Mountain Mallee) The occurence of Е, stricta in Victoria is based on two collections from Mt Well- ington. No contemporary record exists despite repeated attempts to relocate the species. E. kybeanensis Maiden & Cambage is an abundant mallee about the summit of Mt Wellington. The first collection was by W.H. Green, s.n. 28.xii.1916, University of Melbourne, who undertook some studies on the anal- ysis of eucalypt oil with P.R.H. St John, Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne (see Morris 1944). The later collection was by a forester, W. Briggs, s.n. Ш.1924. Both collections have been determined in 1959 by L.A.S. Johnson and are in bud only. 'The labels are handwritten by J.H. Willis and JW. Audas respectively. Subseries Pauciflorinae E. pauciflora Sieber ex Spreng. ssp. pauciflora (White Sallee) E. pauciflora ssp. niphophila (Maiden & Blakely) L. Johnson & B. Blaxell (Snow Gum). АП Victorian E. pauciflora occurrences are referable to these subspecies. Supposed Victorian records of E. pauciflora ssp. debeuzevillei (Maiden) L. Johnson & D. Blaxell should be referred to Е. pauciflora ssp. niphophila. Subseries Amygdalininae (see Ladiges ef al. 1983) E. radiata Sieber ex DC. ssp. radiata (Narrow-leaved Peppermint) E. radiata ssp. robertsonii (Blakely) L. Johnson & D. Blaxell Two subspecies of E. radiaía are presently recognised in Victoria. Variation in juvenile leaves indicate the presence of at least one other taxon in Victoria. E. willisii Humphries, Ladiges & Brooker ssp. willisii (Shining Peppermint). E. willisii ssp. falciformis Newnham, Ladiges & Whiffin. 16 Mainland populations previously refer- red to E. nitida Hook.f. (Smithton Peppermint) are clearly distinct from Tas- manian and Bass Strait Island popula- tions. Ladiges et al. (1983) refer the mainland populations to E. willisii. The Grampians population, with conspicuous- ly falcate juvenile leaves and larger, obconical fruits (0.6-0.7 x 0.5-0.6 cm), is referred to E. willisii ssp. falciformis by Newnham et al. 1986. Subgenus SYMPHYOMYRTUS Section Dumaria Series Dumosae E. cyanophylla Brooker (Blue-leaved Mallee) Previously (and incorrectly) referred to the glossy green-leaved Е. pileata Blakely (Western Australian Capped Mallee) in Victoria. The blue-grey leaves and winter- spring flowering of E.cvanophylla contrast with the grey-green leaves and late summer-autumn flowering of E. dumosa A. Cunn. ex Schauer (Dumosa Mallee) (Brooker 1977). Series Incrassatae E. incrassata Labill. (Ridge-fruited Mallee) Victorian material incorrectly referred to E. incrassata Labill. var. angulosa Benth. is typical E. incrassata. Section Exsertaria Subseries Tereticorninae E. blakelyi Maiden (Blakely's Red Gum) E. camaldulensis Dehng. (River Red Gum) E. dealbata А. Cunn. ex Schauer var. dealbata (Tumble-down Red Gum) E. dwyeri Maiden & Blakely (Dwyer's Red Gum) E. tereticornis Smith (Forest Red Gum) Problems exist in the delimitation of members of the Red Gum group, especially in north-east Victoria. Some Victorian collections have been referred to E. dealbata (around Tallangata) and to Е. dwyeri (Warby Range). The presence of intermediate populations makes identi- fication difficult. The slope of the disc (on Victorian Nat. Eucalyptus camaldulensis Dehnh. (River Red Gum), the most widely distributed eucalypt. The species exhibits considerable morphological variability through its range. Photo: HT. Reeves, courtesy library of National Herbarium of Victoria. the fruits), operculum shape (on the buds), juvenile leaves and habit are diagnostic. E. dealbata var. dealbata is characterised by glaucous leaves, buds and branchlets. Е. dwyeri is typically a mallee with character- istic narrow juvenile leaves contrasting with the characteristic broad juvenile leaves of E. blakelyi. Section Maidenaria (see Ladiges et al. 1984) Subseries Ovatinae E. brookeriana A.M. Gray (Brooker's Gum) E. camphora КЛ. Baker (Mountain Swamp Gum) E. ovata Labill. (Swamp Gum) E. yarraensis Maiden & Cambage (Yarra Gum) Identification of members of the Swamp Gum group may be difficult. Sim- mons (1986) provides an excellent discus- Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) sion of the last three species. Е, brookeriana is typically characterised by clearly crenulate juvenile leaves. Upright habit and forest habitat are also often characteristic, Subseries Manniferinae E. aromaphloia Pryor & Willis (Scent- bark) Three groups within E. aromaphloia are differentiated in Victoria on the basis of seedling morphology by Chappill, Ladiges & Boland (1986). E. aromaphloia sensu stricto is characterised by seedlings with round stems and ovate, glaucous juvenile leaves that are sessile or subsessile for many leaf nodes, E. aromaphloia sensu sricto occurs from the Mt William Range east to the Brisbane Range. A second group occurs from the Grampians west of the Mt William range and in the Little Desert, and is characterised by round stems and linear non-glaucous juvenile leaves that are sessile for many nodes. The third group occurs in eastern Victoria and is characterised by seedlings with often square stems and broad-lanceolate, non- glaucous juvenile leaves that are distinctly petiolate by the 11th node. Subseries Bridgesiana Е. angophorides КЛ. Baker (Apple-topped Box) Е. bridgesiana КЛ. Baker ssp. bridgesiana (Apple box) The green juvenile leaves, discolorous adult leaves and upright habit of Е, angophoroides contrast with the glaucous juveniles, concolorous adult leaves and crooked habit of Е. bridgesiana. There are also clear distinctions in the phyllotaxy (leaf arrangement) of the juvenile leaves (Chappill pers. comm.). Subseries Globulinae E. globulus Labill, spp. globulus (Southern Blue Gum) E. globulus ssp. bicostata (Maiden Blakely & Simm.) Kirkpatr. (Eurabbie) E. globulus spp. maidenii (F. Muell.) Kirkpatr. (Maiden’s Gum) E. globulus spp. pseudoglobulus (Naudin 17 ex Maiden) Kirkpatr. (Victorian Eurabbie). The status of the Victorian Blue Gum is still unresolved. Kirkpatrick (1974) reduced the species to subspecific rank based on the difficulty of accurately delimiting the species. E. cypellocarpa L. Johnson (Mountain Grey Gum) E. goniocalyx F. Muell. ex Miq. (Long- leaved Box) E. nortonii (Blakely) L. Johnson (Long- leaved box) Тће glaucous buds, fruits, leaves and branchlets of E. nortonii contrast with the non-glaucous E. goniocalyx. E. nortonii generally prefers more extreme rocky sites. The so called phantom hybrids of Е. cypellocarpa x E. goniocalyx at Anglesea and the Grampians described in Parsons & Kirkpatrick (1972) will be accorded specific status (Watson et al. in prep.). The new species is closely related to Æ. cypellocarpa. e LEE Subseries Viminalinae E. viminalis Labill. ssp. viminalis E. viminalis var. racemosa F. Muell. ex Maiden E. viminalis ssp. cygnetensis C.D. Boomsma E. viminalis var. racemosa Е. Muell. ex Maiden should at least be raised to sub- specific rank and may be sufficiently distinct from А. viminalis to justify specific status as E. pryoriana L. Johnson. The unpublished combination, E. viminalis- ssp. pryoriana is used by Costermans (1981) for this taxon. Persistant fibrous bark, flowers commonly in (3-) 7's, com- pact habit and coastal distribution on sand are characteristic. Е. viminalis ssp. cygnetensis is a western form with persistant bark and flowers in 7’s. In the absence of juvenile leaves, А; viminalis ssp. cygnetensis is difficult to distinguish from E. aromophloia. Eucalyptus viminalis Labill. (Manna Gum), also exhibits considerable morphological variability. A widely distributed tree in a variety of habitats in South-eastern Australia, Photo: R. Lee, courtesy library of National Herbarium of Victoria. 18 Victorian Nat. Subseries Cordatinae E. cephalocarpa Blakely (Mealy Stringy- bark) Е. cinerea Е. Muell. ex Benth. (Argyle Apple) Costermans (1981) notes three forms presently referred to Е, cephalocarpa and E. cinerea in Victoria and refers to the unpublished combinations foreshadowed in Pryor and Johnson (1971), of E. cinerea ssp. cinerea and Е. cinerea ssp. cephalocarpa Е, saxatilis Kirkpatrick & Brooker (Suggan Buggan Mallee) Willis (1972) referred to this then undes- cribed species in a footnote to Е, glaucescens. The campanulate fruit with a flared rim is characteristic. Section Adnataria Subseries Polyanthemae E. bauereana Schauer (Fuzzy Box) E. polyanthemos Schauer (Red Box) The thin, green leaves of the crown and conical fruits of E. bauereana, contrast with the thick, glaucous and typically blue leaves of E. polyanthemos. In some locations these species are difficult to distinguish. Subseries Melliodorinae E. leucoxylon Е. Muell. ssp. leucoxylon (Yellow Gum) E. leucoxylon ssp. megalocarpa Boland (Large-fruited Yellow Gum) E. leucoxylon ssp. pruinosa (F. Muell. ex Miq.) Boland (Inland Blue Gum) E. leucoxylon ssp. megalocarpa (syn. E. leucoxylon var. erythrostema F. Muell. ex Miq.) and Е. leucoxylon ssp. pruinosa (syn. E. leucoxylon var. pruinosa F. Muell.) are currently recognised in Victoria. E. sideroxylon А. Cunn. ex Woolls ssp. sideroxylon (Red Ironbark) E. sideroxylon ssp. tricarpa L. Johnson. The broad juveniles, flowers in 3's and large fruits of E. sideroxylon ssp. tricarpa contrast with the typical subspecies. Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The author is grateful to Dr, Pauline Ladiges (University of Melbourne) and Mr. David Albrecht (National Herbarium of Victoria) for valuable comments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Brooker, M.I.H. (1977) Eucalyptus cyanophylla, a new species from South Australia and Victoria. Trans, К. Soc. S. Austral, 101(1) 15-18. Brooker, M.LH. (1983) Field guide to Eucalyptus Vol. 1, South Eastern Australia, Inkata Press, Melbourne. Chappill, Ј., Ladiges, PY. & Boland, D. (1986) Eucalyptus aromaphloia Pryor & Willis - a redefinition of geographical and morphological boundaries. Austral. J. Bot. 34: 395-412. Costermans, L. (1981) Native trees and shrubs of South Eastern Australia, Rigby, Melbourne. Kirkpatrick, J. (1974) The numerical intraspecific taxonomy of Eucalyptus globulus Labill (Myrtaceae) J. Linn. Soc. Bot. 69: 89-104. Ladiges, PY., Humphries, C.J. & Brooker, МАН. (1983) Cladistic relationships and biogeographic patterns in the peppermint group of Eucalyptus. Austral. J. Bot, 31: 565-84 Ladiges, PY., Dale, M.B., Ross, D.R. & Shields, K.G. (1984) Seedling characters and phylogenetic relationships in the informal Series Ovatae of "ucalyptus, Subgenus Symphyomyrtus. Austral. J. Bot. 32: 1-13. Marginson, LC. (1984) An analysis of patterns of variation in two closely related species of Eucalyptus I'Herit. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Melbourne. Morris, РЕ. (1944) The Late Percival К.Н. St John. Vict. Nat. 61(5): 95 Newnham, M.R., Ladiges, PY. & Whiffin, T. (1986) Origin of the Grampians shining peppermint — a new subspecies of Eucalyptus willisii Ladiges, Humphries & Brooker. Austral. Л Bot, 34(3): 331-348. Parsons, R.F. & Kirkpatrick, J.B. (1972) Possible phantom hybrids in Eucalyptus. New Phytol. 71: 1213-1219 Pryor, L.D. & Johnson, L.A.S. (1971) A classification of the Eucalypts. Australian National University, Canberra. Simmons, D. & Brown, G. (1986) The distribution of some Eucalyptus species (the Swamp Gums) in the Yarra Valley, Victoria. Vict. Nat. 103(1); 19-25. Willis, J.H. (1972) A handbook to plants in Victoria Volume H, Dicotyledons. Melbourne University Press. 19 Nature Notes A CLOTHES-PEG VARIETY OF THE ORB-WEB SPIDER Araneus transmarinus By NOEL SCHLEIGER* Figure 1. Female (left) and male (right) shelter on separate clothes pegs on a makeshift clothesline facing southerly, 3 Jacqueline Court, Point Lonsdale, late April, 1968. Each has an access line to the orb-web below. In March 1986, on looking through the kitchen window of 3 Jacqueline Court, Point Lonsdale, a well-nourished brown. spider was seen sheltering in the scoop of the leg of a broken plastic clothes peg on a makeshift rope clothes line (Fig. 1). Between the line and the back fence and parallel to the line of vision was a large ovally symmetrical orb web strung on bridging threads running from the pegs downward to the fence and to the shrub- bery below (Figs. 2, 3). The ingenuity of this spider to use the scoop in a broken peg to shelter from the weather and hide from its prey took my interest. Main (1980, 1984), Child (1968), Mascord (1983), gave illustrations and descriptions of orb- weaving spiders referring to them as garden spiders up to 24mm long with coarsely hairy body and legs and strong abdominal shoulder humps. The male and female spiders described in Figs. 4-6 are not as hairy as Eriophora biapicata figured by Walker (1982:12). The abdomen of Eriophora is more triangular and pointed * 1 Astley Street, Montmorency, 3094. 20 de LE eu № ре: Figure 2. The orb web was illuminated by spraying with a water jet siphon used for watering indoor plants. There are 24 radials and 19 to 21 links on the outer annulus. The lack of links at the centre allows less wind resistance — wind has distorted spaces between the links in the lower part of the orb. The lower part of the orb is anchored to “bottle brush” and shrubs. Victorian Nat. Figure 3. Note the bridging threads between the orb and the clothesline. The peg on the right shelters the male Araneus. than in Araneus. Mascord (1983:86) remarked on the value of the Araneus species keeping down insect pests. He described the female as ranging from 20-25mm in length whilst the male is smaller 15-17mm which is in accord with Figs. 4 and 5. Main (1984:191-2) describes the structure and web construction of Araneus as well as the method by which it disposes of the prey caught in the web. This female Araneus took up its residence in the peg leg in early March and was still in residence in mid-May. A male arrived about mid-April and disappeared Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) Figure 4. Close-up view of the right peg showing the male in its resting position. Linking threads to the bridging thread and to other pegs behind it. Figure 5. A close up view of left peg (with one leg broken) to house female individual. Note how the third right tarsus is in contact with the thread to detect movement due to change of weight on web or wind movement. A similar habit is seen in Curling leaf spider Phonognatha graeffei. after about 2 weeks of co-habitation (Figs. ] and 4). 21 Figure б. A strong wind and wet weather form of web of Araneus transmarinus. View looking south. Web plane is east- west. Note fewer radials, wider-spaced links and smaller diameter of web. Top: Wide view to show bridging ties. Bottom: Close up view to show radials and concentric links. In windy or wet weather, the web spun is much smaller with fewer radials (say 12 to 16), with only about 14 concentric and wider-spaced links per segment (see Fig. 6). In fine, calm weather the web is larger, say 25 to 30 radials, with over 20 links per segment, and the spacing is much closer. In all cases the plane of the web is in the direction of the wind. One can thus forecast the weather in the early morning at Point Lonsdale by noting the Orb webs. The direction of the plane 22 of the webs gives the wind direction. If the wind is strong with rain the orb web will be small, coarsely-textured with fewer radials and concentric links. On the other hand a large oval orb-web with closely spaced radials and links means a fine, calm day. In late summer and autumn the curling leaf spider Phonognatha graffei also behaves similarly. In nasty weather it will angle its curled leaf in the wind and not spin its orb fan. It will strengthen its Victorian Nat. bridging ties between bushes. These bridging ties will be both parallel and perpendicular to the wind direction. REFERENCES Child, J., 1968, Australian Spiders, 104p, Periwinkle — Cheshire, Lansdowne, 280 Bourke Street, Melbourne 3000. Main, Barbara Y., 1980, Spiders of Australia. 125p, Axion Books - Jacaranda Press, 83 Palmerston Crescent, South Melbourne. Main, Barbara Y., 1984, Spiders, 296p, The Australian Naturalist Library, Collins, Sydney, London. Mascord, Ramon, 1983, Australian Spiders in Colour, llip- A. Н. and A. W. Reed Pty, Ltd., Wellington, N.Z. Walker, К. L., 1982, Spiders Commonly Found т Melbourne, 24p, National Museum of Victoria, Swanston Street, Melbourne. REPORT OF SPRINGTIME GET-TOGETHER OF VICTORIAN FIELD NATURALISTS CLUBS ASSOCIATION AT BALLARAT OCTOBER 4th and 5th 1986 The weather forecast was for cool sunny weather on Saturday, October 4th, but the rain descended continuously. A party of har- dy, cheerful, but very wet Friends of Clarkesdale Bird Observers Reserve at Linton were waiting patiently for us beside the sod- den roadside in front of the Ranger's Cot- tage. Twenty seven dry Field Naturalists, who had driven out from the Old Ballarat Village Inn after lunch, descended and within minutes were also wet through, but thoroughly warm from the exertion of tramp- ing through soggy grassland and open stringy-bark forest of the Reserve, which has been so beautifully planted with acacias (at present in full flower), hakeas and grevilleas. We crossed the flooded Springdalla Creek by foot-bridge and later along a narrow concrete wall of a road ford. In spite of the rain we identified six orchids in flower within 100 yards of the bus; there were large colonies of Nodding Greenhoods (Pterostylis nutans), two species of Diuris, the Leopard Orchid (D. maculata) and Golden Moths (D. pedun- culata), the Spider Orchid (Caladenia dilatata), the Tall Greenhood (Pterostylis longifolia), as well as a closed pink sun orchid (Thelymitra sp.) and many leaves of Helmet- orchids (Corybas sp.J. Further into the forest there were brilliant magenta crops of Tetratheca ciliata, deep violet masses of Hardenbergia violacea, the Ivy-leaved Violet (Viola hederacea), Blue Squills (Chamaescilla corymbosa), Yellow Stars (Hypoxis glabella) and patches of scarlet Running Postman (Kennedia pro- strata), also mats of the beautiful pale pink Peach Heath (Lissanthe strigosa) and clumps of pinky-white Beard Heath (Leucopogon Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) virgatus). All these were common flowers, but blooming so beautifully in the rain. The only native wattles that we encountered in the Reserve were Blackwood (Acacia melanox- ylon) and Hedge Wattle (A. рагадоха). The most spectacular of the planted acacias was the N.S.W. Fringed Wattle (A. fimbriata), a golden mass of about one metre tall. The eucalypts were mainly Messmates (Eucalyptus obliqua) and some fine old Candlebarks (E. rubida). From a lakeside bird-hide we observed a Black Swan with cygnets, Crested Grebes, a Coot and one Black Cormorant. Other birds seen and heard in the Reserve were a Kookaburra, a White-throated Tree Creeper, a Restless Flycatcher, a Grey Thrush and a Rufous Whistler and we heard the cry of the Fan-tailed Cuckoo. Along the route we had observed flocks of Corellas, Galahs, Straw- necked and White Ibis, Ravens and Magpies. But in spite of sheets of water lying in the paddocks, water birds were rare. That evening, the post-dinner meeting had to be curtailed as our one course meal in the restaurant claimed two hours. However, ap- proximately 40 people attended the evening meeting in the Conference Hall of the Inn and a Roll Call disclosed that members from the following clubs were present: Ballarat, Creswick, Stawell, Benalla, Melbourne, Mor- nington and Mt. Martha (with 9 members) and Ringwood. Mr. Phil Day, the retiring Head of the Geology at Ballarat College of Advanced Education, then gave a most interesting il- lustrated lecture on the Basalt Plains of Western Victoria and the evidence of suc- cessive lava flows at the Devil's Kitchen, 23 which was the venue for our excursion the following day, October 5th. He said that the area at Pigoreet was a pic- turesque little area which had been intensely settled in the gold mining era and that there would be an interesting display of garden escapes as well as native plants. He warned that the Woady Yallock Creek, which had formed the ravine, would be in flood and would be difficult to cross. He then showed us photos of the steeply tilled and folded bedrock of sandstone, slates and phyllites (which felt smooth to the touch) which had been covered by several volcanic lava flows, some as recent as 5000 years ago. He explain- ed how the lava sets solid at 1000°C and breaks into columns, which were visible as “organ pipes" along the cliffs and some of which had been undercut by the Creek. We also saw the entrance to tunnels made by the miners to reach the alluvial gold deposits below the creek, Commenting on the wildlife of the area, Мг. Day noted that two years earlier, rabbits had been in plague proportions, but Myx- omatosis had broken out and their numbers had decreased. Three members of the Creswick Field Naturalists Club were present at the lecture, who had seen during one of their excursions to the Devil’s Kitchen some years previously a strange black panther-size animal walking nonchalantly along the top of the cliff, it had a long black tail and walked like a cat; it was observed through binoculars throughout, but there was no explanation of its presence. Mr. Day recalled finding a lair in the Victoria Ranges of the Grampians which smelled of cat, had enormous scats and spoor with pads some three inches across, he said that it was thought that feral cats had evolved to gigantic proportions because of the available food supply. Unfortunately, no such excitement occurred during our visit, although we watched expectantly. The weather was gloriously sunny and as we journeyed by bus, we were followed by a convoy of nine private cars and Albert Perry, President of the V.F.N.C.A., gave an ex- cellent commentary of the history of gold mining in the area. We stopped at a roadside bush monument erected to the memory of Ulrich Burke, a Bank Manager who was murdered there by bushrangers in 1864, Later we stopped on the road beside bare green fields which once supported Brownstown, a town of 25 to 30000 people with hotels, shops, etc., supplying the miners who were seeking surface gold, mostly in gravels wash- ed down from Watsons Hill. The tiny Scarsdale school was said to have had some 380 pupils attending in those days. Along the Woady Yallock Creek in the Devil's Kitchen area we found many bushes of the Lemon Bottle-brush (Callistemon pallidus) Wirilda (Acacia retinodes) and the Shrubby Violet-bush (Hymenathera dentata var, angustifolia), as well as magnificent red flowering Correa (said by the Ballarat F.N.C.V. to be С. glabra). We also observed a pair of very dark coloured Peregrine falcons nesting on a small ledge in a broken “organ pipe’’, the hen bird was sitting on a nest and the male was seen to alight beside her carrying something in his beak. A large iron ‘‘billy’’ was boiled and after lunch thanks and farewells were made before we left per bus south to Cape Clear. (Cape Clear has nothing to do with the coast or the ordinary meaning of a Cape but was said to have been the call of an old Irish bullocky meaning ‘‘Keep clear"). We then proceeded to Geelong and back to Melbourne. Dr. Elizabeth K. Turner Subscription Now Due Membership subscriptions are due at the beginning of the year. If you haven't yet renewed please think of it. Prompt payment is a great help to the Club and ensures you will continue to receive the Victorian Naturalist. 24 Victorian Nat. FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Reports of Recent Activities General Meeting Monday, 10th November Silence was observed by the meeting in remembrance of Miss Cecily Allen and Miss McClaren who had both recently died. The President then introduced the speaker for the evening, our Secretary, Mr. Michael Howes who spoke on “Everything You Wanted to Know about Woodlice but were Afraid to Ask" Woodlice, or slaters, are Crustaceans belonging to the large (with over 900 species described) and ancient order, Isopoda. А lot of superstition and folklore has surrounded woodlice; they are supposed to be either lucky or unlucky, to poison food and to be a remedy when swallowed for various ailments. Many colourful names have been given to them, including “Butcher Boys", “Pill Bugs", “Sow Bugs", *Cud-worms", “Cheese Lice", “Coffin Cutters", etc. Тће speaker went on to describe in detail the anatomy and reproduction of woodlice and also to tell something of their ecology. The common introduced woodlouse, Рогпсе о scaber, was introduced to Australia prior to 1840. They range in colour from dark-grey through to pink or purple, the purple colouring apparently being caused by a virus. Mr. Howes finished by describing some of the techniques he used to catch woodlice. His talk was illustrated with slides of many native and introduced species he had caught and photographed. Nature Notes — A report of the November M.S.G.. excursion to the Big Desert, wildflowers were plentiful due to recent rain and the trapping results included 5 Little Pigmy Possums and a Silky Desert Mouse; A pair of Реге- grine Falcons nesting in Dromana Quarry. Mr. Tom Sault. - A report of the Red Beard Orchid from Wantirna. Mr. Doug Weston. Vol. 104 No. 1 (1987) — There is a lot of Boneseed flowering at the moment on the Mornington Peninsula. Mr. Karl Kleinecke. — А brief report of the recent and very successful Warby Ranges Campout on which numerous species of orchids were seen. Mr. William Ashburner. — Small parasitic wasps, hatched from a cupmoth larva. Mr. Urwin Bates. - Regarding Emperor Gum Moths: One spent all day on a Kangaroo Paw in his garden. Mr. Doug Weston. There do not seem to be as many around as there used to be . Dr. Jack Douglas. Still lots east of Melbourne. Mr. Karl Kleinecke. When camping, six or more are often found under the bonnet of his car - perhaps they are seeking water. Mr. Tom Sault. General Meeting Monday, 8th December This being the occasion of the presen- tation of the Australian Natural History Medallion, the president introduced the president of the Royal Society of Victoria, Dr. Terry O'Brien, to make the award to the winner, Mr. Graham Pizzey. Dr. O'Brien spoke of the importance of the work done by people like Mr. Pizzey in educating the public and interesting them in and giving them an appreciation of environmental issues and went on to detail some of Mr. Pizzey's achievements. (А biography of Mr. Graham Pizzey appears in the last issue of The Vic. Nat.). After accepting the Medallion, Mr. Pizzey went on to give the address for the evening, entitled *A Tale of Two Worlds - A Naturalists View of Reality? in which he reflected on the growing gap between those who appreciate Natural History and those who don't. He considers that there are too many people today who remain outside the thrall of Natural History; people who are too selfish, too interested in money and posses- sions and who have too little compassion for others or the natural world. For them a different time scale is important. They are only interested in instant gratification and have no thought for the long term con- sequences of their actions. 25 Because of such attitudes we аге today faced with many enormous environmental problems such as the clearing of our forests, the spread of soil salinity and diseases such as dieback and the urban- ization of Barrier Reef Islands. Mr. Pizzey believes that only by develop- ing a “land ethic" whereby we regard our- selves as belonging to the land rather than the land as a commodity belonging to us, will we come to love and respect the land rather than abuse it. Although he considers that these ideas may sound very idealistic, Mr. Pizzey believes that there is at present a powerful force for change, as so many people now believe that something must be done to stop the destruction of the environment. Exhibits - Under microscopes: Euglena collected às green scum on sandbanks, a walking jellyfish Cnidonema haswellii and several species of hydroids and bryozoans. Mr. Dan McInnes. — Two species of parasitic wasps, one lot emerged from the body of a Cabbage White Butterfly larva and the other from a Cup Moth larva. Mr. Urwin Bates. - Lerps on leaves of Eucalyptus botryoides, Mr. Тот Sault. – Bag Moth cocoons on Prostanthera stems. Mrs. Hilary Weatherhead. Nature Notes — Regarding Lerps: Lerps seem to attack trees more severely when they are already under stress. Mr. William Ashburner. Richard Loyn believes that Bellbirds cultivate Lerps. Dr. Jack Douglas. Lerps do infest stressed redgums — the mobilization of nutrients in the plant seems to bea factor. Bellbirds drive off other lerp-feeders and often just remove the carbohydrate covering, leaving the insect. Lerps are therefore more frequent when Bellbirds are present. Mr. Graham Pizzey. Suburban trees may be particularly badly infested with lerps due to the lack of lerp-feeders such as Pardalottes. Mr. Doug Weston. Noisy Miners do the same as Bellbirds. Mr. Bill Middleton. — А pair of Willy Wagtails have nested in the same nest twice this season at Blackburn Lake. Miss Gwenneth Taylor. - A Red-whiskered Bulbul seen at Yarraville over a period of 1% weeks. Mr. Norm Plever. C. M. Shankly. Macedon and Pyrete Ranges Bibliographies The Macedon Range Conservation Society has published a valuable research document entitled “Annotated Bibliographies to the Flora, Fauna and Landscape of the Macedon and Pyrete Ranges". The 18 page document, compiled by lan Lunt, includes 95 reports, articles, books and submissions which relate to the natural environment of the two ranges. All articles are arranged in categories (e.g. flora, mammals, planning, etc.) to enable easy reference. A select list of recent and com- prehensive reports, which provide the most useful information on the biology of the ranges, is also included. The annotated bibliographies will prove invaluable to everyone with an interest in the flora, fauna and landscape of the Macedon and Pyrete Ranges and surrounds. Copies are avail- able for $3.00 (to cover production and mail- ing costs), from the Macedon Range Conserva- tion Society, PO. Box 51, Macedon, 3440. Special Note for Authors Using Wordprocessors Many wordprocessing and microcomputer floppy disks can now be transcribed direcily to our printer's typesetting equipment, saving the effort and cost of rekeying. Authors of papers which have been typed on a wordprocessor should tell the editor (at the time the paper is first submitted), what type of machine and wordprocessing software was used. Note that printed copy must still be submitted. Queries can be directed to Russell Thomson, 17 Powlett St., Heidelberg. 344 5704 (B.H.). 26 Victorian Nat. (Continued from inside front cover) GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Excursions. Botany Group Saturday, 28th February. Cement Creek, Warburton. Ferns and Mosses. Leader: Mr. Arthur Thies. Saturday, 28th March. Grantville. Remnant Fern Gully and Mangrove Foreshore. Leader: S. Rennick. Saturday, 25th April. Doongalla Forest Reserve. Leader: С. Falkingham. Geology Group To be announced. Mammal Survey Group Saturday, 14th-Sunday 15th February. M.M.BW. Farm, Werribee. Saturday, 7th-Monday 9th March, Strathbogie Ranges. Friday 17th-Tuesday 21st April. East Gippsland. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS The Victorian Naturalist invites contributions of original papers relating to Australian natural history, particularly of Victoria. All papers are assessed by an independent referee before publication. Short contributions of natural history observations are also invited for use as “Naturalist Notes”. These contributions may be edited, or excerpts published. at the Editors’ discretion. Such notes are not normally refereed. and may be submitted more informally. All contributions are to be written in concise, simple English. For cost reasons, authors of original papers submitted for publication are requested to conform with the following guidelines. Any author who has difficulty in complying with these guidelines. or has queries concerning manuscripts. should consult the Editors before submitting a manuscript Submission of Manuscripts Manuscripts should be sent to The Editorial Com- mittee, Victorian Naturalist, F.N.CV., CA The National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra, 3141. Two typewritten copies of the manuscript should be submitted. Authors are advised to retain a further сору. Format Text should be fully revised, typed double spaced on one side of the paper only, with a wide margin, pages numbered consecutively, and should conform in style to recent issues of the Victorian Nar. Author's name and address or institution should appear beneath the title. Underline only those words to be italicised in the text i.e. genus and species names, and titles of periodicals and books. АП measurements should be expressed in the metric system (SI units). References should be cited in the text as Brown (1981) or (Brown, 1981). Footnotes must beavoided. Acknowledgements should be grouped at the end of the paper before References. References should be listed alphabetically by authors surname at the end of the paper. АП references should be cited in the text. Abbreviations of titles of periodicals should conform with those in A World List of Scientific Periodicals (4th ed., Butterworth). Refer to recent issues of the Vierorian Nat, for the formatting of references. Tables and Figures Tables should only be used for essential data needed to show important points in the text. They should be numbered consecutively, referred to in order in the text, and designed to fit within the print area of 115 x 180 mm. Each table must have ап explanatory caption. Figures may be in the form of drawings or photographs. They should be identified on the back with the author's name and the figure number. The top should be indicated and the magnification by scale where appropriate. Compass directions must be indicated where necessary. All figures should be referred to in the text and numbered consecutively (Fig. 1, Fig. 2 ete.) Figures should be carefully prepared and should be submitted ready for publication, Each should have a short caption, Maximum size is 115 x 180 mm, single column width is 55 mm. Figures are preferably submitted at actual size. Lettering on Figures should be done by the author: care is needed to ensure that all letters are legible after reduction. Line drawings should be made in black ink. Photographs should only be used where essential due to the high cost of printing plates. They should preferably be unmounted, glossy black & white prints, showing good detail and moderate contrast Proof and Reprints Galley proofs will be sent to the author, who should correct and return them as soon as possible. Only the minimum of corrections should be made. Multiple copies of articles can be prepared for the author only at the time of printing. These will be in the form of print run-ons and priced as follows for each multiple of 50 copies: 1-2 pp 3-4 pp 5-6 pp 7-8 pp 9-10 pp 11-12 pp 13-14 pp $18 $25 $35 $45 $55 865 $75 Orders for these ‘reprints’ must be made at the time authors return their corrected proofs to the editor. Taxonomic Papers Papers describing new taxa will not be accepted for publication unless the primary type material 15 deposited in a recognised public museum or herbarium. It is suggested that in other more general papers where taxonomy is discussed, voucher material be lodged in a public collection, and the repository details cited tn the text, Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: FNCV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: То stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1985-1986 | President; Dr JACK DOUGLAS, 42 Sunhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 А.Н.) | Vice President: Мг С. LOVE, РО. Box 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary: Мг M. D. HOWES, c/o R.M.LT. Dept. of Applied Biology, G.P.O. Box 24767, Melbourne, 3001. (386 2980). Hon. Treasurer; Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Cres., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 А.Н.) Subscription-Secretary: Мг М. STANFORD, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Editorial Material: The Editorial Committee, Victorian Naturalist, FNCV, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra, 3141. Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, ENCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 A.H.) Excursion Secretary: Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter: Miss CHRISTINE SHANKLY, 50 Glyndon Road, Camberwell, 3124 (836 7187 A.H.) Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr BOB GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073. Sales Officer (Books): Mrs Н. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Мг D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148. (211 4997) Microscopical; Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of ihe F.N.C V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates tor 1987 Metropolitan. Мелшер батаа бейи cre e e welt RU ires E vig Ле $25.00 Joint Metropolitan Members- ___............... TERR зад З ЫНАА КЕЕ КЕ, $27.00 Country/Interstate/Retired Members Ре $23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members 325. УЧТОН ОЕА нуна л $25.00 Student (full-time) . . . ^ 1 ajaks - 13.324. 3i eimi ttim a olet t ml rip ДПО ЕВ $18.00 Junior (under 18; no Victorian Naturalist),.,........, ex чан $5.00 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist.... 2...2., ЗСС а кав А $23.00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ............. АА $30.00 з ЧОГУ Ма арас аео агае оит > $25.00 Subscriber Clubs ............ * И еее МН $23.00 individual Journals .....:..:.............. У „мк | РО Lt $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after end of March ... grass fe Е po t JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD. 1.13 ABBOTSEO RD ст Wet ме брзе час э £X wl. 104, №. 2 № March/April 1987 Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Registered by Australia Post. Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 ЕМСУ DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Monday, 13th April, 8.00 p.m. Mr. Robin Youl. “The Government’s role in tree growing”. Monday, 11th May, 8.00 p.m. Annual General Meeting and Presidential Address. Monday, 15th June, 8.00 p.m. Dr. Bill Birch. *Crystals". New Members : Metropolitan: S. Manser, 24 Geades Crescent, Hoppers Crossing, 3030. Dr. Geoff Lacey, 5/9 Wattle Avenue, Glenhuntly, 3163. Mrs. Cherry Wilcox, 1-7 201 Spring Street, Melbourne, 3000 Mr. André Cleghorn and Mrs. Hilde Cleghorn, 18 Mundy Street, Mentone, 3194. Mr. Geoff Carr, 13 Lawson Street, East Hawthorn, 3123, Ms. Sarah Bedggood, 116 James St., Rosanna, 3084. Country: Dr. Roger S. Briggs, P.O. Box 402, Myrtleford, 3737. Mr. Rod Barker and Mrs. I. Barker, Bunyip House, c/o P.O. Healesville, 3777. Mrs, J. А, Forbes, Tankerton, French Island, 3921. (Joint with Dr. Forbes, a current member) FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 3rd May, Lysterfield Park. The coach will leave from Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m.. Fare $10, bring a picnic lunch, Sunday, 3151 May. Fungi excursion to be led by Dr. J. Н. Willis. Note date. This will be a week earlier than the date given in the calendar of events to avoid the holiday weekend, The destination will be decided later according to weather conditions, Fare $12, bring a pienic lunch. Friday, 16th — Sunday, 18th October. Waranga Basin, Rushworth will be the venue for the Victorian Field Naturalists Club's Association Spring get- together. Accomodation has been booked in the holiday camp with meals. This will be in bunks with pillow and mattress, but it will be necessary to take pillowslips, sleeping bags or blankets and linen and towels. The camp has a dining room and a large lounge. The facilities are within the building and most members should have a lower bunk. There is а camping ground with a few on-site vans for those who prefer (о camp and the area is within easy reach of Rushworth Forest which is noted for its wildflowers. Benalla ЕМС. will host the weekend. Based on 20 members, the cost with meals should be about $100. Please book аз soon as possible. GROUP MEETINGS АП FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Meetings. Day Group - Third Thursday Wednesday, 15th April (note change of day). Planetarium, Museum of Victoria, Meet at Swanston Street entrance at 11.30 a.m.. Session begins at 2.00 p.m.. Leader: Andy Blackburn 379 8960. Thursday, 21st May. Caulfield Park and Caulfield Racecourse Museum. Meet at the corner of Hawthorn and Balaclava Roads at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Dan McInnes 211 2427. Thursday, 18th June. Burnley Gardens. Meet at the entrance of the gardens at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Joan Miller 836 2681. At the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Botany Group - Second Thursday Thursday, 9th April. **Western Australia — Darling Range and Northern Sand Plains? Mrs. Hilary Weatherhead. Thursday, 14th May. “The Impact of Introduced Weeds on the Native Flora? Mr. Geoff Carr. Thursday, llth June. Members’ Night. (Continued on inside back cover) Naturalist Volume 104, Number 2 March / April, 1987 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: R. Thomson. Assistant Editors: D. McClellan, V. Spencer Diet analysis of the Western Grey Kangaroo (Macropus fuliginosus) in Wyperfeld National Park by microscopic faecal analysis by P. Beetham, J. Kiely, J. MacKenzie, S. Vaartjes, A. L. Pennell and T. ЈУАН РАВНИ ВИ Ка rM PN e зу Жаа, ки АИЛ 32 Diet of the Red Fox (Vulpes vulpes) in the Eldorado Hills of North- Eastern Victoria by G. D. Baker and Robert Degabriele............. 38 Notes from the National Herbarium — 3. A poorly known Melaleuca У ОСА А КУ РОО lies 3. о. ДАЧА РИМА а qitod Lee 42 Additional field notes and observations of Thesium australe В. Browxpsagtaliceade) руна Оле asd tr ine: EROR tart cce er 46 Naturalists Review: ‘Flora of Australia Volume 46 (Iridaceae to ПУ ЕА ОИС, V БОТОБЕК, eT Е ТТ 49 шина у Сас Мада ENTES ATEN as. анны Fere ere rtr 51 RING ЕЕрО оу Тет А rz ctr rias ra РТА 52 FNCV Call for Nominations for Council and Office Bearers...... 57 Cover Illustration: Нађи of Melaleuca ericifolia (see page 42) Photo: D. Albrecht. Diet Analysis of the Western Grey Kangaroo (Macropus fuliginosus) in Wyperfeld National Park by Microscopic Faecal Analysis By P. ВЕЕТНАМ*, J. KIELY*, J. MACKENZIE*, S. VAARTIES*, А. L, PENNELL* f, AND T. P. O’BRIEN*, Abstract Diet analyses were carried out by micro- scopic examination of faecal pellets on samples collected in the six major habitats of Wyperfeld National Park during August 1983, in order to ascertain the selective and/or preferential feeding habits of the Western Grey Kangaroo (Macropus Juliginosus). It was found that the majority of the diet consisted of mono- cotyledons, although actual percentages and species eaten changed between habitats, Introduction Diet analyses of herbivorous mammals, such as sheep and kangaroos, have been recorded at many different locations. For example Storr (1961), Griffiths er al. (1974), Ellis et al. (1977) used microscopic analyses Of faeces, and Taylor (1983) used analysis of gut content, to ascertain the diet of herbivorous mammals. This study, based at Wyperfeld National Park (NW Victoria) in August 1983, investigated the feeding habits of the Western Grey Kangaroo (Macropus fuliginosus), using microscopic analyses of faeces. Western Grey Kangaroos are found in a wide area, from south-western Australia through the south into western Victoria, where its range overlaps with the Eastern Grey Kangaroo (M. giganteus). Western Greys are predominantly noc- turnal or crepuscular (twilight) in habit (Russell 1974), They spend much of the middle part of the day lying under trees and shrubs in highly organised social *Botany Dept., Monash University, Clayton, Vic, 3168, Australia, TAddress for correspondence and reprints, 32 groups (Caughley 1964). They are seden- tary, rarely moving more than a few miles in search of food, even in drought condi- tions (Russell 1974). Their home range (1.е., the area over which they travel in pursuit of routine activities), is therefore very small in comparison with Red Kangaroos (Megaleia rufa) which often travel extensively (Russell 1974). Previous studies (Low et al. 1981; Russell 1974; Griffiths et a/, 1974) have shown that kangaroos much prefer grasses to other feed; Eastern Greys often eat approximately 89% grass in their diet. Kangaroos have a higher proportion of monocotyledons in their diet than dico- tyledons, although monocotyledons have a lower nitrogen content (Brown and Main 1967; Griffiths et al. 1974; Taylor 1980). Griffiths et al. (1974) suggest that kanga- roos are capable of using the soluble carbohydrates present in grasses as their energy source, thereby avoiding the need to deaminate proteins for this purpose, and so retaining more nitrogen. Morgan (1986) has classified Wyperfeld National Park into the following six habi- tats: Lakebeds; Callitris Woodlands; River Red Gum Woodlands (Eucalyptus cam- aldulensis); Black Вох Woodlands (Eucalyptus largiflorens); Mallee and Heath; and Sand-Dune Herbfields. This study used this habitat classification to investigate the distribution and diet of the Western Grey Kangaroo in Wyperfeld National Park during August 1983, Materials and Methods Using binoculars and rangefinders, two transects (after Morgan 1986) were covered in order to calculate the distribution and Victorian Nat, density of the Western Grey Kangaroo. Between them, these transects covered all six of Morgan’s major habitats. A mini- mum of six subsamples of fresh and old kangaroo pellets were gathered from each habitat. Plant specimens were collected from each habitat; some were pressed for later identification using the Wyperfeld herbarium based at the Botany Depart- ment of Monash University, while others were stored as fresh samples at 4°C for later analysis. Cuticular Preparations Fresh material from selected, identified plant specimens was cut into small pieces and cleared, usually overnight, in 4% sodium hypochlorite solution. The cuticles were then rinsed well to remove bleach and stained in crystal violet or gentian violet for approximately 30 seconds and mount- ed in Karo syrup on microscope slides (К. Waters, Zoology Department, Monash University, pers. сотт.; Ellis et al. 1977). Both adaxial and abaxial surface prepara- tions were made and distinguishing features were photographed for reference at x100, x400 and x600. Faecal Preparations The six or more subsamples collected from each habitat were pooled, and one faecal analysis per habitat was carried out, using the following method. Kangaroo pellets were soaked in warm water, ground, using a pestle and mortar, and then cleared in 4% sodium hypochlorite for an average of 2-4 hours at 50°C, or for longer times (up to several days) if necessary. The residue was rinsed thoroughly with water, stained and mounted as for the cuticular preparations. These slides were then scanned under x100 magnification using а 500pm x 500pm grid. Epidermal segments, lying over grid intersection points, were classified and recorded using epidermal cell shape, hairs and silica bodies as identification aids. Where possible classification was made at the species level but mostly only broad distinctions between the narrow elongated cells of monocotyledons and the tabular irregularly-shaped cells of dicotyledons were made (Esau 1977; Ellis e al. 1977). Results а) Transects The distribution and densities of the Western Grey Kangaroo during August 1983 were greatest in the two most exposed habitats, i.e, Sand-Dune Herbfields and Lakebeds (Table 1). Morgan, (1986) using a similar method over several years in this same area, showed that this is not a constant situation. His data for 1981 are reproduced also in Table 1. b) Species Lists Species lists from each habitat except the Mallee and Heath habitat are included in Table 2 с) Cuticle Reference Preparations Plant species found in faecal pellets collected from the different habitats and the proportions of monocotyledons and dicotyledons are summarised in Table 3. Various pellet samples showed some cuticle fragments which appeared to be different from any of the reference cuticles e.g. Callitris Woodland pellets contained Table 1. The distribution and densities of the Western Grey Kangaroo (Macropus fuliginosus) in six habitats of Wyperfeld National Park (after Morgan 1986) in 1981 & 1983. Habitat August 1983 Individuals/hectare D. G. Morgan 1981 Individuals/hectare Sand-Dune Herbfields 0.4 + 01 0.4 + 0.2 Lakebeds 0.7 + 0.2 03 + 0.1 River Red Gum Woodlands 0.9 + 0,2 0.3 + 0.1 Black Box Woodlands 07 + 03 0.3 + 01 Callitris Woodlands (0.8 + 04 0.1 + 0.1 Mallee and Heath 0.07 + 0.04 0.02 + 0.02 Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) 33 Table 2, The plant species recorded in each habitat. No list was available for Mallee-heath. Р = species present. D = species locally dominant. Di = Dicotyledon М = Monocotyledon River Callitris Sand-Dune Black Box Red Gum Species Woodlands Herbfields | Woodlands Woodlands ^ Lakebeds Acacia spp. (Di) n Actinobole uliginosum (Di) Р Р Р Р Ajuga australis (Di) P Anagallis arvensis (Di) ie Arctotheca calendula (Di) Р Р Brachycome cardiocarpa (Di) Р Втасћусоте perpusilla (Di) р Brassica tournefortii (Di) D D D D P Bromus diandrus (M) Р. Bromus rubens (M) D I2 D ЈУ Calandrinia eremaea (Di) ge P Callitris preissii (M) D Calotis hispidula (Di) B. Capsella bursa-pastoris (Di) [Р Carex bichenoviana (M) R Centaurea melitensis (Di) i Cynoglossum spp. (Di) ls Danthonia spp. (M) ү Р Daucus glochidiatus (M) D Р D P R Enchylaena tomentosa (Di) P Erodium cicutarium (Di) P Е в Erodium crinitum (Di) P P Eucalyptus incrassata (Di) p Gnaphalium involucratum (Di) Р Haloragis heterophylla (Di) Р Harmsiodoxa blennodioides (Di) Р Р Helipterum pygmaeum (Di) p D Hibbertia virgata (Di) n Hordeum leporinum (M) p Р р р р Hypochaeris glabra (Di) D Р Р Р Р Isoetopsis graminifolia (Di) P Р Leptospermum сопасеит (Di) p Marrubium vulgare (Di) Р р Medicago polymorpha (Di) Р р р р Millotia тасгосагра (Di) Р Myriocephalus stuartii (Di) Р Р Р Опоротаит acaulon (Di) Р E Pelargonium australe (Di) E Pentaschistis airoides (M) P P P Plantago varia (Di) P Р Р, Podolepis capillaris (Di) E Schismus barbatus (M) P p m Senecio glossanthus (Di) D Р Senecio lautus (Di) P Senecio vulgaris (Di) Р Silene longicaulis (Di) P Р Sisymbrium orientale (Di) D Sonchus oleraceus (Di) Р Stellaria media (Di) Б; Stipa spp. (M) Р Р Р Trifolium spp. (Di) E P Trifolium tomentosum (Di) Р. | Vulpia bromoides (M) Р P. Vulpia myuros (M) P P 34 Victorian Nat. 1425214 uaoq Mey Аеш suny pay I9ATM шолу $э4ац лея "2u/022D4g рие шпуојај pue 52Х0 ФЕ ү + 55 001 45914 d pI тотовбјига чипарлон ‘поля әләм роцпизр! 5012945 РЕЙ pF 53 001 РО 5рирүроод\ што pay IAA £T "DOissp4g pue штора 'овомрару $ИРХО S1001p IYI pue 'sjsn2snjuag чипарлој әләм рэцииэрт € + OI t + 06 001 ү P [4! оѕру 'paumnsuoo 55218 завиипор jsouu 24} SEM 27214 EFSI £ $8 001 45914 зрпвјроом ход Lja и *quasaid әләм 5144 Рона О] 1e[ruus цорэ|Азоэтр sno[[AudoJo[os в pue $74/7//D;) 1nq роџпиор! зем тромј Ou рорелвар ÁA[peq әләм зојоппо ‘от ojdures uy — = = PIO „ Ol "juauoduroo $$®18-иоп лоГгеш ay] sem 5143170) 1usuoduro» $9648 241 JO 0009 лоло poininsuoo тромј ‘6 a[duIeS uj ЄС +8 t F 6 001 45914 ФЭН № PEN 6 Хупазрг ој prey pue рәрр1Зәр әләм ѕәјәппо ‘g o[dures uy РЕМ р + €8 001 PIO M 8 'S14]1]|D?) pue 221559 '"susun[ospiuag "Dipoln4p 'пш 05. члиоцјира злом роцпизр! $912945 12410 `8 орашев шол) juasqe sem jnq / pue 9 sojdures ur juosaud suopo[A1oorp 2u1 JO 0008 12940 pajnjusuoo umijofi PELER ф = 19 01 “ “ ух ‘sajdures [үе ur јизиодшоз 55818 лоГгеш оу sem vidiny КЕЕ ү S9 001 45214 зрџејроодм 51..11//20) 9 т OI t + 06 001 b : 5 "penuusps А € 18 001 Ш z v әләм 5упрогаиој auajig pue ‘dds шпуојај зпорэ[Азоэтр РЕМ t FES 001 “ “ Е au[ 'Sosse18 оца 158 ЧошШе јиоштшола jsotu Sem 2/d]HA РЕ8 ЕТ 56 001 45914 $р12491эн зипа-рчеб с "unuquiisig 'snonig UNIPOL 'оврмрар SUOPI|AIOIIP ay] pue шпимоаа) шпарлон ‘dds ndijg 'suaqna snuto4gr 898818 әц әләм porjtiuopt SIIAS ү 6t t + 19 t ЖО ц5214 paqaxe1 [ % % зррппо 5111]0) 10 8ипоовлојш 5104 аипр ро ЧАТ ‘ON $910М suopa|fjooq зпорэАлозоцод pu3 JO I2QUinN| ло цә зепаен ajdures "sapoaed NNI jo 2215 овелоле IY) YUM pareduroo әде st Зшоваѕ pus au] әошѕ рцел Кјотешхоладе oq poys uondunsse oy) Ing *poinquisrp Аршорива aq 51104 рыЗ 1ец1 samba uondwnsse siy A[joung ‘bdu = ¿Q ээиенел si pue uornquistp јетшоша в seu suope[A100tp 10 suopa[&1020uour лоцио JO 1oquinu рәлләвдо 291 je pournsse sr 1] "uoneraop рлерив) | F әле syu эоцаруциор 'srsqeuy $994 jo зубом jo Алецций$ € aque 35 Vol. 104 Мо. 2 (1987) а grass of reasonably frequent occurrence with distinctive red staining bodies between the ends of adjoining cells. Discussion Previous studies (Low ef al. 1981, Morgan 1986) have found that kangaroos move to open places during drought for food, but return to sheltered woodlands when there is plentiful food. This study found differences between the habitats in the grass species consumed by Western Grey Kangaroos. Vulpia spp. was the predominant grass found in pellets from Sand-Dune Herbfields, Callitris and Black Box Woodlands, but was not recorded as part of the Lakebed flora. Similarly, Bromus rubens was identified in Lakebed pellets but not in Callitris Woodlands, although it was recorded as abundant in the latter area. The Mallee faecal samples showed a diet consisting of a high proportion of Triodia irritans, even though more palatable plants grew nearby, Griffiths and Barker (1966) suggest that 7riodia irritans, which has a higher nitrogen content than many mono- cotyledons, is eaten in order to supplement the water and nitrogen content of the diet of Red and Grey Kangaroos, especially during periods of drought. R. Waters (pers. comm.) found that Swamp Wallabies (Wallabia bicolor) ate bark at the end of the summer when food was scarce, but at Wyperfeld, the Western Grey Kangaroos were observed eating bark from River Red Gums during August 1983 when food was plentiful and traces of bark fibres were present in River Red Gum faecal pellets. It would be interesting to study the effect of differing seasons on the selective diet of the Western Grey Kangaroo and the varying impacts grazing animals have on such a boom or bust ecological succession environment, The plant species identified in the pellets coincided for the most part with those growing in the habitat from which the pellet was collected. Thus, this study confirms the observations of Morgan 36 (1986) that the Western Grey Kangaroo has a small home range, and is therefore a localised feeder. On the basis of cuticle area, grasses constituted the major dietary component in all habitat types with values ranging from over 90% in the Sand-Dune Herb- field habitat to approximately 66% in Lakebed and Callitris Woodlands. This could indicate that Sand-Dune Herbfield kangaroos are consuming significantly greater proportions of grasses than in the Lakebed or Callitris Woodlands; or could be a sampling error, as pellets collected from one area may have come only from one animal. There are reservations about the accuracy of the results obtained because of the limited sampling and the techniques used in the microscopic analyses of faeces. Ideally, the required diagnostic features of cuticle used in the analysis of faecal samples are as follows: i) Cuticle must be preserved during digestion and subsequent clearing. ii) Features should be relatively constant over the surface of the cuticle. iii) Features should occur at high frequency so that they occur on most suitable cuticle pieces. iv) Distinctive variations between species should be observed. Several potentially useful diagnostic features of cuticles e.g. orientation and shape of cells; trichome structures (ie. micro and macrohairs, stellate and clothing trichomes and papillae); silica bodies; costal and intercostal zones; anticlinal cell walls and stomata have been dis- cussed (Metcalfe 1960; Metcalfe and Chalk 1950) and were used to identify plant species in this study. Slater and Jones (1971) found that the cuticle of different plant species, and even genera, are often extremely similar and pointed out that with time, in sodium hypochlorite, certain cuticles are destroy- ed, or so changed as to be unrecognisable, This was especially so in dicotyledonous plants when the silica content is lower. R. Victorian Nat. Waters (pers. comm.) working on the diet of wallabies in a high rainfallarea of South Gippsland, found that the time required to clear sclerophyllous particles eg. Eucalyptus leaves, was too long for the preservation of less resistant Trifolium spp. Waters suggests that up to three different clearing times may be necessary for each sample in order to determine accurately the different species found in faeces, and Slater and Jones (1971) found legumes in- gested by cattle and detectable in oeso- phageal fistulas could not be detected in the faeces. More easily identifiable species will tend to be overestimated in the diet (e.g. Triodia irritans), and featureless species will tend to be overlooked. Griffiths er а! (1974) showed that estimates comparing stomach contents and faeces were in fairly good agreement but that the sclerophyllous species tended to over estimated using faeces. This difference might be real, if lower intestinal tract digestion in fact takes place, although Dawson and Ellis (1979) showed there were consistent differences between gut and faecal estimates for some plant categories. In particular, grasses were estimated to be lower in the faeces than in the guts and plants with stellate trichomes e.g. Senecio glossanthus and Pelargonium australe were always overestimated, suggesting that the principal factor affecting the difference between gut and faecal estimates was the character of the plant itself and not the type of digestion it had undergone. How- ever, in semi-arid environments (similar to the one of this study) Ealey and Main (1967), Stewart (1967), Field (1968), Sparks and Malachek (1968), Storr (1968), Bailey et al. (1971) and Griffiths er al. (1974) have considered faecal analysis to be reasonably reliable because of the robust nature of the sclerophyllous plants containing either silica hairs or bodies of various shapes or which are lignified. Even a relatively mushy plant like Portulacca oleracea grown in an arid climate is robust enough to retain identifiable characteristics for faecal analysis. Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) The quantitative method used (point sampling using random points or, as in this study, using a widely spaced grid) provides a means of estimating relative cuticle areas in the preparation. It was used in prefer- ence to other methods, such as presence or absence of cuticle type in a microscope field (Sparks and Malachek (1968); В. Waters pers. comm.) or classification of 400 particles as either monocotyledons or dicotyledons (Griffith ef al. 1974), because it was easier to standardise between different workers. In a population study it would be best to pool data derived from single pellets from a number of different animals of different age and sex over a period of time. Pellets dropped from animals with diurnal feeding patterns should be sampled at various times throughout the day. The study of single pellets can at best give information about diet over one or two hours only, depending on gut passage rates. Allowing for these reservations, the methods used in this study have been widely used, Taylor (1983) found large kangaroos to be almost exclusive grazers with a high proportion (78% to 98%) of low-fibre grass in the diet and a variable dicotyledon component depending on the seasonal conditions and vegetation. This study confirmed these observations and, although there were more dicotyledon species in each habitat (Table 2), higher numbers of monocotyledon species were subsequently identified in the faeces (Table 3). Brassica was abundant in all habitat types except possibly the Mallee, but it was not identified as a significant component of the kangaroos' diet. This is probably due to selective grazing by kangaroos, or could be due to poor preservation or poor recognition of the cuticle. Sanson (1982) shows that dental morphology of kanga- roos is adapted to grass eating, their many cusps being continually replaced and allowing them to cope with the high fibre content found in some grasses which supports the view that kangaroos do graze selectively for grasses. 37 Conclusions Western Grey Kangaroos (Macropus fuliginosus) at Wyperfeld National Park during August 1983 appeared to prefer open rather than sheltered habitats. The results from the microscopic exam- ination of faecal pellets must be treated with caution. However, it appears certain that Western Grey Kangaroos selectively graze monocotyledon rather than dico- tyledon species. The actual species grazed differ according to habitat. Acknowledgements David Morgan of Melbourne College of Advanced Education for help with calculations of Western Grey Kangaroo density, and for supervising the transects. The assistance of the staff of the National Parks Service during the period of this study is gratefully acknowledged. References Bailey, P. T., Martensz, Р. М. and Barker, К. 1971. The Red Kangaroo Megaleia rufa (Desmarest) in north- western New South Wales. С.5./. К.О, Wildl. Кез, 16: 29-39, Brown, G. D. and Main, A. R. 1967. Studies on marsupial nutrition, V. The nitrogen requirements of the Euro, Macropus robustus. Aust. J. Zool. 15: 7-27, Caughley, G. J. 1964, Social organisation and daily activity of the Red Kangaroo and the Grey Kangaroo, J. Mamm. 45: 429-436 Ealey, E. Н. M. and Main, А. К. 1967. Ecology of the Euro, Macropus robustus (Gould) in north-western Australia 11. Seasonal changes in nutrition. C.S.LR.O. Wildl. Res, 12: 53-65. Ellis, B. A., Russell, E. M., Dawson, T. J. and Harrop, C. 1. F. 1977. Seasonal changes in diet preferences of free-ranging Red Kangaroos, Euros and Sheep in western NSW. Aust, Wildl. Res. 4; 127-144. Esau, K. 1977. Anatomy of Seed Plants. 2nd edition. John Wiley and Sons, New York. Field C. R. 1968. A comparative study of the food habits of some wild ungulates in the Queen 38 Elizabeth National Park, Uganda. /n ‘Comparative Nutrition of Wild Animals; (Ed. M. A. Crawford), Academic Press, Inc. London and New York. Griffiths, M. and Barker, К. 1966. The plants eaten by sheep and by kangaroos grazing together in a paddock in south-western Queensland. C.S.7. R.O. Wildl. Res. 11: 145-167. Griffiths, M., Barker, К. and MacLean, L, (1974). Further observations on the plants eaten by kangaroos and sheep grazing together in a paddock in south-western Queensland. Aust. Wild. Res. Г: 27-43. Low, W. A., Muller, W. J., Dudzinski, M. L. and Low, В. 5. 1981. Population fluctuations and range communities preferences of. Red Kangaroos in Central Australia. J Appl. Ecol. 18: 27-36. Metcalfe, С. У. 1960. Anatomy of the Monocotyledons. I. Graminae. Clarendon Press. Metcalfe, C. V. and Chalk, I. 1950, Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. Clarendon Press. Morgan, D. G. 1986. Estimating Vertebrate Population Densities by Line Transect Methods. Occ. Papers No. П. Melb. College Advanced Education. Carlton Campus. р162. Russell, E, M. 1974. The biology of Kangaroos (Marsupialia; Macropodidae). Матта! Rev. 4:1-59 Sanson, G. 1982. Vertebrate Section Lecture Notes. Zoology Dept., Monash University. p. 203. Slater, 1. and Jones, В, J. 1971. Estimation of diets selected by grazing animals from microscopic analysis of the faeces – a warning. Л Aust. Inst. Agric. 561.37: 238-240, Sparks D. К. and Мајасћек, С. J. 1968. Estimating percentage dry weights їп diets using a microscopic technique. J. Range Mgmt. 21: 264-265. Stewart, D. К. M. 1967. Analysis of plant epidermis in faeces; a technique for studying the food preferences of grazing herbivores. Л appl. Ecol. 4: 83-11. Storr, G. М. 1961. Microscopic analysis of faeces. А technique for ascertaining the diet of herbivorous mammals. Aust. J. Biol. Sci, 14; 157-164. Storr, G. M, 1968. Diet of kangaroos (Megaleia rufa and Macropus robustus) and merino sheep near Port Headland, Western Australia. J. R. Soc. West. Aust, 51: 25-32. Taylor, К. J, 1983. The diet of the Eastern Grey Kangaroo and Wallaroo in areas of improved and native pasture in the New England Tablelands. Aust, Wild. Res. 10: 203-211. Victorian Nat. The Diet of the Red Fox (Vulpes vulpes) т the Eldorado Hills of North-East Victoria. ВУ а. D. BAKER*1 and ROBERT DEGABRIELE* Abstraet During the summer and autumn of 1983 and 1984, 26 fox stomachs and 14 samples of scat and den litter from the Eldorado Hills (north-east Victoria) were examined and their contents iden- tified and quantified. Mammals were the most common prey, with rabbit (Or- yctolagus cuniculus) predominating. Native mammals appeared rarely; one, the common dunnart (Sminthopsis murina), had not previously been reported in this area. Foxes frequently ate insects, the number consumed reflected differences in weather conditions for the two years. This study appears to support the view of the fox as an opportunistic predator and scavenger. Introduction Studies of the diet of the red fox (Vulpes vulpes) in Australia and overseas have tended to indicate the animal to be primarily an opportunistic scavenger and predator, (McIntosh, 1963; Hockman and Chapman, 1982), but therc is still much debate on the economic significance of fox predation in agricultural areas, and its contribu- tion to the decline in numbers of the smaller indigenous mammals and birds. Research into the feeding habits of foxes in Australia has mainly been con- fined to the analysis of stomach contents or scats. Sheep (Ovis aries) and rabbit (Oryctolagus cuniculus), and sometimes house mouse (Mus musculus), constitute the major food items of the fox in the Canberra district. (McIntosh, 1963), *School of Applied Science, Riverina-Murray In- stitute of Higher Education, Wagga Wagga, NSW, 2650 +Present Address: P.O, Box 135, Wangaratta, Vic. 3677. Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) New South Wales (Martenz, 1970, Croft and Hone, 1978) and Victoria (Coman, 1973). A survey carried out in the Kin- chega National Park, where no domestic stock were available, still showed rabbit as the main food item, except in autumn when insects competed for this role (Ryan and Croft, 1974). The main objective of this study was to determine and attempt to evaluate the major components of the fox’s diet in an area of north-east Victoria. Area Surveyed The area in which the survey took place is situated in north-east Victoria between the Ovens Valley and the Pilot Range. A rectangular area of 10 x 5 km was defined on the Survey Corps map of Wangaratta, the grid reference of its south-west corner being 448517. Most of this area is unreserved Crown Land, with its margins adjoining pastoral farmland to the south and west. Annual rainfall averages 700 mm, with winter being the wettest season. Less elevated parts are very frost-prone in winter. The hills are granitic and rise to 400 m above sea level on either side of Reedy Creek, which, except in extremely dry summers, is a permanent creek. The soil is coarse and sandy, very shallow, and gives rise to the dry, open forest which is characteristic of the region. By coincidence, the seasons in which the foxes were sampled were very dif- ferent. The autumn of 1983 followed a period of drought, while the spring and summer of 1984 were much wetter. Methods of Collection Foxes were collected by two methods. A small number were shot during visits to the area; others were made available by farmers and skin hunters of personal acquaintance. 39 The area was divided into eight units, each of which was visited at dawn and dusk to ensure diurnal differences bet- ween food items did not affect the results. In fact, most of the 26 foxes were killed at night, with few being observed in the morning. Scat and den litter was collected during these visits, and dried and stored in paper bags prior to examination. During the months of August to December few foxes were observed and none collected. The entire alimentary canal was removed from each fox and tied at the base of the oesophagus, below the pyloric sphincter, at the anus and caecum. The stomach and intestines could then be separated and their con- tents weighed and stored in 10% for- malin for later sorting. Analysis of Gut Content The contents of each part of the gut were sorted and identified, visually where possible. Bird remains were iden- tified by examination of feathers. Mam- mal remains were generally identified by their hair colour and structure of bones and claws and, in some cases, by the presence of organs such as feet and ears. Where these methods proved difficult Brunner and Coman’s (1974) technique for identification of mammalian hair was employed. Scats were treated in a similar man- ner, but no attempt was made to estimate percentage volume occurrence. Methods and Treatment of Data Occurrence of each specific food item was listed separately for each technique, and the percentage occurrence was Table 1 Occurrence of food items in 26 fox alimentary tracts from North-East Victoria. FOOD ITEM WEIGHT OCCURRENCE Total No. Mean % 1983 o 1984 % Animal Oryctolagus cuniculus 42.5 13 25 26.9 23.1 Mus musculus d 3 zr 3.8 7.6 Trichosurus vulpecula 8 1 1.9 3.8 — Ovis aries E 1 1,9 — 3.8 Gallus gallus 0.2 1 1.9 3.8 — Unidentified bird 0.4 2 3.8 3.8 3.8 Annelid 0.01 1 1.9 — 3.8 Gryllidae sp. 0.4 2 3.8 7.6 — Magicicada sp. 3.9 6 11.8 3.8 19.8 Coleoptera sp. 0.4 4 7.75 — 15.4 Odonata sp. 0.4 2 3,8 — 7.6 Гагуае 0.1 1 19 — 3.8 Eggs 0.5 1 1.9 — 3.8 Other insects 0.5 7 13.45 7.6 19.2 Arachnid 1 Es] 3.8 — Unidentifiable 28.0 Plant Grass 3.0 13 25 38.5 11.5 Berries 0 2 3.8 — кт. Eucalyptus leaves 0.25 3 5.75 — 11.5 Seeds 0.9 i 1.9 3.8 Seed pods 0.3 1 1.9 3.8 — Unidentifiable 12.34 40 Victorian Nat. calculated from the ratio of the number of times a specific food item was found to the total number of separate occur- rences for all food items, or stomachs. Clearly the number of occurrences is in- sufficient information in itself, as it gives no indication of how great a pro- portion of the entire gut contents each item takes up, therefore, some method of estimating the amount of each food item present is required. Two other methods, both of which have limitations, have been used by various workers to assess importance of prey species in a predator’s diet, percen- tage volume (Coman, 1973; Croft and Hone, 1978), and percentage weight (Ryan and Croft, 1974), In each case the specific food item is expressed as a percentage of the total volume of weight of food present. With the food in various stages of digestion it is often dif- ficult to accurately separate food items from one another, and from digestive juices. Any method, therefore requires fairly gross estimation, but is never- theless essential if a true representation of the fox’s total diet is to be given. Results and Discussion The sample of 26 foxes and 14 collec- tions of scat and den litter (Tables 1 and 2) was considered too small for statistical purposes, but these results Table 2 show that the fox’s diet is omnivorous and covers a wide variety of food types, which are eaten when available. By weight, mammals made up the greatest proportion in the diet in both years. Insects figured more prominently in the wetter year (1984), but the percen- tage occurrence of these indicated a greater importance in the diet than did the percentage volume. Of the vegeta- tion ingested, some was presumably taken in incidentally with other food items, but it is apparent that berries, for example, are deliberately eaten when available. Reptiles, birds and fish ap- pear to play little part in the diet of foxes in this area. Of the vertebrates, the rabbit predominates, both by percentage weight and percentage occurrence. The presence of some native mammals sug- gests that these will be taken when available, their comparative rareness and elusiveness making them less likely to be caught than more easily obtainable prey. The sheep sample contained an amount of wool, and was probably taken in as carrion, Large numbers of cicadas in the stomachs reflect the annual fluctuations in the populations of these insects, which again supports the view of the fox as an opportunistic feeder. A variety of other insects was found in the food Occurrence of food items in 14 samples of fox scat and den litter from North-East Victoria. FOOD ITEM Oryctolagus cuniculus Trichosurus vulpecula Sminthopsis murina Vulpes vulpes Pseudocheirus peregrinus Scincidae sp. Magicicada sp. Coleoptera sp. Orthoptera sp. Other insects Seeds Other vegetation Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) OCCURRENCE Total No. Mean % 1983 "o 1984 o 10 BANT 35.7 35.7 3 10.7 14,3 7.1 3 10,7 14,3 7.1 3 10.7 21.4 — 1 3.55 7.1 — 1 3.55 7.1 — 1 3.55 7.1 — 2 v 7.4 7.1 1 3.55 7.1 — 3 10.7 ESI 14.3 3 10.7 14.3 7.1 6 21.45 18.6 14.3 41 samples, but they were mainly from the orders Coleoptera and Orthoptera. The ability of the fox to utilise such a wide variety of food types must be the basic factor in the establishment of sizeable fox populations in the different environments Australia offers. The results of this survey tend to be very much in line with similar studies carried out in other parts of the country, i.e. the fox is an opportunistic predator and scavenger. Acknowledgements Thanks to Rob Johnson and Chris Baker for their help in collection of foxes. REFERENCES Brunner, Н. and Coman, B. J, (1974), The Iden- tification of Mammalian Hair. Inkata Press, Melbourne. Brunner, H., Coman, B. J. and Lloyd, J. W. (1975). Fox scat analysis in a forest park in south eastern Australia. Aust, Wildl, Res. 2: 147-54. Сотап, В. J. (1973). The diet of red foxes, Vulpes vulpes L. in Victoria. Aust. J. Zool, 21; 391-401, Croft, J, D. and Hone, L. J. (1978). The stomach content of foxes, Vulpes vulpes, collected in N.S.W. Aust. Wildl. Res, 5: 85-92. Hockman, J. С. and Chapman, J. А. (1982). Com- parative feeding habits of red and grey foxes in Maryland. Amer, Midi. Natural. 110: 276-85. Martensz, P. М, (1970). Observations on the food of the fox Vulpes vulpes L., in an arid environ- ment. CSIRO Wildl. Res. 16: 73. McIntosh, D. L. (1963). Food of the fox in the Canberra district. CS/RO Wildl. Res. 8: 1-20. Ryan, G. E. and Croft, J. D. (1974). Observations on the food of the fox in Kinchega National Park, Menindee, NSW. Aust, Wildl. Res. 1: 89-94. Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria – 3 A poorly known Melaleuca in Victoria By DAVID ALBRECHT* Willis (1973) was apparently the first author to recognise two distinct forms of Melaleuca ericifolia Smith (Swamp Paper- bark) in Victoria. He noted that a form in East Gippsland differed from the typical widespread form in bark type, leaf arrange- ment and inflorescence characteristics, He suggested that the East Gippsland form was either undescribed or was perhaps referable to M. ternifolia Е. Muell. ex Miq., however the features that characterised that species were uncertain as the original description of M. ternifolia is inadequate and type material had not been examined. Subsequent authors viz. Beauglehole (1980) and Costermans (1981) elected to refer this entity to M.sp. aff. ericifolia, the later author presenting a brief description, distribution map and illustration of a fruiting specimen. * National Herbarium of Victoria, Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. 42 Willis’ suggestion that this entity may be undescribed was vindicated when in 1984 it was formally named M. parvista- minea N.Byrnes in the first of three papers revising Melaleuca in northern and eastern Australia (Byrnes 1984, 1985, 1986). In Byrnes (1986), he clarifies the status of M. ternifolia, considering it to be a narrow- leaved form of M. ericifolia and therefore reducing that name to a synonym of M. ericifolia.. Although the primary aim of this article is to publicise and encourage the use of the name M. parvistaminea, the concluding section also provides tabulated informa- tion on the morphological distinctions be- tween M. parvistaminea and M. ericifolia, extracted largely from Byrnes (1984, 1986) (see Table 1). In addition, the habitat range of M. parvistaminea is briefly mentioned and compared with that of M. ericifolia, and a contemporary map provided of the known distribution of M. parvistaminea Victorian Nat. Fig. 1. Distribution of Melaleuca parvistaminea in Victoria from herbarium specimens at MEL. in Victoria as indicated by herbarium specimens at MEL (see Fig. 1). It is reasonable to expect that additional populations of M. parvistaminea will be located and hence eliminate the evident disjunctions in its distribution as currently understood. Herbarium collections from such localities would be most welcome. M. ericifolia favours river floodplains, lake margins and low-lying near coastal swamps (Bird, 1962). Permanently moist soils are a unifying feature of such sites and prolonged but not permanent flood- ing of fresh or brackish water is also a common site characteristic (Bird 1962, Parsons 1966). M. ericifolia thickets typically develop on relatively fertile heavy soils, however it has been found to grow on a range of soils including sandy clay, clay loam, poorly drained sands, poorly drained coastal mudflats, humic gley, peaty sands and amorphous peats (Par- sons 1966, Gullan 1978, Gullan et al. 1985). Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) Fig. 2, Habit of Melaleuca ericifolia 43 Fig. 3. Habit of Melaleuca parvistaminea A. C. Beauglehole (pers. Comm.) has observed M. parvistaminea growing inter- mingled with M. ericifolia at two localities in the Lake Victoria-Sperm Whale Head area and experienced no difficulty differ- entiating the two species. Both species also grow within close proximity at Healesville where M. parvistaminea is colonising areas disturbed by earthworks. This colonising ability appears to be a characteristic feature of М. parvistaminea. With better recognition of M. parvistaminea the two species may be found to grow sympat- rically in aditional localities. Many of the sites from which М. parvistaminea has been recorded however are quite distinct from typical M. ericifolia habitat. They are relatively infertile , moist sites with skeletal or shallow soils, such as moist rocky slopes or rocky creek beds and banks. The remaining collections have been made from non-rocky sites such as the silty margins of Lake Glenmaggie and poorly drained sandy loams at Providence Ponds. Table 1. Principal characters distinguishing Melaleuca ericifolia and М. parvistaminea Нађи Ватк Leaves Stamens Inflorescence M, ericifolia Shrub or small tree to с. 9 m high, suckering and forming dense thickets under natural conditions with the leaf canopy often continuous. (see Fig. 2) Papery (see Fig. 4) 7-15(-18) mm long. Oil glands obscure. Bundles greater than 5 mm long. Each bundle composed of a claw to 2 mm long with 7-13 filaments attached to its margin, Comparatively short and broad (usually greater than 10 mm wide at anthesis). M. parvistaminea Shrub 2-3 (-4) m high, non-suckering, but often forming thickets, Obconic- shaped with canopy as broad as or broader than high. (see Fig. 3) Rough, non-papery (see Fig. 5) 4-11 mm long. Oil glands visible as tubercles in fresh material or as black dots in dry material. Bundles less than 4 mm long. Each bundle composed of a claw to 0.5 mm long with 3-7 filaments attached to its margin. Comparatively long and narrow (usually less than 10 mm wide at anthesis). 44 Victorian Nat. Fig. 5. Bark of Melaleuca parvistaminea Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) There is obviously still much to be under- stood about the ecology of M. parvista- minea and additional field studies with particular attention to habitat features would be a worthwhile avenue of further research. Acknowledgements The author is grateful to Mr. A. C. Beaugle- hole for his willingness to discuss field observa- tions relating to M. parvistaminea and to Mr. Stephen Forbes (National Herbarium of Vic- toria) for valuable comments on the manuscript. References Beauglehole, A. C. (1980) Victorian Vascular Plant Checklists. Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, Portland. Bird, E. С. F. (1962) The Swamp Paper-bark. Victorian Nat, 79:72-81. Byrnes, М, B. (1984) A Revision of Melaleuca L. (Myrtaceae) in northern and eastern Australia, 1. Austrobaileya 2(1):65-76. Byrnes, М. B. (1985) A Revision of Melaleuca L. (Myrtaceae) in northern and eastern Australia, 2. Austrobaileya 2(2):131-146. Byrnes, М. В. (1986) A Revision of Melaleuca 1... (Myrtaceae) in northern and eastern Australia, 3. Austrobaileya 243):254-273. Costermans, L. F. (1981) Native trees and shrubs of South-Eastern Australia. Rigby, Melbourne. Gullan, Р, К. (1978) Vegetation of the Royal Botanic Gardens Annexe at Cranbourne, Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 90(2):225-240. Gullan, P. K., Forbes, S. J., Earl, G. E., Barley, В. Н, and Walsh, N. G. (1985) Vegetation of South and Central Gippsland. Muellaria 6(2):97-145. Parsons, R. F. (1966) The soils and vegetation at Tidal River, Wilsons Promontory. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 79(2):319-353. Willis, J. Н. (1973) А handbook to the plants in Victoria Vol. 2. Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. 45 Additional Field Notes and Observations of Thesium australe R. Brown (Santalaceae) Ву W. К. ARCHER* Introduction Observations of six colonies of Thesium australe situated between First Emu Plain and Rocky Plain in N.E. Gippsland (Archer 1984), suggested that they were in a state of rapid decline due to grazing pressures and land management practices. As this decline has occurred in other regions resulting in local extinction of the species, concern was held for the con- tinued survival of 7. australe in Australia. In December 1983 only 19 plants had survived from the original 4520 Thesium plants recorded in December 1981 and reduced to 140 plants by March 1983. From this resource fifteen plants widely spaced within the community were select- ed, marked with a stake and numbered to enable individual identification and permit further study of growth and development characteristics, hopefully to reveal management practices which may reverse the downward trend of Thesium australe. Observations Thesium plants tend to be spindly with only a few wiry stems radiating from a central rootstock; these stems seldom develop lateral branches. The length of the dominant stem of each plant was measur- ed on the 21st December 1983 to the closest 5mm. Thirty three days later on the 23rd January 1984 they were re-measured (Table 1). The average growth rate for the period was 45mm or 31%. However, the growth variation was considerably varying from zero to 85mm, possibly reflecting the type, health, and vigour of the host plant to which the parasitic Thesium was attached. Growing conditions had been ideal with * 17 Ashleigh Avenue, Frankston 3199. 46 good rainfall and general weather condi- tions producing optimum results, which may not occur in poorer seasons. Grazing in the area from December 1983 to late January 1984 was unusually light; cattle had not as yet been brought to the area and wild horses were not evident in concentrated numbers. Rabbits were scarce due to a myxomatosis outbreak in February 1982 and of those remaining most were infected, and were soon to disappear. Insect attack was not evident on any plant examined. Table 1. Growth rates of Thesium australe. Length of dominant stem in mm. Plant Size Size Growth 070 21/12/83 23/1/84 (mm) Growth 1 150 215 65 43 2 150 220 70 47 3 120 140 20 17 4 210 295 85 40 5 220 265 45 20 б 170 240 70 41 7 100 120 20 20 8 110 160 50 45 9 130 160 30 23 10 90 90 0 0 11 190 250 60 32 12 110 130 20 18 13 160 230 70 44 14 150 210 60 40 15 130 140 10 8 The unexpectedly high growth rate of the Thesium by January 1984 was impressive, but more surprising was the large numbers of seedlings to 20mm in height that had appeared at all colony sites but had not been evident a month previously. This sudden appearance in January, and the known site history (Archer 1984) supports previous observa- tions on the general timing of the germina- tion of Thesium seeds, for the area was burnt in the Autumn/Winter period of 1980 but seedlings were not evident that Victorian Nat. December. However, new Thesium plants were mature when next visited in Decem- ber 1981, indicating that germination followed by considerable development had occurred during this period. The appearance of large seedling num- bers following the fire of 1980, and the drought of 1983, may also indicate that exposure to heat can be a stimulus to Thesium germination, and that land use and weather conditions in the following summer may be critical to their survival. A seedling count was made of each colony in January 1984, (Table 2.) but it was very approximate as the Thesium plants were very small and many were still developing, making them difficult to sight, particularly amongst taller vegetation. Comparison with mature Thesium plants in May 1985, sixteen months later, indi- cates the initial seedling counts were underestimated or further germination had taken place. In the latter case, the germination would have occurred before the end of January, as warmer summer weather and drying conditions make germ- ination in the Thesium habitat improbable after this period. Table 2. Thesium australe seedling count January 1984. Colony A 1000 plants Colony Al 3 plants Colony B 100 plants Colony C 200 plants Colony D 300 plants Colony Е 300 plants Total 1903 plants What is of note from the seedling count is the very high germination in Colony А. Here the vegetation is more sparse than other colonies, and more exposed to the heat of summer, which may with the effect of lower competition; have stimulated germination, and/or favoured seedling establishment than the other colonies. Also seed from the 1981/82 colony must have lain dormant during the drought year of 1982/83, for no plants were recorded from the colony that year. Many visits have been made to the Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) Thesium sites since the first in the summer of 1979/80 but none in winter, this deficiency was remedied on the 23rd August 1984, when snow and ice was still patchy on the road and herbfields. The fifteen marked Thesium plants initially used to establish growth rates were located; in each case the stems and foliage had died back to the rootstock at ground level but no plant had actually died, and all, even at this time were beginning to reshoot from the base, A specimen collected has been lodged with the Botany Department, La Trobe University, Bundoora, Victoria. The colonies were again visited in late December 1984, although no statistics were taken Thesium australe was well represented in all colonies, indicating many seedlings from January 1984 had since matured and survived the winter. However by the following May all Thesium plants had disappeared from Colonies A and Al. Colonies A and Al occupy an open position exposed to hot northerly winds and grow in shallow soils over granite, as compared with Colonies B to E which grow in deeper soils and more sheltered situations, Due to an abnormally hot, dry summer after January 1985 and the con- ditions prevailing in Colonies A and Al, the normally moist habitat would have dried rapidly and is thought to be the main factor contributing to plant loss. Grazing from cattle would have also reduced Thesium plant numbers, but probably no more than the previous year from which reasonable numbers had survived. It would therefore imply that adequate moisture levels in Thesium habitats play a critical part in their survival. Table 3. Thesium australe count May 1985, Colony А Nil Colony Al Nil Colony B 140 Colony С 320 Colony D 248 Colony E 566 Total 1274 47 Odd plants and small Thesium groups have been sighted outside the original colony boudaries, which may have initially been overlooked, but more likely spread by the movement of animals. The largest group is 30 plants 9 metres to the north east of Colony Е. The situation regarding other known colonies of Thesium australe in N.E. Gippsland to May 1985 is as follows. 1. Gillingal Station, private property west of Butchers Ridge: §00 to 1000 plants March 1980. Current status unknown, 2. First Emu Plain, west of Wulgul- merang: 100 to 500 plants in February 1980. May below 100 plants. 3. Six colonies subject of this paper: 4520 plants December 1981. May 1985, 1274 plants. 4, Rocky Plain, west of Wulgulmerang: Colony 1. 100 plants February 1980. May 1985, 10 plants. Colony 2. 12 plants February 1982. May 1985, nil. Colony 3. 100 plants May 1985. Newly discovered colony. All other Thesium australe colonies predate 1971, and have not been recorded since. Discussion It should be emphasised that rabbits have played little part in the recent demise of Thesium australe, due to the myxo- matosis outbreak in the area which has been most effective. Had they been present in their normal numbers I have no doubt the May 1985 survival rate of the Thesium would have been much lower. Grasshoppers and other insects which were so destructive to the remnant Thesium population in 1983 (Archer 1984), have, like the rabbits, played little or no part since. Specimens of plants collected from Colonies B, C, D and E, have been examined under a microscope for insect attack. Most plants showed no sign of insect damage and only a few suffered minor effects. This result supports 48 the hypothesis that Thesium australe is not at risk from this source unless other herbaceous vegetation is severely depleted through heavy grazing, and/or drought conditions. Cattle numbers in the area have been reasonably consistent with the exception of the 1983 drought period, when stock numbers were increased considerably and were brought to the area four to eight weeks earlier than usual. И was this pressure that instigated the sharp decline of Thesium in all recorded colonies, and from which they have yet to recover, Even with lower stock numbers, Thesium grow- ing in areas which are favoured by cattle are unable to cope, as is evidenced by the fate of the two Thesium colonies which have failed to recover on Rocky Plains. This is despite seedling germination which assisted them as it had the other colonies. Colonies A to E however, are situated in an area that is commonly by-passed by cattle and consequently grazing is reduced. Conclusions Thesium australe being a perennial herb, has adapted to the freezing temperatures of the Wulgulmerang area of N.E. Gipps- land by dying back to its rootstock dur- ing winter, and in the warmer weather growing rapidly to overtake the growth of most surrounding vegetation, enabling it rest against or on top of them. With present day land use, this adaption has placed Thesium australe at great risk from grazing animals, and would be a signifi- cant factor to its demise, The seed of Thesium australe can remain dormant for at least twelve months, and may be stimulated to mass germination when subjected to heat in the form of fires or hot summers. Germina- tion appears to take place in the Decem- ber/January period when the days are mild and generally interspersed with light rain or drizzle. The effects of sub-zero tempera- tures on the seed is not known, other than, it does not stimulate germination of its own accord. Victorian Nat. Recommondations Acknowledgements Due to the rarity and limited distribu- My thanks to Dr. В.Е. Parsons and М.Н. tion of Thesium australe, combined with Scarlett of La Trobe University, for checking the its tenuous existence under current condi- 981 of this paper and for their helpful tions, seed should be collected from known ga a colonies to act as a survival safe-guard, and for propagation study under controll- ed conditions where the effects of heat can REFERENCES clearly be ascertained in relation to germ- Archer W.R. (1984) Thesium australe В. Brown ination, to then enable field trials in other ede grs d Е А А ДА ЫА, areas where longer term management willis LR. (1972) А Handbook to Plants in Victoria. programmes are possible. Vol. 2. Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. Naturalists Review ‘Flora of Australia’ By Stephen Forbes* Volume 46 (Iridaceae to Dioscoreaceae) Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra (1986) Bureau of Flora and Fauna, Canberra (Griffin Press, Netley, S. Aust.) 25,5 x 18 ст, 247 pp., 5 col. plates, 51 fig., 248 distribution maps Price $30.00 (Case bound) $26.00 (Paper) The only previous review of the "Нога of Australia’ in the Victorian Naturalist was Dr Jim Willis’ review of Volume 1 (Introduction). The reader 15 referred to Dr Willis’ review for a synopsis of the history, scope and format of the ‘Flora of Australia’ project. As Dr Willis notes, the last, complete guide to the Australian flora, Bentham’s Flora Australiensis, published between 1863 and 1878, includes only about half of the presently known vascular flora, Nevertheless Bentham's Flora is still the most useful single guide to many parts of Australia. The volume numbers of the ‘Flora of Australia’ are arranged according to Cronquist's arrangement of flowering plant families in the 1981 edition of “Ап Integrated System of Classification of Flowering Plants’. Volume numbers therefore represent the volume's position in this arrangement rather than the order of issue. Volume 46 (Iridaceae to Dioscoreaceae) is the seventh volume of the ‘Flora of Australia’ to be published. Previously published volumes are numbers 1, 4, 8, 22, 25 and 29. Victorian botanists will find the treatments of Iridaceae (Iris family) Agavaceae (Agave family), Xamthorrhoeaceae (Grass-tree familv) and Smilacaceae (Smilax family) in volume 46 especially relevant. David Cooke's account of the Iridaceae, prepared at the National Herbarium of Victoria, has been used in manuscript form here for some years. The account is an impressive achievement in treating a family composed largely of naturalised taxa (26 native, 53 naturalised species), often of obscure origin and poorly represented in herbaria, Agavaceae is only represented in Victoria by Agave americana L., a widespread garden escape —although the ‘Flora’ overlooks Victorian occurrences. Other Agavaceae may also be considered naturalised (Geoff Carr, pers. comm.). The adoption of A/oe vera (L.) Burman.f., in preference to A. barbadensis Miller is of interest, however the reference quoted to justify А. vera is rather unclear, The segregation of Smilacaceae and Xanthorrhoeaceae from Liliaceae sensu lato (in the broad *National Herbarium of Victoria, Department of Conservation, Forests & Lands, Birdwood, Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) 49 sense as т Dr Willis’ ‘Handbook’) may be unfamiliar. Victorian representatives of Smilacaceae are Smilax, Eustrephus, Ripogonum (for which no Victorian specimen is cited) and Geitonoplesium and are readily distinguished from the Liliaceae by their climbing habit. Victorian representatives of Xanthorrhoeaceae are Lomandra, Calectasia, and Xanthorrhoea, Unfortunately the key to families of Australian plants in volume 1 of the ‘Flora’ relies on a tall woody spike in the only lead to Xanthorrhoeaceae which prevents Calectasia and Lomandra, from being keyed out. The family is distinguished from the Liliaceae by a short, thick, hard or elongated woody stem and perianth segments which are scarious or calyx-like. Xanthorrhoeaceae appears less distinct than segregate families of Liliaceae such as Dasypogonaceae (including Lomandra), Calectasiaceae, Xanthorrhoeaceae (sensu stricto) and Phormiaceae (including Dianella and Stypandra) as defined by Dahlgren, Clifford and Yeo (1985). However, a system had to be chosen for the ‘Flora’ and Cronquist’s is quite suitable, if sometimes rather cryptic David Bedford's treatment of Xanthorrhoea illustrates the importance of adequate herbarium specimens and detailed accompanying field notes. Significant characters include scape, spike and trunk length and leaf shape, which are rarely apparent from a herbarium specimen! The addition of X. semiplana F. Muell. to the Victorian flora is anticipated, however probable collections of this species (Short 1221, Beauglehole 38320) are inadequate for positive identification. Parkes and Menkhorst for Walsh 1490, collected since publication is the first adequate herbarium specimen vouchering the occurrence of X. semiplana in Victoria. The introductory notes and illustrations which accompany the key are invaluable. The treatment of Lomandra by Dr Alma Lee, Dr Terry Macfarlane and Joy Everett also illustrates the necessity for adequate herbarium specimens. The key to Lomandra is largely dependant on examination of male and female inflorescences which necessitates thorough examination of populations in the field. Identification is made more difficult by the occurrence of intermediate forms of some Victorian Lomandra species. For example L. collina and L. nana have intermediate forms which are not considered in the text although such specimens have been annotated by Dr Lee in the National Herbarium of Victoria. Dr Lee observes that ‘The group . . . continues to pose problems of classification. Observation of herbarium specimens suggest that the characters separating the sub-species of L. micrantha (Endl.) Ewart are not satisfactory. For example L. micrantha ssp. teretifolia Everett is distinguished in the key by terete leaves. Although this distinction is adequate Гог Western Australian specimens, Victorian specimens, including that of Willis cited by Everett in the Flora may also have flat leaves. In such circumstances it seems strange that L. micrantha var. sororia (F.Muell, ex Benth.) H. Williamson is relegated to synonymy under L. micrantha ssp. tuberculata Everett. Unfortunately the one line Latin type descriptions provided by Ms Everett are completelv inadequate to define the new sub-species. It is a pity that the *Flora of Australia' allows such inadequate descriptions for new taxa. By contrast, Dr Lee's, Dr Macfarlane's and Mr Bedford's new taxa and combinations are provided with a useful, albeit short, description or justification. Despite these problems the ‘Flora of Australia’ remains an essential reference to amateur and professional botanists and each volume represents an impressive achievement. Purchase of volumes at publication is strongly recommended - the cost of purchasing more than one volume at a time is rather less attractive. *The ‘Рога’ is available through the Club's Book Sales Officer. References Bentham, G. (1863-1878) Flora Australiensis Reeve, London. Cronquist, A. (1981) Ая integrated system of classification of flowering planis Columbia Univ. Press New York. Dahlgren, К. М. T, Clifford, Н, T. and Yeo Р. F. (1985) The families of the monocotyledons Springer-Verlag, Berlin. Willis, J. Н. (1970) A handbook to plants in Victoria Vol. 1 2nd ed, Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. Willis, J, Н. (1982) Flora of Australia, Vol. 1 (Introduction) = review Victorian Nat, 99: 125-126, 50 Victorian Nat. OBITUARY Cecily Margaret Eyres Allen Cecily Allen died in the first week of November 1986. The following extracts are taken from the Oration by Rev. Andrew St. John at Holy Trinity Church, Kew, on November 5. “Cecily Allen was born in Melbourne, the youngest of the five children of Thomas and Alice Allen, of whom Roger and Dorothea survive her. Cecily grew up in Hawthorn, was schooled at Tintern then in Glenferrie Road. After 1960 Cecily took up secretarial work first at the old Bank of Victoria but then at Melbourne University with which great institution she had a long and happy association. She will be especially remembered as secretary to Wilfred Frederick, Professor of Education. As her commitments to home and work became less so she was able to pursue more fully her extraordinarily broad range of interests. She was a naturalist and а bird-watcher and bush walker — she loved the world around her; she loved Australia. Cecily was no ‘dabbler’ in these interests — rather she was whole hearted in all that she did. This is reflected for instance in her close involvement with various organizations including the Bird Observer’s Club, The Field Naturalist’s Club of Victoria, the Melbourne Women’s Walking Club (the latter of which she was nominee on the Conservation Council of Victoria.) She served as secretary of several of those organizations. She was secretary of the Natural History Medallion Committee of the ЕМ.СУ.. Cecily took to her retirement with admirable relish – no sitting back in the presentation arm chair for her - rather she was up and off in the pursuit of that which she enjoyed most – the great outdoors – so much so that she was out of Melbourne for long periods of time – some of the family and her friends perhaps wondered why she kept up her flat in Pakington Street, Kew. It was not unfitting that she died returning from an overland trip to Western Australia? Cecily Allen was elected a member of the E.N.CV. in 1975, and quickly became involved in the Club's affairs, She was an active member of the Botany Group, and a keen excursionist. Her major contribution to the Club was as Secretary to the General Committee of the Australian Natural History Medallion, a task which she carried out with great efficiency during the last seven years. The Club has now received the very generous bequest of part of Cecily's personal library, seventy seven books in all, which will make a very valuable addition to our library. Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) 51 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Report by Council The members of the Council submit herewith balance sheet as at 31 December 1986, and statement of income and expenditure for the year ended on that date, and report as follows:- 1, t2 52 The names of the members of the Executive Council in office at the date of this report are as follows:- Dr. J. Douglas Mr. G. Love Mr. M. Howes Miss Y. Gray Mrs. S. Houghton Miss М, Allender Mrs. H. Stanford Miss Н. Bartoszewicz Mrs. C. Ashburner Mr. S. Forbes Mr R. Faragher The principal activities and objects of the Club are to stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian Fauna and Flora. No significant change in the nature of those activities occurred during that period. The net Surplus of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1986 was $2403 in the General Account. In addition surpluses were earned in the following Funds — Building Fund $1,301, Publications Fund $7,665 Excursion Fund $4,292, Special Funds $609 The following transters to and from Funds have been made during the year ended 31 December 1986 = From Income & Expenditure Account to Club Improvement Account $1,655 The Club has issued no shares or debentures during the year. The review of operations for the уеаг:- The Club’s groups met regularly throughout the year. The Botany, Day, Geology and Mammal Survey Groups arranged day trips and extended excursions, The Australian Natural History Medallion waas administered and awarded to Mr. Graham Pizzey. No significant changes in the state of affairs of the Club occurred during the financial year ended 31 December 1986. No matters or circumstances have arisen since the end of the financial year which significantly affected or may significantly affect the operations of the Club, the results of those operations, or the state of affairs of the Club in financial years subsequent to the financial year ended 31 December 1986. The likely developments in the operations of the Club and the expected results of those operations in financial years subsequent to the financial year ended 31 December 1986 are unlikely to have any 10, 11, 13, significant effect on the financial results in future years. At the date of this report there exists no charge on the assets of the Club which has arisen since the end of the financial year and secures the liabilities of any other person and no contingent liability has arisen since the end of the financial year. No member of the Council has an interest in a contract or proposed contract with the Club, being an interest the nature of which would have been declared by the member of the Council in accordance with Section 228(1) of the Code, Information on Members of the Council: Jack Douglas — President Occupation - Geologist Council Member since — 1986 Graeme Love - Vice President Occupation - Public Servant Council Member since — 1985 Michael Howes — Secretary Occupation - Laboratory Technician Council Member since — 1986 Yvonne Gray - Treasurer Occupation - Accountant Council Member since — 1986 Sheila Houghton - Member of Council Occupation – Librarian Council Member since - 1981 Marie Allender - Member of Council Occupation - Retired Council Member since – 1956 Helen Stanford - Member of Council Occupation - Homemaker Council Member since — 1983 Helen Bartoszewicz – Member of Council Occupation – Technical Assistant Council Member since – 1986 Christine Ashburner – Member of Council Occupation - Technician Council Member since — 1983 Stephen Forbes - Member of Council Occupation - Botanist Council Member since - 1986 Richard Faragher - Member of Council Occupation - Teacher Council Member since – 1987 Since the end of the previous financial year no member of the Council has received or become entitled to receive any benefit by reason of a contract made by the Club with him or with a firm of which he is a member or with a company in which he has substantial financial interest. SIGNED at MELBOURNE this 23rd day of February 1987 in accordance with a resolution of the Council, 1. Douglas President Y. Gray Treasurer Victorian Nat. “Slasse 2102$ Jo 1802 jua11no JY} зипозов отш әуе) О] ројепгре uaaq 10и элец pu 609'61_ 7661 2181 851 (81) ове" 19Е СРС LOT SET 00 SLZ 118 Er 669 185 ШОТ (0001) шоњ $ 5861 "ТО əy} 01 $251А125 1y} JO 1224521 ш 1оириу eui ха рэ 8580 ОРГ ЕОР" 6591 (92) (0€) FSI TLS? Ocr 8t LEL LOE Occ c6c $58 00071 175 98? OPSTE (E10°€) £S8'rT $ 9861 ЩИ. e AES $52 e трәА лоу snydung АЕ turistet бәре 4004 uo 1014 Jo IƏJSULIL - junoooy 1иәшәлотйш[ ап ОН (пола) xepuy 1ofqns РЕ ЖИИ А рт 6: -squtadoy злоцту ав +: (прота) «ous нием “+++ војел - sasuodxy омејашм 5777 ggsuadxq чоцүерәуу AroistH [ел1 Е ake ка sosuadxg [e1ouary Е. <+ ++ 3ougInsu] > (| VON) чопелоипшом 5,1031рпұу али suoneuog % suonduosqng ‘s334 uon] te Joc FC REA Р eiit ünüegieg - том UE нр мыш Vc eE “+++ ЗАТ № Surdosxxoog Тесла dic Клопопеје 3 Sunuuq "UE HE а A Auc PTT A, auoudojar » a3e1sog sasuddxy BUDNOM `` AINSvoIL, $]ир1Гу 89] ~ gojedsoq y Zunensnj 'Sugutuq ISHEINJEN UELIOJOTA. ячапиамчахя [uno әці jo 1әдшәш Aue 01 qno au Aq pred әләм sjusum[OUrd ON "C A139291 әләм $3 Ц2И2А 12410 ON "A[UO $921^195 SUNIPNE 0] SIPTA 055$ JO чопелаипшам злоирпу 71 60961 СЕТ 1561 АКИ! Srl 8£0'€ TE L 118 LIS 55980 РСР €6l'€T 8r е попизлио 1502 [221101514 ay) Japun paredojd иээ4 savy $11955 3tu.L "Sununoooy jo siseg ‘Е РОР 9861 - SALON А a лезА 10} поцод Fine жк herr У seret Saeg 4004 UO 14044 ЕУ eee tri *auioou] Aipuns S eiii DUN џоцјерор Алојз [EMEN esso M LET LE NS pung йщвәдшәрү әу не ШРШ Ылас ae usodaq Jenny јепопем а © Kov32] IJEM IN D — spuog &oe3»] увалу JN — Spuog SEE UET а ПАНИКА ли с “+--+ spuog цтегмиошшој Pl acon no E OE e eee +++ qunosoy Xueg "PEL i puny Алелаг] рәлтәәәм 159191и] PUPS AAS PSEA с) зїцәшәвтиәлру nr щш АНА ОГ 15Цеицем U£HIO]OIA,, JO SALS “ + Sunsoddng sees мама НОР EDT Meet ii рәү Paaladoy suondriosqus AWOONI 9861 мачилола т ачамя AVAA — чапиамчахя У HINOONI AO LNAWALVLS VRHIOLOIA AO ATO SLSITVANALIVN QTAIA 53 Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) 805“ ОЕР 867 00Е'8 00Е'8 17001 £17 РЕ86 CtL'6I 58: 90t'l $6 STL 000'0T 1є/'9 $ $861 14615 £09 89c'0I 008'8 00£'8 сРО'01 Ес 6c8'6 v88'9I S84 556 56 777 ysodaq - Anos ашрипа ортмојејб sodaq - xueg збимес ZNV TIE d. Ne a Rd samjuaqa(] pr] ериезя spuog 58шАрс uei[e1jsny 1502 је ѕрип Jo јизшј5олиј охејашм ‘wyery 5 proie – Е usnoioqKie]A ‘2419594 2115500) - pue] te n nnne juauidmbg у општа Areiqry 1809 18 S}aSSW paxi4 ƏS 10] syoog Е ан ис SR ЕЁ salipuns 2» зовред = 1502 је ривн чо 542015 d e d. rU ULT кек к. жез: 5101дә(] Aipung : ups fer 1502 је spuog 58 шле$ иецелѕпу себе БМВ Ске eta M E yueg је use? 51955 y злато) SLASSV 06 от #001 $56 РОС 005 007 991 LIZ'S 80r TI 001 000'9 98081 L09'£9 80011 99701 6/8 PSI 8L€'€ 6681 $861 TEGIL 60ETI 6119 9161 FSI EIET 9pL'I $ 9861 77 pung јепошој рјоцехем V N Зы puny JN Td H A u.c DP BS њи pung seuu]ojN я а Ме id Me betel н puny рлејроом Э родила ое фе, S пекао БРАУН А squeH 1 2125 at КАК АРКЕТ: А ТУРА пэцизя Я 218189 M gero M M ur ER LS 2292] xouw 4 | 212159 Ена гъа ован Аовдо | IJIEM ИО 219159 ым АА ЕАО Аэе85] WBA И 212153 ' juno2oy зиәшәлогаш] ап) АЕ КЕ puny Areiqry] VIVAS S brie н ЖЕ 3 puny uors1inoxq 1opuo[[v IEN T E ЗОО ERN: pung uois1noxg АНИ pun, чоцеәцапа onu c TTC RU fasc Enn puny Surpprng зипозоу у зрип [er»ods с ор рчен ш SULID Алповолј, EE LL LLLI puep ur juer 191, шелаиј У И ID TOUT Ii PE ГТ s CP S10]Ip217) Kipung 55 aourape ш pred suonduosqns 590119817 jualin) SALLITIA VIT 9861 "мачилола ТЕ LV SV ТЯЯН$ ЯОМУЛУЯ VRIOLOIA ЯО ПТО SLSIIVAALVN Q(GTALT Victorian Nat. 54 8101 980'81 968'091 BLETT (0109) L90'8I Ict'6 00071 ИС. 1109 5499 005" 005'6 ове СР 60621 OR OTD аа вала S злопрало Алрипб SSII Pe 0 УН a m LUE ЧЕЛ е ШЕ s10}qoq Алрипб be ЭШЕ жЕ ек ШЕШ ПЕЧЕ ++ gsodaq - А191205 дрја Wd JENIN тем Ча Ель ЗС Зы spuog SSUIARS ие. ту puny uoIsInoxy ОА 464585 А: 51092 Алрипб 1502 1? 542016 7008 cm LRL са си 1502 је spuog - шозајај, fiae c I 1777 1809 18 soinjuoaqaqq - р epuessq mL TER т 3809 18 spuog SSULARS uei[ersny puny suongonqng yueg зе use» ERIS ое 1500 1? залпјподоа РУТ epuesq Ape a RE а 1500 1? spuog з8ашлеб uenensny pung Surppmg 30471 (24! ED 18521 СОЕ Д4! 065 85972 УЗ? 005 051 958'091 TSS PI орт oee IP дА. Пола 1024. 10] (попео) /snidung бр o e e S861/1/1 3e uereg }ипоээу $пүйлп Sc8'6£l 055 pun, diysisquiayy әу COCs uh prog Sir p pun, поцерәру Алојз телем КИЕН pun ззогола әңе]3игу 005 РМ И А ке puny eow зоцоеу а OS oot > junoooy YIO чаем oupa» 55 Vol. 104 Мо. 2 (1987) FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BUILDING FUND 1986 1985 $ $ ОР ИО РЕЯ АЕ о таин 11,008 9,668 Interest on Investtients and Bank Account а. 1,301 1,340 Baianceror Ерика December ор о И nn ET ee 12,309 11,008 Balance: отпа 63,607 56,141 orere Whivestmenis and ВАСА. 7,549 7,211 SUT ae: AEP a? сь тое eis en Фф а р а 43 — Surplus for the year from - BOSSIIBBOk, оне fendi ot om oo Е TUM LU LLL 73 220 Белово Даап. Н ЕЕ — 35 Вајапсв ој Кила и есеб 71,272 63,607 Balange of Account at si) December 19852) 9 509900. о ан 11,108 9,296 Ор ВА НУЛА НОСНА PENA. ТЕЛЕ ТА, by Л ЛК КАКЫ. ЫЕ Ра 1,655 1,812 Halangerors&ecomt dues December ПРВО Ина а ее ль 12,763 11,108 Вајававно БИН а ЗӨ еер ПО Кү, fe, usm ен 18,086 13,590 Interest on Investments and Bank Account .......... вала кел Ио. 2,234 1,911 ОО ee ee ee н АЛУЫН Г ей 60 = Siro THRONE so erus eec TEE LER aie e MENU 1,998 2,585 Parango rund а December 1886 а сена а он 22,378 18,086 AUDITOR'S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA We report that we have audited the accounts of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. In our оршюп:- (a) The accompanying accounts, being the Balance Sheet, Statement of Income and Expenditure and Notes to Accounts, together with the Statement by Members of the Council, are properly drawn up in accordance with the provisions of the Companies (Victoria) Code 1981 and so as to give a true and fair view of:- (i) the state of affairs of the company at 31 December 1986 and of the results of the company for the year ended on that date; and (ii) the other matters required by Section 269 of that Code to be dealt with in the accounts; and are in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and applicable approved accounting standards. The accounting records and other records, and the registers required by that Code to be kept by the company have been properly kept in accordance with the provisions of that Code. (b DANBY BLAND PROVAN & CO. Chartered Accountants R. M. BLAND MELBOURNE Partner February 1987 56 Victorian Nat. FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA STATEMENT ВУ MEMBERS OF COUNCIL In the opinion of the members of the Council:- 1. (a) The accompanying Income & Expenditure Account is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the results of the company for the financial year ended 31 December 1986. (b) The accompanying Balance Sheet is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company as at the end of that financial year. (c) At the date of this statement, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company will be able to pay its debts as and when they fall due. 2. The accompanying Accounts have been made out in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and applicable approved accounting standards. This statement is made in accordance with a resolution of the Members of Council. SIGNED at MELBOURNE this 23rd day of FEBRUARY 1987. J. Douglas, President Y. Gray, Treasurer NOMINATIONS OF FNCV COUNCIL MEMBERS AND OFFICE BEARERS FNCV Annual General Meeting will be held on Monday May 11th, 1987 and nominations are required for Council Members and other office bearers. Council consists of the President, Vice President, Immediate Past President and ten other members. The following offices are open for nomination: President, Vice President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, Assistant Treasurer, Editor, Assistant Editor, Librarian, Assistant Librarian, Excursion Secretary, Programme Secretary, Conservation Co-ordinator, Club Reporter. With the exception of the President, Vice President and Immediate Past President, office bearers are not automatically members of Council, though the Secretary and Treasurer are required to attend Council meetings, which are held on the last Monday of the month at the Herbarium. If you nominate a person for a particular office, and that person is willing to be a member of Council, an additional nomination to this effect is required. Council is the governing body of your Club, Think now of the people you would like to form this body, and ask them if they will accept nomination. Nominations, endorsed by two members of the Club should be received by the Hon. Secretary by May 8th, 1987. The Club is entitled to two representatives on the Conservation Council of Victoria. We also require an Information Officer (at General Meetings) and a Display Co-ordinator. If you would like to undertake these jobs, or know of members who would, please let the Secretary know. Michael D. Howes, Hon. Secretary, February 2nd, 1987. Vol. 104 No. 2 (1987) 57 Bequests to the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria The Club is conscious of the extent to which its development and influence depend upon the assistance of benefactors. Donors may prefer to make their gifts during their lifetime or by their Wills. In either case the President and other officers will always be happy to discuss the nature and conditions of benefactions to ensure that they will be made in accordance with the overall needs of the Club. Very often a gift expressed in general terms is more advantageous than one restricted to certain purposes. At the same time the Club will always try to ensure that any special intention of a benefactor in relation to a gift is fully observed and carried into effect. Should donors prefer to make their gifts by Will, the following form of bequest may prove of assistance: "| give and bequeath to the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria the sum Of .......................... dollars to be paid free from all duties and to be applied for the purposes of the Club in such manner as the Council of the Club may determine and I direct that the receipt of the President or Treasurer shall be sufficient discharge for my Trustee(s)”. THE VICTORIAN NATURALIST - BACK ISSUES Complete volumes are available form Volume 63 up to the present. Back numbers start from volume 11 but some issues are missing. Prices are those given below plus postage. Vols. up to 75 — 40 cents minimum per part 76 to 91 - 50 cents minimum per part 92 – 75 cents per part 93 to 95 — $1.20 per part 96 to 99 — $1.75 per part 100 — $2.20 per part 101 to 102 - $2.50 per part 103 - $3.00 per part Volumes up to Vol. 91 contain 12 parts per volume, Vol. 92 has 11 parts and volumes onwards from 93 have 6 parts. АП enquiries to О, E. McInnes, Victorian Naturalist Sales Officer, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra. Australian Natural History Medallion Council appointed Mrs. Tess Kloot to fill the vacancy left by Cecily Allen's death, as Secretary to the General Committee of the Australian Natural History Medallion. Unfortunately, ill-health has forced Tess regretfully to resign from the position. Mrs. Shiela Houghton has now been appointed, and any correspondence relating to the Medallion should be addressed to her, c/- ЕМСМ. National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. LATE FEE The increasing costs of reminder notices – postage, stationery, and the numbers of late renewers have resulted in the need for a late fee to recoup some of these costs, which are substantial. Therefore, in 1987 a Late Fee of $2.00 shall be imposed on members who do not renew their subscriptions by the end of March, 1987. Council draws members’ attention to the following points: * Subscriptions cover the calendar year from January to December. * Persons joining the Club in the second half of the year may pay a six month or an eighteen month subscription. Anyone paying a full year subscription in the second half of the year will be regarded as having paid for the current year and will receive back issues of that volume of The Victorian Naturalist. * Subscriptions do not run from mid year to mid year. * Members who fail to renew their subscriptions by 15 May will automatically be removed from the mailing list. * Prompt payment greatly facilitates the Club's operations. M. D. HOWES Hon. Secretary 58 Victorian Nat. (Continued from inside front cover) Geology Group - First Wednesday Wednesday, Ist April. “The Geological Time Scale - How did we get it?" Mr, Neil Archibald. Wednesday, 6th May. "Chernobyl" Mr. Graeme Love. Wednesday, 3rd June. Some aspect of Palaeobotany (title to be confirmed) Dr. Jack Douglas. Mammal Survey Group - First Tuesday Tuesday, 7th April. Fauna of the North-west Study Area? Mr. Andrew Bennett. Tuesday, 5th May. To be announced. Tuesday, 2nd June. Members' Night. Microscopical Group - Third Wednesday Wednesday, 15th April. “Parasitic Wasps”. Mr. Urwin Bates. Wednesday, 20th May. Pondlife", Dr. E. Peters. Wednesday, 17th June. *The Diatom Experts". Mr. Bob Graham. "Castlemaine Lake GROUP EXCURSIONS АП FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Excursions. Botany Group Saturday, 25th April. Doongalla Forest Reserve. Leader: C. Falkingham. Saturday, 23rd May. Fungi. Saturday, 27th June. Royal Botanic Gardens. Geology Group Sunday, 5th April. (Combined excursion) Yarra Glen. Leader: Mr. Graeme Love. Mammal Survey Group Friday, 17th - Tuesday, 21st April. East Gippsland. Saturday, 6th - Monday, 8th June. Upper Lerderderg Gorge, FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Reports of Recent Activities General Meeting Monday, 9th February The Speaker for the evening was Mr. Max Dean who spoke on the topic of “Aboriginal Rock Paintings? He has for many years been part of a team recording the rock paintings in sandstone caves of the Cape York area. The paintings in this area have been dated from carbon remains at up to 12,000 years old. Some of the images have been formed by chiselling with a stone whilst others are painted using natural pigments such as ochre and charcoal. Some showed only an outline, others had internal details filled т, Mr. Dean showed slides of many of the paintings and explained the significance of various animals to the Aboriginals. Emus, kangaroos, White Ibis and bandi- coots all appeared in the paintings, as did many handprints and spirit figures. The paintings were apparently an activity in which all members of the tribe, not just specialized artists, could partici- pate. In some areas huge murals had been developed over the years, one having up to 11 overlying layers. Exhibits - Under microscopes: Polyzoan skeletons from Bay of Fundy, East Canada collected by Mary Doery; A species of Myriophyllum (Water Milfoil) with clumps of the blue-green alga Rivularia ; Brachionus rotifers from Caulfield Racecourse Lake; À ciliate, Vorticella and a colonial ciliate, Opercularia; an aquatic caterpillar, Мутриша which breathes underwater with the aid of thread-like gills, Mr. Dan McInnes. — Under microscopes: Stained sections of the plants Griselina littoralis and Tilia cordata made by Mr. C. Nance, Mr. Urwin Bates, - The Mountain Devil or Honey Flower found in the Blue Mountains. Alice Walker. Nature Notes - A parade of Fairy Penguins was observed at The Twelve Apostles. Dr, Jack Douglas. C. M. Ashburner Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: РМСУ, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1985-1986 President: Dr JACK DOUGLAS, 42 Sunhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 А.Н.) Vice President; Mr С. LOVE, РО. Box 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary: Mr M. D. HOWES, c/o R.M.LT. Dept. of Applied Biology, G.P.O. Box 2476V, Melbourne, 3001. (386 2980). Hon. Treasurer: Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Сгез., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 А.Н.) Subscription-Secretary: Mt М. STANFORD, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Editorial Material: The Editorial Committee, Victorian Naturalist, FNCV, cA National Herbarium, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra, 3141. Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, ВМСУ, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 A.H.) Excursion Secretary: Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter: Miss CHRISTINE SHANKLY, 50 Glyndon Road, Camberwell, 3124 (836 7187 A.H.) Conservation Co-ordinator; Mr BOB GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073. Sales Officer (Books): Mrs H. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. MeINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Мг D. Е. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology; Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 А.Н.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148, (211 4997) Microscopical: Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.CV. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1987 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) ............. .......... "T. Ме a $25.00 Joint Metropolitan Members. $ i па пао tw ar PP er ТО Country/Interstate/Retired Members were rei Rise ТЫ ‚. -$23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members. .........-..-...,. А ета ееп A $25.00 Student (full-time) ite a eee АН ГУС 581809 Junior (under 18; no Victorian Naturalist) . " Lii ed TIT E ВОО Subscription to Victorian Naturalist . ыы pmo T a T 9рау Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ме њи а, 3830.00 Affiliated Clubs 3 : SE EHE КЕ а а ауы $25.00 Subscriber Clubs Баа РЕ њи з: Еи гроза $23.00 Individual Journals 2m A ee sec RIAL dna о ББЦ $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after end of March sleet „КЕРА ESRB AY, _...$2.00 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY, LTD. 1-13 ABBOTSFORD St WEST MELBOURNE. 328-4774. Kol. 104, No. 3 Мау/Јипе 1987 Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Registered by Australia Post. Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Monday, 15th June, 8.00 p.m. Dr. Bill Birch. “Crystals?” Monday, 13th July, 8.00 p.m. Mr. John Coventry. *Prohibited Imports and Exports — Reptiles? Monday, 10th August, 8.00 p.m. Dr. Robin Hirst. “Where on Earth are We?” (Astronomy) New Members Metropolitan: Mrs. Shirley O'Neill, 77 Orrong Road, Elsternwick, 3185. Ms. Ruth Dann, 6/3 Burwood Avenue, East Hawthorn, 3123, Mrs. Joan Marks, 3 Warida Avenue, East Malvern, 3145. Ann McGregor, 103 Mitchell Street, Brunswick, 3056. Dr. Helen Steward, 106 Gatehouse Street, Parkville, 3052. Gillian Earl, 12 Anderson Street, South Melbourne, 3205. Katrina Geering, c/o Botany Department, Monash University, Clayton, 3168. Miss Beverley McBean, P.O. Box 172, Malvern, 3144. Mr. Jolyon C. Scott, 78 Nepean Highway, Mentone, 3194. Miss Beryl Vera Fookes, 28 Pine Street, East Brighton, 3187. Miss Beverley L. Vonarx, 1/1 Lithgow Street, Burwood, 3125. Country: Ms. Jenny Bolwell, c/o Post Office, Falls Creek, 3699, Mr. Colin В. Тапп, c/o Mallee Research Station, Walpeup, 3507. Mrs. Valda Dedman, 69 North Valley Road, Highton, 3216. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, Sth July, Black Rock House, Ebden Ave., Black Rock. Take the 2.15 p.m. bus from Sandringham to Black Rock House or meet there at 2.30 p.m, Entrance fec $1.00. Should the weather be fine members could go earlier and spend the extra time on the beach behind the house. There is a foot-track a short way past the house on Second St. behind it. The bus runs every 40 minutes from Sandringham. Black Rock House is open from 2 to 5 p.m. Sunday, 2nd August, Emerald Lake, Meet at Lakeside Station at 11.23 a.m. Puffing Billy leaves Belgrave at 10.30 a.m., fare $8.20 return, concession $5.40, The train from Flinders St. leaves at 8.43 a.m. Bring a реше lunch. Sunday, 6th September, Braeside Metropolitan Park. The coach will leave Batman Ave, at 9.30 a.m. Fare $10.00. Bring a реше lunch. Friday, 16th — Sunday, 18th October. Waranga Basin, Rushworth. This will be the venue for the Victorian Field Naturalists Club Association, and accomodation will be in the Holiday Lodge or camping (see last Naturalist). Lodge accomodation and coach will be $90.00, and bookings should be accompanied by $30.00 deposit and iade with Marie Allender. Balance to be paid by Monday, 14th September. Members camping should book direct with Mr. and Mrs. Houghton (058) 56 1243. There is a Kiosk and arrangements can be made for bread and milk etc. There will be an informal meeting at 8.00 p.m. Friday for those who have arrived, a day excursion on Saturday, departing at 10.00 a.m. and and evening meeting. On Sunday there will be a morning excursion, lunch and farewells before departing for home. Anyone wanting accomodation in the lodge but not going in the coach should contact Marie Allender as there may be some surplus bunks, Friday, 8th January — Saturday, l6th January. Tasmania. We fly to Devonport, then proceed to Smithton, visiting Stanley etc. en route. Saturday a cruise on the Arthur River, Sunday overnight in Queenstown, Monday to New Norfolk, Tuesday, Lake Pedder and overnight New Norfolk. Wednesday to Hobart where the tall ships should bein the harbour, overnight Port Arthur. Thursday, we hope to see the start of the tall ships race to Sydney, then go on to Bicheno. Friday, visit Freycinet Peninsula. Saturday back to Devonport for 5.45 p.m. plane. Cost, based on 30 passengers, is $750.00 approximately for plane, accomodation D.B.B and coach. Bookings with Marie Allender should be accompanied by $200.00 for Apex fare and deposit. (Continued inside back cover) The Victorian Naturalist Volume 104, Number 3 May/June, 1987 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: R. Thomson. Assistant Editor: V. Spencer Bush-peas of Victoria - Genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) ПА ОНА ООО ЕВ СУ ETE TTE д мило ВА 64 The Australian Anchor Plant (Discaria pubescens): distribution and status west of Melbourne, Victoria by Ian D. Lunt..................- 68 Observations on a Dasytes Species (Melyridae : Coleoptera), a Pollen- Feeding Beetle on Daisies (Asteraceae) in Northern New South Wales Јат Clo d Та do ora ewe ize ota e n ruga aee dias o Ысты 76 A note on the existence of pre-Pleistocene fossils of parastacid СТАВУ Ae ROSSO ROT ее а. 81 Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria - 4 Richea gunnii J. D. Hook. (Epacridaceae) : A New Heath for Victoria ое uoo ОА UNT 82 Naturalist Note: A magnificent blue toadstool (Entoloma nitidum) T pr Ша ДП КОЕ Ее И EE та ы 85 Description of a New Genus of Carnivorous Snail (Mollusca : КАТААЛ ЗЕ FTT ER ЕТИНИН А ИСЕ 86 ЕМСУ Excursion to the Eastern Highlands: Harrietville, January BEER abo ТАРЗЕ 1 MN TU PEE OUR Mande а ARE С аала py 91 Cover Illustration: Herb fields on Mt. Loch with Mt. Feathertop behind. (see ЕМСУ excursion report p.91). Photo: Elizabeth Turner. Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) — 21 By M. G. CORRICK* Pultenaea williamsoniana J, H. Willis in Muelleria 1:125-126 (1967). В williamsoniana is a slender, erect shrub 1-2 m high. The stems are terete and covered with pale, loosely appressed hairs. The leaves are alternate, linear, 6-12 (-18) mm long and 0.5 mm wide, spreading at right angles to the stem or occasionally slightly reflexed; they are tightly inrolled with a short, rigid, + pungent point and sparsely covered with long, pale hairs or occasionally glabrous. The stipules are lanceolate, dark brown, 1.5-2 mm long and 0.5 mm wide with very slender, recurved, fragile tips. The inflorescence is a condensed raceme of 2-5 pedicellate flowers forming a loose head-like cluster at the end of a short, lateral shoot. Several lateral shoots are clustered towards the tips of the branches. The pedicel is 3-4 mm long and densely covered with loosely appressed, pale hairs. Bracts are absent, but the stipules on the floral leaves are slightly enlarged and form a tight little cluster at the base of the pedicel. The basal parts of these stipules are usually persistent and are retained on old wood after the axis of the shoot grows on. The bracteoles are ovate to orbicular, 2-2.5 mm long and 2-2.5 mm wide, attach- ed at the base of the calyx and very resinous. The flowers are 11-12 mm long. The calyx is 4-5 mm long, resinous and sparsely hairy, The calyx lobes have ciliate margins. The standard is orange with dark red lines surrounding a pale orange blotch at the base of the lamina on the front surface; the back is slightly darker with longer, denser red lines. The wings are orange and the keel dark red. *7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, Victoria 3103. 64 The ovary is covered with pale hairs which extend along about one quarter of the style. The pod is plump, exserted from the calyx and sparsely covered with pale hairs. Flowering time is late September to early October. Р. williamsoniana is restricted to the northern Grampians, from the northern part of the Mt. Difficult Range to Mt. Zero, It is rather similar to some forms of P. mollis but the inflorescence lacks the densely clustered enlarged stipules of that species. The orbicular bracteoles and widely spreading, or sometimes recurved leaves are also distinctive. When Willis described this species he suggested an affinity with P. vrolandii of granite ranges in north eastern Victoria, on the basis of bracteole similarity and pedicellate flowers. However many forms of Р mollis have resinous bracteoles and pedicellate flowers. Leaf shape and stipule size and shape of P. williamsoniana are also close to P. mollis. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Grampians; Mt Zero, H. B. Williamson (MEL 504745 - type), early Oct. 1927; W. of Mt Difficult, 7 8. Muir 2584 (MEL 680504), 29.1х.1962; E. of Mt Zero, А. C. Beauglehole 30078 (MEL 680506), 17.xii.1968; Picnic Falls, T. B. Muir 2217 (MEL 680505), 30.ix.1961. Pultenaea maidenii F. M. Reader in Victorian Nat. 22:158-159 (1906). Pultenaea maidenii is an erect shrub 0.5-1 m high. The stems are terete, slightly ridged and with sparse, pale, spreading hairs on young growth. The leaves are alternate, obovate, 6-8 (-10) mm long and 2-3 mm wide, with an obtuse or slightly cuneate apex terminating in a short point. The leaf margins are flat but the leaf is somewhat conduplicate, Victorian Nat. Fig. 35. Pultenaea williamsoniana. A, habit x 1; В, leaf with stipules, underside x 10; С, 1.5. leaf x 10; D, flower x 5; E, standard x 5; Е, ovary and style x 5; С, bracteole x 10; Н, calyx opened out x 10; 1, calyx with pod x 5; J, seed x 15. A-H from Muir 2584 (MEL); I-J from Beauglehole 30078 (MEL). 65 Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 4h fi у, ү ‘We ds и Fig. 36. Pultenaea maidenii. A, habit x 1; B, leaf, underside x 10; С, t.s. leaf x 10; D, leaf base showing petiole and stipules x 10; E, inflorescence x 3; F, standard x 6; G, ovary and style x 7, H, calyx opened out x 6; I, bract x 10; all from Williamson (MEL 35227), 66 Victorian Nat. with the mid-rib forming а keel on the lower surface. The upper leaf surface is glabrous except for some sparse hairs on young growth, the under surface is slightly hairy. The stipules are dark brown, lanceolate, 1.5 mm long and 1 mm wide and usually united in the lower half. The inflorescence is a very condensed raceme of 4-6 flowers forming a head-like terminal cluster. The pedicel is about 1 mm long. The bracts are imbricate, dark brown and persistent; they are hairy except for the broad, scarious margin, The large inner bracts are often split, making them appear narrower or occasionally lobed. The inner bracts are about 3 mm long and 3 mm wide; outer bracts are smaller, grading down into the enlarged stipules of the floral leaves. The bracteoles are lanceolate and dark brown. On the type collection the bracteoles are attached at the base of the calyx tube and are covered in pale hairs. On other collections they are attached near the centre of the calyx tube and hairs are restricted to a line down the centre. The flowers are 10-12 mm long. The calyx is 5-6 mm long and silky hairy; the calyx lobes are narrowly lanceolate with the two upper lobes joined slightly higher than are the lower lobes. The standard is orange with dark lines surrounding a pale yellow blotch at the base of the lamina. The wings are orange and the keel dark red. The ovary is densely covered with pale hairs which extend about one third of the way along the style. The pod has not been seen. Flowering time is given as November. P. maidenii is known only from three collections of H. B. Williamson and this description is based on that of Reader and on the original collections. Persistent searching in the type area in the Grampians, around the original head works of the Hamilton water supply has failed to rediscover this plant. Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) In recent years P. maidenii has been confused with plants which are evidently hybrids between P scabra and Р benthamii (Corrick 1984), but none of the plants in the mixed populations so far examined resemble P maidenii. | have seen plants grown from seed collected from one of the supposed hybrid populations and in every case the young plants developed the leaves of P. benthamii and were quite unlike the hybrid parent. H. B. Williamson (1920) stated that the nearest affinity of R maidenii was with P. largiflorens var. latifolia from South Aust- ralia. Both have similar shaped leaves with a distinctive granular upper surface. Will- iamson noted a difference in calyx shape, but this seems to be slight. P /argiflorens is more densely hairy, but the hairs are similar. The most significant difference \ ange ^ Ро фа $ Мт Rosea Mt William N | Mt Sturgeon | De - Ток i раа И Fig, 37. The Grampians, Victoria, showing known distribution of: Ш Pultenaea williamsoniana ФР maidenii 67 seems to be the persistent bracts of P. maidenii, whereas those of P largiflorens are deciduous, SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Grampians, Victoria Range, Hamilton waterworks pipehead reservoir, H. B. Williamson: (MEL 627535 - type), Nov. 1904; (MEL 1519199), Nov. 1903; (MEL 35226), Mar. 1906. Acknowledgements ] am most grateful to Richard Barley for preparing the accompanying illustrations. My thanks also to Gordon Paterson of Wartook for showing me plants he had grown from seed taken from the hybrid plants described above. REFERENCES Corrick, M. G. (1984). Bush-peas of Victoria (20), Victorian Nat. 101:200-203. Williamson, H. B. (1920). A revision of the genus Pultenaea Pt. 1. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 32:212. The Australian Anchor Plant (Discaria pubescens): distribution and status west of Melbourne, Victoria Ву IAN D. LUNT* Introduction The Australian Anchor Plant, Discaria pubescens (Brongn.) Druce (Rhamnaceae), is a rigid shrub to 2 m tall, with opposite (decussate) spines to 3 cm long, and smaller, deciduous leaves (Costermans, 1981; Willis, 1955). A detailed description of the fruiting structure is given in Willis (1955) and illustrations of the species are presented in Costermans (1981), Galbraith (1977) and Willis (1955). In form, plants of D. pubescens in central Victoria bear a superficial resemblance to the introduced Gorse (Ulex europaeus). D. pubescens occurs in New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania. It is listed as “vulnerable” in Australia by Leigh et al. (1981), who recognise four categories of rare or threatened Australian plants; pre- sumed extinct, endangered, vulnerable and rare. Vulnerable plants are those species “not presently endangered but at risk over a longer period through continued depletion". In Victoria, the species is restricted to small populations in the eastern highlands and to the west of Melbourne (Willis, 1972; Beauglehole, 1980). This paper presents in- formation on all populations recorded *15 Brookes Crescent, Macedon, Vic. 3440. 68 from the latter area. Methods Information in this paper was collated from published sources of distributional material (e.g. Willis (1972), Costermans (1981), Beauglehole (1980; 1982; 1983a; 1983b), Land Conservation Council, Vic- toria (1985)). In addition, unpublished data held by the Flora Survey section of the Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands, and the Register of Rare Plants of Victoria (LaTrobe University) were examined. АП specimens of Discaria species held by the National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL) and the Herbarium of the Uni- versity of Melbourne (MELU) were in- spected. Selected areas on the Campaspe River were surveyed in 1986, including all sites from which the species was known. Distribution Discaria pubescens has been recorded from twelve sites west of Melbourne. Sites are restricted to two geographic regions; the Ballarat area and the Campaspe River, between Kyneton and Redesdale (Fig. 1). Information of each site is presented below. Victorian Nat. А MOUNT COLE DAYLESFORD Fig. 1. Distribution of Discaria pubescens west of Melbourne, Victoria, Locality numbers follow those in the text. Ballarat area The first Victorian record for D. pub- escens is from the Ballarat area. On 27 September 1836, Major Thomas Mitchell “saw for the first time the Discaria pubescens” (quoted in Willis, 1942), whilst travelling “in the vicinity of the Loddon River, near present-day Newstead” (Willis, 1942). Seventeen years were to elapse before D. pubescens was collected for a Victorian herbarium. In February 1853, Baron Ferdi- nand von Mueller collected a specimen from “Between the Loddon and Creswick Creek” (annotation on herbarium speci- men). Von Mueller’s historic specimen is held by the National Herbarium of Vic- toria (MEL 56211). Willis (1942) considered that D. pub- escens was “confined in its distribution west of Melbourne to the basalt region within thirty miles of Ballarat". In 1955, Willis listed five sites west of Melbourne: Mt Warrenheip, Birch's Creek, Middle Creek near Mt Cole, Creswick Creek and Lal Lal Falls. Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) No further localities for D. pubescens have been recorded from tie Ballarat region. At least two populations listed by Willis (1942; 1955) have since become extinct. 1. Newstead Discaria pubescens has not been recorded from the vicinity of Newstead since Mitchell’s sighting on 27 September 1836. The species must now be presumed extinct in this area. 2. Birch's Creek The National Herbarium of Victoria holds two specimens collected from Birch's Creek by J. H. Willis in 1938, They were found “between Clunes Reservoir and Wheeler’s bridge" and “near the bluestone weir, +6 miles north of Creswick" (MEL 56218). The second specimen bears the note *only two old bushes seen". Willis (1942) wrote that he found "several plants [of D. pubescens] in the narrow rocky valley of Birch's Creek (below Clunes reservoir, a few miles west of Newlyn)”. This population declined 69 dramatically over the next 15 years: “A visit to Birch’s Creek, near Cres- wick, in January 1953 showed that the small anchor plant colony there had dwindled to one decrepit, moribund bush, unequal to its battle for existence beneath encroaching tangles of intro- duced broom?’ (Willis, 1955). After a further eleven years, this plant too had succumbed. On 24 February 1964, Willis wrote on a herbarium specimen collected in 1938 (MEL 56218): “now presumed extinct in this area". 3. Creswick Creek “Three old, yet vigorous, bushes... [which] would appear fit to survive for many years" were noted from Creswick Creek by Willis (1955). No specimens are held by the National Herbarium of Victoria, The Herbarium of the University of Melbourne holds a specimen collected from “Creswick Creek near Clunes" in 1966 by H. W. Bond. He noted that the species was "rare" at the site. An annota- tion made in 1962 by J. H. Willis on a specimen collected from Birch’s Creek (MEL 56218 — see above) includes the remark, “still surviving on Creswick Creek near Cattle Station Hill”. More recent surveys of Creswick Creek by Scarlett (1986) have found four plants on private property to the west of Cattle Station Hill. 4. Mt Warrenheip The Herbarium of the University of Melbourne holds an old, un-dated speci- men of D. pubescens, collected by Lang from “Mt Warrenheip" (MELU 15244). It probably was collected around the turn of the century. Locality information on old herbarium specimens often is cursory and frequently refers to broad zones or to nearby land- marks, rather than to specific, geographic locations. (For example, many specimens collected by von Mueller are defined only by the region “Port Phillip".) Lang's collec- 70 tion is the only record of D. pubescens from Mt Warrenheip. As all known populations west of Melbourne are restricted to basaltic valleys, it seems probable that Lang’s specimen was collected from a similar environment near Mt Warrenheip, and not from the forested mountain. 5. Lal Lal Falls The Lal Lal Falls stand of D. pubescens has received more attention than all other populations of the species. И was first recorded in 1885 by the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria (Anon., 1885). Fourteen species from the falls, including D. pubescens, were “noted as uncommon near Melbourne" (Anon., 1885). (This lisi also included a number of widespread species, such as Clematis aristata and Tetratheca ciliata.). H. B. Williamson collected a specimen from “Lal Lal Falls on Moorabool River (SE of Ballarat, Vic.)" in November 1913. This specimen is lodged with the National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL 56210), апа was discussed by Willis (1942; 1955). Willis collected two specimens (MEL 56216 and 56217) т 1962, from “200 yards upstream from [the] falls". The specimen labels include the note; "six very od bushes [were seen] on northern bank of creek, in basaltic terrain? Two years later, Wheeler (1964) recorded two bushes "c the north bank ... 500 yards upstreain from the falls". Recent surveys by Scarlett (1986) have discovered ten plants at the Lal Lal Falls. Lal Lal Falls is the only site of D. pubescens in the Ballarat area which 15 under public ownership. Its importance for the preservation of D. pubescens was recognised by the Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1982), which recom- mended that D. pubescens be protected within the Lal Lal Falls Scenic Reserve. 6. Middle Creek Willis (1942) noted having "seen an occasional Anchor Plant on the plains Victorian Nat. adjoining Middle Creek, near Mount Cole” No specimens from this locality exist in either the National Herbarium of Vic- toria or the Herbarium of the University of Melbourne. No recent sightings from Middle Creek have been documented and the present status of this population is unknown, Campaspe River In contrast to the Ballarat area, from which all sites were known by 1955, only one population on the Campaspe River was documented prior to 1979. Popu- lations on the Campaspe River increase the distribution of the species beyond the area "within thirty miles of Ballarat” which was known to Willis in 1942. Six populations are presently known from the Campaspe River between Kyneton and Redesdale. However, the area has not been systematically surveyed and additional stands may be discovered. 7. Mitchell’s Falls The National Herbarium of Victoria holds a specimen (MEL 56209) collected in 1958 by M. Allender from “below Mitchell’s Falls near Barfold columns? This is the only record from this site. Allender recorded on the herbarium label that *only one plant [was] seen". Searches by the author in 1986 failed to find any plants of D. pubescens. However, a thorough survey of the steep gorge is very difficult and specimens may be discovered in the future. Given the apparent longevity of the plant and the absence of recent, vegetation disturbance at Mitchell's Falls, it has been assumed (Tables | and 2) that “one plant” still may occur below the falls. 8. Queen’s Falls In 1979, N. Scarlett discovered 12 plants just upstream of Queen’s Falls. Of these, 11 were present in 1986 (Scarlett, 1986). This population is situated closer to the river bed than is any other stand on the Campaspe River. Many plants exist within the flood zone of the river and flood debris Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) is piled around the upstream side of bushes. The site is very weedy (see Table 3) and very rocky: rock outcrops may have protected the plants from grazing and clearing. Although all plants were healthy, no young plants were seen. 9. Turpin’s Falls D. pubescens was recorded from Turpin's Falls Scenic Reserve by Beaugle- hole (1982), as a “personal communica- tion" from the late F. Robbins. Two, mature plants were located by the author in 1986. Turpin's Falls Scenic Reserve is the only D. pubescens site on the Campaspe River under public ownership. The National Herbarium of Victoria holds a specimen of uncertain origin which may have been collected from Turpin's Falls. It was held by the private herbaria of F. Robbins and А. C. Beauglehole prior to being lodged with the National Herb- arium of Victoria. The specimen label (written by Beauglehole) reads, “Victoria ? Trentham Е. Robbins about 1937". No other records from the Trentham area are known, and it is possible the Robbins collected the specimen from Turpin’s Falls. 10. Rogerson's Bridge Two small stands comprising, in total, three plants were discovered by the author in May 1986, between Rogerson's Bridge and Turpin's Falls Scenic Reserve. Both stands are on the upper slopes of the river valley on eastern aspects. No young plants were present. 11. Langley D. pubescens was discovered along the Campaspe River immediately west of Langley by Mrs L. Prictor and Mr and Mrs E. Watson in March 1986. Eighteen plants are scattered over approximately 1.5 km. Тре southern-most plant is approximately 200 m north of the Boundary Road Bridge across the Campaspe River. All plants аге mature or senescent. Two plants consisted 71 Table 1: Number of plants of D. pubescens presently surviving in all recorded localities west of Melbourne. Location No. of plants Location No. of plants Ballarat Area ‚ Newstead . Birch's Creek . Creswick Creek . Mt Warrenheip . Lal Lal Falls . Middle Creek суол эшо гә — = >пгеољоеоо Campaspe River 7. Mitchell’s Falls 1 8. Queen's Falls 11 9. Turpin’s Falls 10. Rogerson’s Bridge 3 11. Langley 18 12. Hazeldene 3 solely of basal regeneration from seemingly dead trunks. Many apparently “healthy” specimens also displayed basal regeneration. 12. Hazeldene This small population, which consists of only three plants, was discovered and surveyed at the same time as the Langley stand. It is situated on the Campaspe River, immediately east of the “Hazel- dene" property, and 0.6 km south of Rollinsons Road. No young plants were recorded. The Hazeldene population represents the first extant record of D. pubescens from the Melbourne Study Area (Beaugle- hole, 1983b) The Land Conservation Council of Victoria (1985) lists D. pubescens as “presumed extinct” within the western half (District One) of the Melbourne area. Discussion Status Fifty-two individuals and nine popu- lations of D. pubescens exist to the west of Melbourne (see Tables 1 and 2). Only two populations, at Lal Lal Falls and Turpins Falls, occur on public land. They comprise only 12 plants. Both sites were recommended as Scenic Reserves by the Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1981; 1982). Plants in the Lal Lal Falls reserve are protected by fencing, but no such protection exists at Turpin’s Falls. Two populations in the Ballarat area 72 have become extinct in the past century, viz. Newstead and Birch’s Creek. A record from a third population, Mt Warrenheip, probably refers to a broad region, near Mt Warrenheip, rather than to the mountain itself. The current status of the Middle Creek population is unknown. In 1942, Willis remarked that: “from records at present available it would seem that the species is confined in its dis- tribution west of Melbourne to the basalt region within thirty miles of Ballarat”. D. pubescens now is known to occur in the Ballarat region and on the Campaspe River, north of Kyneton. Indeed, the Campaspe River area supports more ex- tant populations and more individuals (38 cf. 14 plants) than does the Ballarat region. Habitat All stands west of Melbourne occur in stream valleys, on well-drained and usually stony, basaltic soils. Specific habitat Table 2: Status of D. pubescens west of Melbourne. Recorded populations 12 Extant populations 9 Extant populations on public land 2 Extant populations on private land 7 Extant plants 52 Extant plants on public land 12 Extant plants on private land 40 Victorian Nat. Table 3: Associated species at D. pubescens sites on the Campaspe River. Table shows dominant species only. Nomenclature follows Willis (1970; 1972) with amendments by Forbes ef al. (1984) * = introduced species. Species/site Turpin’s Falls Rogerson's Bridge Langley Hazeldene Queen's Falls Acacia melanoxylon * Agrostis capillaris * Avena sp. *Bromus sp. *Crataegus monogyna x Danthonia sp. *Holcus lanatus X *Hordeum sp. Eucalyptus viminalis x Eucalyptus camaldulensis Hymenanthera dentata x *Phalaris sp. Poa labillardieri x *Rosa rubiginosa x *Rubus fruticosus spp. agg. *Ulex europaeus X X X x x X x X X X X X X X X X X X X X preferences within valleys are not known. Plants commonly occur at the upper edge of the stream valley. The Queen’s Falls population, however, is situated very low on the slope, close to the river, and is frequently inundated by floods. Prior to European settlement, the spec- ies probably grew extensively within stream valleys, from the break of slope adjacent to the plains, to lower slopes near the stream bed. It is possible that D. pubescens also occurred on the adjacent plains prior to European settlement, and that its present absence is due to agricultural clearing and grazing. Unfortunately, the total lack of records from the plains provides no sup- port for such a hypothesis. The absence of records from likely sites, such as less- intensively managed roadsides and rail- lines, perhaps renders the hypothesis unlikely. Unlike Hymenanthera dentata (Tree Violet) and Dodonaea cuneata (Wedge- leaf Hop-bush), which are common spec- ies of basaltic river valleys, D. pubescens Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) has not been observed to grow on rocky cliff-faces. All populations at the Cam- paspe River occur on gentle or moderate slopes. Although plants frequently grow near rock outcrops, none have been observed in rock crevices or on cliffs. D. pubescens has no preference for waterfalls, as may be imagined from the list of locality names. The relative abundance of waterfall records (33% of all records) could reflect the preservation of native vegetation at these sites, or may simply result from selective sampling of waterfalls by naturalists and botanists. Many other stretches of the Campaspe River are visited infrequently and surveyed very rarely. Weed invasion All sites on the Campaspe River have a high proportion of introduced species (Table 3). The Queen’s Falls population, the second largest stand, is in danger of being over-run by introduced Ulex europaeus (Gorse) and Rubus fruticosus spp. agg. (Blackberry). Competition from 73 naturalised species such as Holcus lanatus (Yorkshire Fog) and Phalaris spp. (Canary- grass) may inhibit regeneration in many populations. An additional threat to rem- nant populations could arise from weed- eradication programs, due to confusion of the spiny D, pubescens with introduced Ulex europaeus. Regeneration and rarity Discaria pubescens is capable of vegetative regeneration from the base of the adult plant. A specimen collected from Wulgulmerang, East Gippsland (by J. H. Willis in 1962) displays coppice “regrowth after a burn" (quoted from herbarium label; MEL). Similar coppice growth occurs frequently, on both healthy and apparently dead plants, in Campaspe River populations, Seedling regeneration is an extremely rare occurrence. Every plant of 2. pubescens observed on the Campaspe River was mature or senescent. An absence of seedlings appears to be typical of remaining populations. Dr. J. H. Willis, in a personal communication (27.5.1986), remarked: "1 have never yet seen any young seedling plants", Previous writers largely have attributed the rarity of D. pubescens to the effects of grazing and agricultural clearing. Hooker (1855, quoted in Willis, 1955) wrote that the plant was “much browsed on by cattle and sheep", and Willis (1955) stated that its distribution was reduced by clearing and by grazing by rabbits and stock. Whilst these processes undoubtedly have con- tributed to the decline of D. pubescens, they are unlikely to be solely responsible for its present rarity. No evidence of browsing of mature D. pubescens was observed at Campaspe River populations, even though most sites have been grazed by sheep, and probably by cattle, for a considerable period. Healthy plants usually possessed a squat, near-spherical shape. In contrast, the lower and middle branches of Hymenanthera dentata, which were growing near to D. 74 pubescens at Langley, were grazed severely. It appears, from this circumstantial evidence, that Н. dentata is grazed preferentially over D. pubescens; and yet the former species is very common on basalt plains and valleys. Grazing by stock and rabbits does not account for the complete absence of young plants in relatively protected areas, such as between large rocks on moderately steep, riparian slopes. Adult bushes occur frequently on such sites. These environ- ments rarely are subjected to high grazing intensities, and occasional seedlings (at least) would be expected to escape from predation by rabbits. It appears that the present absence of young plants of D. pubescens is due to problems in seedling regeneration which are not directly a consequence of grazing. Detailed ecological studies of seed viability and germination, and of seedling growth are required urgently to determine the extent to which these factors are con- tributing to the decline of this rare species. Outlook The prospects for stands of 2. pubescens to the west of Melbourne are not encouraging. The paucity of plants on public land (only 12); the weediness of existing populations; and the total lack of seedling recruitment, are likely to con- tribute to the continual decline of existing populations. The decline of the Australian Anchor Plant is not a fortuitous event; but reflects the decimation of the flora and fauna of the basaltic plains and valleys of western Victoria, The survival of D. pubescens in а near- natural environment requires further protection and restoration of the basaltic biota, and increased research into methods of rehabilitation. In the absence of such measures, Discaria pubescens, and many other species of indigenous flora and fauna, may vanish soon from the basaltic regions of western Victoria, Victorian Nat. Acknowledgements Special thanks are due to Dr R. F. Parsons for discussions on the present status of 2. pubescens in Victoria; Dr R, Е Parsons, Је Yugovic and lan Clarke for comments on drafts of the manuscript; members of the Ballarat Field Naturalists Club for information on distributions in the Ballarat area; Dr J. H. Willis Гог locality information; and to Mrs Lois Prictor of Kyneton, who first alerted me to the existence of D. pubescens on the Campaspe River. REFERENCES Anon. (1885). The Excursion to Lal Lal. Victorian Nat. 2:94-9. Beauglehole, А, C. (1980). Victorian Vascular Plani Checklists. Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, Portland, Beauglehole, А. С. (1982). The Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the North Central area. Victoria, Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, Portland. Beauglehole, A. C. (1983a). The Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the Ballarat area, Victoria. Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, Portland. Beauglehole, А. C. (1983b). Тле Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the Melbourne area, Victoria. Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, Portland. Costermans, L. (1981). Native Trees and Shrubs of South-eastern Australia. Rigby. Forbes, S. 1., Gullan, P. K., Kilgour, В. A. and Powell, М. А. (1984). А Census of the Vascular Plants of Victoria, National Herbarium of Victoria Galbraith, J. (1977). 4 Field Guide ro the Wild Flowers of South-east Australia. Collins. Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1981), Final Recommendations. North-central LEG, Melbourne. Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1982), Final Recommendations, Ballarat Study Area, LCC, Melbourne, Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1985). Report on the Melbourne Study Area. District One Review, LCC, Melbourne. Leigh, J., Briggs, J. and Hartley, W. (1981). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants, Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service, Special Publication 7, Canberra, Scarlett, М, H, (1986). А Register of Кате und Endangered Native Plant Species in Victorta. LaTrobe University, Botany Dept. (unpublished). Wheeler, J, (1964), А Rare Plant at Lal Lal. Geelong Nat. 1:11 Willis, J. H. (1942). Notes on Victorian Rhamnaceae Part 2. Victorian Nat. 59:67-69. Willis, J. Н. (1955). The Australian Anchor Plant (Discaria pubescens). Its distriburion and present status, and occurrence along Creswick Creek, Vic, and notes on the fruiting structure. Victorian Nat, 72:51-55, Willis, 1. И. (1970). 4 Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Volume I. Ferns, Conifers and Monocotvledons. 2nd ed. Melbourne University Press. Willis, J. H. (1972). А Handbook to Planis in Victoria. Volume IT. Dicotyledons. Melbourne University Press. Area. Plea for Naturalised Conifer Collections Mr. Ken Hill, National Herbarium of NSW is preparing the account of conifers for the Flora of Australia, Volume 48. Naturalised conifers are very poorly represented in Australian herbaria and collections are required to provide information for the Flora of Australia, A naturalised conifer is one reproducing outside of cultivation or plantations. Adequately pressed and dried herbarium specimens including a small branch 25-30 cm long with leaves or needles and terminal buds and if possible а cone are required. Specimens should include notes on locality, habit and habitat and the collector's name, collecting number and date of collection. Detailed instructions on plant collecting are available from the National Herbarium of Victoria. Specimens should be collected in duplicate so that one collection can remain in Melbourne and the other be sent on exchange to Sydney. Collections before the end of 1987 will be especially valuable. Send collections to: Stephen Forbes, Department of Conservation Forests and Lands National Herbarium of Victoria Birdwood Avenue SOUTH YARRA VICTORIA 3141 AUSTRALIA Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 75 Observations on а Dasytes Species (Ме!упдае : Coleoptera), a Pollen-Feeding Beetle on Daisies (Asteraceae) in Northern New South Wales. By T. J. HAWKESWOOD* Abstract Observations are provided on a Dasytes species (Coleoptera: Melyridae), which feeds on the pollen of various daisies (Asteraceae) in the Ebor district, north- east New South Wales. Of 7 species of daisy growing in the area, 5 were visited by beetles. Only two species, Hypochoeris radicata L. and Podolepis jaceoides (Sims) Voss were frequently visited. No specimens were observed on Crepis capillaris (L.) Wallr. and Senecio lautus Forst. f. ex Willd. Of a total of 42 live beetles counted, pollen was observed on the bodies of 35 (83%). The majority of beetles carried pollen on the abdomen and elytra. Their role in the pollination of the daisies is probably minor due to their small popu- lation size. Introduction Almost nothing has been recorded on the biology of Dasytes species (Melyridae). Lea (1909) in the last revision of the genus, noted that one species, D. bourgeoisi Lea from Tasmania, was “common on flow- ers". Opportunity to observe one Dasytes species in the field arose on 11 February 1984, on a plateau above Ebor Falls, north- east New South Wales (30?24'S, 152?20 'E). Beetles were resting, mating or feeding on pollen from the inflorescences of various daisies (Asteraceae). These plants were growing in a woodland com- munity dominated by Eucalyptus species (Myrtaceae) and various grasses (Poaceae) (Fig. 1). *49 Venner Road, Annerley, Brisbane, Queensland, 4103. 76 Materials and Methods (a) Identification of daisies: Samples of the flowering daisies at the study site were collected and identified by comparisons with named specimens in the Herbarium of the University of New England, Armi- dale (UNE). No voucher specimens were deposited in the Herbarium since most of the species are common and well represent- ed from the Armidale region. The daisies collected were as follows: Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.) Andrews, H. api- culatum (Labill.) DC., Podolepis jaceoides (Sims) Voss, Brachycome nova-anglica С. L. Davis, Senecio lautus Forst. Е. ex Willd., Crepis capillaris (L.) Wallr. and Hypochoeris radicata L. (The later two taxa are introduced weeds from Europe). Тће daisies were dominant among the few herbaceous species in flower in the area. (b) Identification of beetles: A small sample of beetles was collected for later identification and is deposited in the Australian National Insect Collection (ANIC) in Canberra; voucher No. ANIC 84-0054. The specific identity remains un- known, since the species does not key out in Lea (1909). (T. A. Weir, 1984, pers. comm., informs me that the Australian species of Dasytes will be eventually placed into another genus, so the name Dasytes is tentative at this stage). (c) Sampling and observations on beet- les: A transect of 30 metres was taken across the study area beginning at the edge of a cliff and leading towards the Ebor Falls car park. The number of inflor- escences of each species situated within 3 m either side of the transect line was counted, in addition to the number of beetles on inflorescences and the percent- Victorian Nat. Fig. 1. Study site with Eucalyptus species in the background and daisies and grasses dominating the ground zone strata. The cliff and falls are to the left of the photograph. Table 1. Number of beetles (excluding dead individuals) counted on the inflorescences of 7 daisy species (Asteraceae) оп 11 February 1984 at Ebor Falls, New South Wales. Species No. of Abundance No. of beetles % of inflorescences index + counted inflorescences counted with beetles Helichrysum bracteatum 279 1.00 1 0.4 Helichrysum apiculatum 144 0.52 5 2.8 Senecio lautus 7 0.03 0 0.0 Brachycome nova-anglica 19 0.07 3 15.8 Podolepis jaceoides 49 0.18 12 24.5 *Hypochoeris radicata 108 0.39 21 15:9 *Crepis capillaris 36 0.13 0 0.0 Totals 642 = 42 = * Introduced species. + Based on number of inflorescences and not number of plants with Я. bracteatum as base. age of inflorescences possessing beetles at was calculated using the most common the time of observation (Table 1). The species as a base (Table 1). Each beetle number of beetles per inflorescence of the counted was closely examined for pollen various species was also recorded (Fig. 2). and the sites of deposition recorded (Table An abundance index for each plant species 2). Pollen from the flowers was clearly Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 77 FIG. 2 Key D Helichrysum bracteatum 10 Helichrysum apiculatum Ш Brachycome nova-anglica W Podolepis jaceoides ЕЧ Hypochoeris radicata NO. OF INFLORESCENCES NO. OF BEETLES Fig. 2. Number of inflorescences of each plant species with 1,2,3, or 4 beetles at the time of observations. visible to the naked eye as small, variable- sized, yellow clusters on the beetles’ bodies, Any behavioural patterns were recorded. Results Of 642 inflorescences counted in the transect, only 33 possessed live beetles (Fig. 2). Another 6 inflorescences of 4 species possessed a single dead beetle each (Table 2). Cobwebs on two specimens in- dicated that spider predation may have been the cause of death in these cases. Abundance of a plant species generally did not correlate with the number of beetles on flowers, e.g. only one beetle was ob- served from 279 inflorescence of Heli- chrysum bracteatum examined (Table 1). The majority of beetles (50%) were found on the introduced plant Hypochoeris radicata, while (28.5%) visited Podolepis jaceoides (Table 1). Pollen was most frequently carried on the abdomen and elytra in the majority of beetles examined, while some beetles carried pollen on all parts of the body (Table 2). Of the total 42 Dasytes sp. counted in the transect, 27 (64.3%) were found as single beetles on inflorescences, while rarely 3 or 4 beetles were observed together (Fig. 2). Most of the beetles were observed rest- ing on the petals of ligulate flowers (Fig. 3) or tubular flowers of the daisies or feeding from the stamens or the pollen vy Fig. 3. Dasytes sp. on Brachycome nova-anglica. Table 2. Number of dead beetles, sites of pollen deposition and the number of live beetles carrying pollen, observed on 5 daisy species on 11 February, 1984 at Ebor Falls, N.SW. Species Place of pollen deposition + No. of dead beetles A B С р Е Е counted Helichrysum bracteatum 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Helichrysum apiculatum | 1 1 3 1 2 1 Brachycome nova-anglica 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 Podolepis jaceoides 0 1 3 8 11 3 1 *Hypochoeris radicata 7 9 10 12 13 8 2 Totals 8 11 14 23 27 13 6 + A = antennae, В = head, С = thorax, Р = abdomen, Е = * Introduced species 78 elytra, F = legs. Victorian Nat. Fig. 4. Dasytes sp. on Helichrysum apiculatum. The male is attempting to mate with the female while the female feeds on pollen, adhering to the styles of the bisexual tubular flowers (Figs. 4 and 5) (or in the case of Hypochoeris radicata, feeding from the ligulate flowers). The beetles were usually messy feeders. Pollen was often brushed from the stamens and style onto their bodies during movement and feeding, Some beetles attempted to mate during feeding bouts (Fig. 3). Most beetles were active and usually undertook flight upon disturbance. Discussion The Melyridae have been found to be exclusively anthophilous in Europe (Proc- tor and Yeo 1973) but since they are of little importance in the pollination of flowers compared to other insect vectors, their pollination biology has not been ex- tensively investigated. In Australia, the taxonomy and biology of the 200 or so species are poorly known and nothing has been written about their role in pollination of native plants. Britton (1970) notes that Melyridae are “almost always carnivorous, and are commonly found on flowers". Тће observations noted here indicate Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) that Dasytes sp. frequently contact the anthers and styles of Hypochoeris radicata, Podolepis jaceoides and Brachycome nova-anglica, while flowers of Helichrysum species are occasionally visited. However, since the Dasytes sp. were present in low numbers, with individual beetles likely to visit more than one species of daisy during daily feeding, and since they are tiny beetles (3-4 mm total body length) unlikely to require large quantities of pollen for sustenance, their role in pollination of the daisies is probably minor. In addition, since many Asteraceae have flowers which are commonly apom- ictic, and/or self pollinating (auto- gamous), inter-flower or inter-plant cross- pollination by insects or other vectors is not required for viable seed set. The majority of beetles carried pollen on the elytra and abdomen (Table 2). These regions of a beetle’s body usually have the largest surface areas and are often covered to various degrees in hairs, which facilitate transportation of pollen, Many Dasytes species are characterized by having erect, 79 Fig. 5, Dasytes sp. on Podolepis jaceoides. The two beetles were feeding on pollen before being disturbed by the camera flash. Pollen grains (p) are attached to various parts of the dorsal body surface of the insects. bristly hairs on the pronotum and/or elytra in addition to shorter micro-hairs (Lea, 1909), In the case of Dasytes sp. at Ebor, large clusters of pollen were fre- quently observed on the elytra which possess long, erect, stiff hairs (Fig. 5). It is interesting to note that Dasytes were more common on Hypochoeris and Podolepis than on the other daisies despite these two genera not being the most common in terms of inflorescence numbers (Table 1). The reason for this anomaly may lie in the structure of the inflorescence. In Hypochoeris, the flowers are all ligulate (see Beadle e: a/. 1972) and the pollen is more accessible due to larger flower size and more abundant per flower than in the tubular flowers of the remaining species in this study. In add- ition, the flower heads (capitula) of Heli- chrysum and Crepis contain several hundred tightly clustered tubular flowers per inflorescence, while those of Hypo- choeris, Podolepis, Brachycome and Sene- cio have fewer (mostly less than a hundred) 80 bisexual flowers per inflorescence. In these four genera, the flowers are not so densely packed, a condition which appears to allow easier procurement of pollen by the beetles. Acknowledgements I would like to thank Dr. N. Prakash, Dept. of Botany, University of New England, Armidale, N.SW. for reading and commenting on the manuscript. I also thank Messrs Н. Wissman and W, Sheather for assistance with the identification of the Asteraceae and Mr. T. А. Weir, АМЛС., Canberra, for identification of the beetle. This research was privately funded and I thank my mother for assistance. REFERENCES Beadle, N. C. W., Evans, O. D. and Carolin, R. C., (1972). Flora of the Sydney Region. (Reed, Sydncy). 724 pp. Britton, E. B., (1970). Chapter 30. In: The Insects of Australia. (C.S.1.R,O. Melb, Uni. Press, Melbourne). 1029 pp. Lea, A. M., (1909). Revision of the Australian and Tasmanian Malacodermidae. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1909: 45-251. Proctor, M. and Yeo, P., (1973), The Pollination of Flowers. (Collins, London). 418 pp. Victorian Nat. А note on the existence of pre-Pleistocene fossils of parastacid crayfish. By ANTHONY SOKOL* Fossil parastacids have rarely been docu- mented and are generally listed only from the Pleistocene - Recent (Glaessner, 1960; 1969; Bishop, 1967). Woods (1964), how- ever, noted the occurrence of an un- described parastacid from the Lower Tert- јагу (Palaeocene) Darra formation of south-eastern Queensland. This specimen (Queensland Museum, QMF5740) was later figured, but not identified, in Hill e al. (1970), “Cainozoic fossils of Queens- land". I have examined this specimen and, although it consists only of one chela, it is clearly closely allied to, or perhaps a member of the eastern Australian genus Euastacus (Fig. 1). The conspicuous tuberculation and spination (particularly the prominent dactyl spine) is char- acteristic of many extant species of Euastacus (Morgan, 1983). The existence of a second Tertiary fossil from Queensland was noted by Rozefelds (1985), who questioned its original des- cription as a zygopteran nymph, While the chelae, telson and uropods are apparent on this specimen, preservation is too poor to enable classification. This specimen was collected from the Eocene-mid-Miocene Duaringa formation in mid-eastern Queensland (Rozefelds, 1985). Stirton et al. (1961) also recorded the ocurrence of gastroliths and chela fragments in late Tertiary sediments from northern South Australia. Extension of the above mentioned Pleis- tocene limit for parastacid fossils is not surprising given that northern hemisphere freshwater crayfish (family: Astacidae) Fig. 1. Fossil parastacid chela from the Lower Tertiary Darra formation of south-eastern Queensland. The prominent dacty! spine is indicated by an arrow. (approx. actual size).Photograph by B. Fuhrer. *Zoology Department, Monash University, Clayton, Victoria, 3168, Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 81 have been recorded from the Upper Juras- sic-Lower Cretaceous (Glaessner, 1969). Some fossil freshwater crayfish material does lie unsorted in the collections of various researchers and examination of this and new material in the future may extend the fossil parastacid record into the Mesozoic. REFERENCES Bishop, J. А. 1967. The zoogeography of the Australian freshwater decapod Crustacea. In: “Australian Inland Waters and their Fauna”. (Ed. A. H. Weatherley) Australian National University Press, Canberra. Pp. 107-122. Glaessner, М. Е 1960. The fossil decoped Crustacea of New Zealand and the evolution of the order Decapoda. N.Z. Geol. Surv. Paleont. Bull. 31: 1-51. Glaessner, M. F. 1969. Decapoda, In: "Treatise om invertebrate palaeontology- Part R Arthropoda" (Ed. R. C. Moore). The Geological Society of America Inc. Pp. 400-532. Hill, D., Playford, С. and Woods, J. T. 1970. Cainozoic fossils of Queensland. Queensland Palaeontographical Society, Brisbane. Morgan, С. J. 1983. А taxonomic revision of the Jreshwater crayfish genus Euastacus (Decapoda: Parastacidae). Ph.D. Thesis, Department of Zoology, Monash University, Victoria. Rozefelds, А. C. 1985. A fossil zygopteran nymph (Insecta: Odonata) from the Late Triassic Aberdare Conglomerate, south-east Queensland. Proc. R. Soc. Queensl. 96: 25-32. Stirton, К. А., Tedford, В. H. and Miller A. H. 1961. Cenozoic stratigraphy and vertebrate paleontology of the Tirari Desert, South Australia. Кес, S, Aust, Mus. 14: 19-61. Woods, J. T. 1964. The geological history of the Crustacea, with some remarks on their phylogeny. Proc. К. Soc, Queensl. 76:1-14. Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria — 4 Richea gunnii J. D. Hook. (Epacridaceae) : A New Heath for Victoria Ву М. G. WALSH* Richea is a genus of 11 species of alpine and subalpine shrubs, mostly restricted to Tasmania where the genus displays a high degree of structural diversity. Most species form compact shrubs to about 1 m tall but the largest species, pandani (R. pandanifolia), may form an impressive, often unbranched tree to 12 m with a habit strongly reminiscent of a palm or of the widely cultivated cordyline (C: australis). Until recently the sole mainland repre- sentative of the genus was thought to be candle heath (R. continentis), a sharp- leaved, low, hummock-forming shrub usually fringing alpine sphagnum bogs and watercourses in Victoria and southern New South Wales. This plant will be es- pecially recalled by bushwalkers who may emerge from thickets with minor lacer- ations to the lower legs! Bushwalkers be- ware! Richea gunnii, an equally sharp- *National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Ave. South Yarra 3141. 82 leaved shrub recently discovered in Vic- toria grows to heights of 2 m or more, but perhaps fortunately for some, the plant does not form such dense swards as does its mainland relative and from current in- formation, it is rare in Victoria, apparently restricted to depressions on and near the Baw Baw plateau and the Blue Range, be- tween Marysville and Taggerty. Distinguishing features of R. gunnii: Richea gunnii (Fig la – 1с) forms a spreading to narrowly erect shrub with at least the uppermost stems ascending. The stems are leafless for the greater part but have conspicuous scars from where the stem-sheathing leaves have fallen. The foliage is usually restricted to the upper 5-20 cm of the stems. The leaves are stiff, narrow and sharp-pointed to 6 cm long. Their margins are finely serrated and the leaf bases envelop and completely obscure the stems. In shape and form the leaves of Victorian Nat. 27 3 б с 2 UN Tàduxjoggnokt Fig. 1. Richea ритпи (a) habit x1 (b) flower with corolla attached x8 (c) flower after corolla has fallen x8. Richea continentis (d) habit х1 (e) flower with corolla attached x8 (f) flower after corolla has fallen x8. (a)-(c) drawn from specimen at Melbourne Herbarium, N. G. Walsh no. 694. (d)-(f) drawn from specimen at Melbourne Herbarium, T. B. Muir no, 1063, Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 83 К. gunnii strongly resemble those of К. continentis, however that species has leaves rarely exceeding 4 cm long and the older leaves or their withered remains are re- tained along the lower stems. The flowers of both species are also similar, that is, they are shaped rather like a bell, about 3 mm long, with the petals entirely fused forming a closed hood over the 5 erect stamens and short style. The corolla 15 deciduous and falls as a whole in an analagous manner to the operculum of eucalypt flowers. the stamens of А. gunnii are rather long, 3-5 mm, far exceeding the 5 short (about Imm), blunt sepals. Their anthers are narrowly oblong. The style is slightly shorter than the staminal filaments . Richea continentis (Fig. ld — 1f) has stamens barely exceeding the rounded or slightly pointed sepals which are generally 2-3 mm long. Their anthers are broadly elliptic when open but about as long as those of А. gunnii. The style is only about half the length of the staminal filaments, The flowers of both species are arranged in small clusters, each embraced by a deciduous bract 1-2 cm long which is somewhat fleshy and pink toward the base. It is the arrangement of the flowers in the inflorescence which clearly separates the two species. In R. gunnii the inflorescence is a rather dense, narrow, terminal panicle up to 10 cm long, not or barely exceeding the uppermost leaves whereas R. continentis has its flowers more sparsely arranged within the slender panicle which is 10-25 cm long and quite devoid of flowers in the lower half. Ecology Both Richea gunnii and В. continentis are known from alpine or subalpine sites near watercourses or bogs, usually associated with sphagnum moss and al- pine swamp heath (Epacris paludosa). Present knowledge indicates that R. gunnii occurs at slightly lower altitudes than does its congener, in elevated valleys draining cool air from mountains upon which R. 84 continentis is abundant. The known localities are from the headwaters of the Acheron and Thomson Rivers which drain the Mt Margaret-Lake Mountain system and the Baw Baw Plateau respectively. The Baw Baw Plateau shares a number of bot- anical curiosities with Tasmania, species which are otherwise unknown on the mainland, the most intriguing of which is probably the tiny flannel-flower (Actinotus bellidioides) which has not been seen since its discovery near Mt Whitelaw in 1928. Conservation Status Richea gunnii has ben collected from public land within both national park and MMBW water supply areas. Although Richea gunnii must be considered rare, it is locally abundant and its survival in Victoria seems assured. It is hoped these notes and illustrations may assist in the discovery of further haunts of this new Victorian. Taxonomic Note Early texts eg. Ewart (1931) and Nicholls (1941, 1944), give К. gunnii as the only Victorian species of Richea. Fol- lowing revisionary work by B. L. Burtt in 1941, all mainland representatives of the genus were included in R. continentis, a “new” species described by that author. There is no doubt that the two species are quite distinct (Burrt considered R. gunnii’s closest congener to be Tasmanian R. scoparia) and it is therefore something of an irony that true R. gunnii again appears on Victorian plant census. Acknowledgement Т thank Anita Podwyszynski for the accompanying illustration which serves to clearly distinguish the two species. REFERENCES Вити, B. L., (1941) in Curtis’ Botanical Magazine 16319632. Curtis, W. M., (1963) The Students Flora of Tasmania. Pt. 2, Govt, Printer, Tasmania. Ewart, A. L, (1931) Flora of Victoria. Govt, Printer, Victoria. Nicholls, W. H., (1941, 1944) in Wild Life, 3:271 and 6:246 resp. Melbourne. Victorian Nat. Naturalist Note A magnificent blue toadstool (Entoloma nitidum) By J. H. WILLIS* AND ISOBEL CRAWFORD} Blue is a rather uncommon colour among toadstools, some conspicuous examples in Victoria being Mycena interrupta (“pixie’s para- sol”) and Cortinarius rotundisporus. While conducting a mycological excursion at the Rotamah Island Bird Observatory, Gippsland Lakes National Park, on 26 April 1985, we were delighted to find a large colony of gilled fungi with spectacular satiny-blue caps 4-8 cm wide. At first the species was assumed to be New Zealand Entolama hochstetteri which has a similar colour but more conical pilei; later, a careful examination revealed the correct identity, viz. Entoloma nitidum. The latter ranges widely in Europe, especially through cooler regions; but, as far as available records indicate, it has never been noted previously in Australia. The winter of 1985 was particularly wet at Rotamah, and favourable for fungal activity, whereas the same period in 1986 was exceptionally dry and no further specimens of Entoloma nitidum have appeared. On Rotamah Island it inhabited sandy ground in open Eucalyptus botryoides forest about 1.5 km ENE of the jetty and Observatory H.Q. Present as a rather dense understorey were trees and tall shrubs of Acacia mearnsii, A. longifolia, Banksia integrifolia, B. serrata, Monotoca ellip- tica, with plentiful Preridium esculentum (bracken fern), A comparison with habitats in Europe is interesting: according to R. M. and *102 Male Street, Brighton, Vic., 3186. TRotamah Island, РО. Box 75, Paynesville, Vic., 3880. Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) 5. М, Dáhncke, 1980 (700 Pilze in Farbfotos, р. 248), E. nitidum favours “mossy coniferous forest", while Lange and Hora, 1970 (Collins Guide to Mushrooms and Toadstools, p. 178), give "wet peaty soil, often under birch", the colour being “more or less indigo-blue”. The species belongs in Section Nitidi of pink- spored Entoloma, together with related Е. bloxamii, E. madidum, E. caelestinum and Е. violaceum. Of these, only the first (E. bloxamit) has been recorded for Australia - D. McAlpine, 1895)Syst. Arrangement of Aust. Fungi, p.20), ascribes it to S.A. and Vic., on “open exposed pastures” and coloured “blackish blue", al- though M. С, Cooke, 1892 (Handb. Aust. Fungi, р. 39), had cited only Victoria. If Cookes “E. bloxamii" were really а misidentification of Е. nitidum, then the Rotamah Island collection would not bea “first” for this continent – only critical examination of the specimen Cooke handled (should it still exist at Kew Herbarium) will settle the point. In any case, there is a possibility that Е. nitidum (and Е. bloxamii, if a genuine record) may be adventitious fungi from Europe, as are several other toadstools in Australia (e.g. Атап- ita muscaria and Lepista nuda). Rotamah Island has been extensively cleared and grazed until 1975 when the National Parks Service took it over; earlier this century it was also used for vegetable production, so fungal introductions (as well as existing weeds) might be expected there, The original (1985) material of Entoloma nitidum from Rotamah has been lodged in the Botany Department of Monash University. 85 Description of a New Genus of Carnivorous Snail (Mollusca : Rhytididae) BY BRIAN J. SMITH* Introduction The purpose of this paper is to erect a genus name within the family Rhytididae to accommodate a common species of snail in south-eastern Australia that is shown not to fit into any existing genus. Iredale (1933) erected the genus Strangesta to accommodate the large rhytidids from Queensland and northern New South Wales, with Helix leichardti Cox, 1864 as type species. However, uncharacteristically, he broadened his concept of the genus (Iredale 1938, 1943) to include the majority of the rhytidids of eastern Australia (18 species) from small, highly sculptured forms from southern Tasmania to the large Queensland species. Examination of a large series of eastern Australian rhytidids has revealed the existance of several generic groupings (Smith — unpublished). Strang- esta has been redefined (Smith, 1979) and most of the other described species can be placed into existing available genera, a full revision of which will be published elsewhere (Smith - in preparation). However, because of the choice by Iredale (1933) of the type species for the genera he erected for the various generic groupings, one group is left without an available generic name. This is the group based on the earliest species name of all the Australian rhytidids, Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832. Because of the similarities in radula and genital anatomy structure between this species and the New Zealand genus Rhytida it was tentatively placed with that genus in a recent field-guide (Smith and Kershaw, 1979). However, this placement is not satisfactory due to differences in shell and radula structure described below and a new genus is here erected for the group. *Honorary Associate in Invertebrate Zoology, Museum of Victoria, Melbourne. 86 Taxonomy Austrorhytida gen. nov. Diagnosis: Shell medium, thin, 4-5 whorls, flattened with slightly elevated spire, convex, rounded with a fairly wide umbilicus, aperture ovate-lunate. Sculpt- ure of fine, regular, radial striae above, usually smooth below, Colour light yellow to dark honey to russet, without pattern- ing. Radula with few lanceolate, recurved teeth grading rapidly from an almost vestigial rhacidian to a major tooth at 8 or 9, outside which are two to six vestigial laterals, Tooth 8 or 9 is over twice the length of tooth 1 and is a large, heavy tooth on a long base plate which probably articulates with the same tooth on adjacent rows, The tooth formula is approximately (2106) - (80r9) - 1 - (8 or 9) - (2106). The reproductive tract is simple with the penis, epiphallus and vagina all of approximately equal length. Remarks: The Australian rhytidid fauna is contained in seven genera which have either been recently redescribed using anatomical as well as shell characters (Smith 1969, 1979) or will be redescribed elsewhere shortly (Smith — in preparation). These seven genera, all described by Iredale (1933) are Victaphanta, Prolesophanta, Saladelos, Тахтарћепа, Strangesta, Namoitena and Torresiropa. Other generic names present in the literature are considered synonyms of one of these (Smith - in preparation). An eighth generic name, Occirhenea Iredale, 1933, should be considered incerta sedis as the original description is inadequate and only two shells of the single species have ever been collected (Smith, 1971). АП the available species names of Australian rhytidids, except four, can be located in these seven existing genera (Smith — unpublished). These four exceptions are synonynis of one species (see below), the senior name being Helix capillacea Victorian Nat. Table 1. А comparison of the shell and radula characters of existing rhytidid genera with Austrorhytida. Genera Shell colour Shell sculpture Shell size Radula type Victaphanta black and dark smooth large | brown Prolesophanta light horn smooth у. small I Saladelos yellow v. fine small I Tasmaphena dark yellow coarse medium Ш Strangesta yellow у. fine large IH Namoitena yellow v. fine large to IH medium Torresiropa pale horn v. fine small unknown Rhytida dark yellow irregular coarse medium IV Austrorhytida yellow fine medium IV Ferussac, 1832, Because of certain similarities between the radula structure of this species and members of the New Zealand genus Rhytida, the species was tentatively associated with that genus by Smith and Kershaw (1979). The shell and radula characters of the seven existing Australian genera, the genus Rhytida and Austrorhytida are compared in Table 1. In the table, four different radula types are referred to. These are characterized as follows:- Type 1 - teeth long, lanceolate with sharp points, all approximately the same size along a row with approximately 130 teeth per row. Type П — teeth long, pointed, peg-like grading in size gradually to a series of large laterals, no one tooth dominant, approxi- mately 50 teeth per row. Type ПІ - teeth long, lanceolate with sharp points, grading gradually to a dominant tooth towards the outer margin, dominant tooth only about 1.5 times the size of adjacent teeth, approximately 50 teeth per row. Type IV - teeth long, lanceolate with sharp points, grading to a dominant tooth at about 8 to 10, dominant tooth over twice the size of adjacent teeth, approximately 32 teeth per row. Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) In radulae types 1Ш and IV the domi- nant tooth of each row may articulate with the same tooth on adjacent rows forming a line of strength down each side of the radular ribbon. The effect of this is to produce a pair of widely spaced “fangs” on every row, similar in appearance and function to the enlarged canine teeth of a mammalian carnivore. This can be called the "sabre-tooth" effect and is clearly an adaptation to the predatory habit. Within this general pattern of a grad- ation of teeth to a major tooth towards the lateral margin, are a number of subsiduary patterns leading progressively towards a reduction in the number and size of both the central and marginal teeth and the dominance of the “fang” tooth. This will be described more fully elsewhere (Smith - in preparation). Table 1 shows that only four of the genera listed appear to show similarities to Austrorhytida. These are Strangesta, Namoitena, Tasmaphena and Rhytida. Strangesta and Матойепа have a larger and more globose shell with much finer scultpure than Austrorhytida. Their radula is of type I with more teeth per row, the difference in tooth size of the larger teeth being much less and the dominant tooth is between tooth 12 and 18. In species of 87 Fig. 1. Dorsal, ventral and apertural views of one of the syntypes of Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832 (ММНР). these genera that have been dissected there is no epiphallus whereas Austrorhytida has a large epiphallus. Tasmaphena has a smaller more flattened shell than Austrorhytida with much coarser and more irregular sculp- ture. Some species show colour banding on the shell, a feature not seen in Austro- rhytida. Tasmaphena has a type Ш radula with much less tooth graduation than seen in Austrorhytida, the radula formula being (18 to 24) - 1 - (18 to 24). Rhytida and Austrorhytida both have type IV radulae with the dominant tooth in Rhytida being at tooth 9 or 10 while in Austrorhytida it is at tooth 8 or 9. The shell form and sculpture differs markedly between the two genera. RAytida has very coarse, irregular sculpture giving the shell a rugose appearance and shells are usually strongly keeled. Austrorhytida has a shell with a rounded outline with no sign of keeling and the sculpture is of fine, regular, 88 transverse striae giving the shell a finely textured appearance. RAytida is without an epiphallus (Climo, 1977) while Austro- rhytida has a prominent epiphallus, Etymology: It is named Austrorhytida because of the similarity of its radula structure to that of the New Zealand Rhytida and because it is the only Australian genus to show this structure. Type Species: Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832. Austrorhytida capillacea Ferussac, 1832 Helix (Helicella) capillacea Ferussac, 1821. Tabl. Syst. Anim. Moll. : 40 (nomen nudum). Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832. Hist. nat. moll. terr. fluv, 27, pl. 82. Nanina fricta Gould, 1852. U.S. Expl. Exped. Bost., 12: 32. Strangesta glaciamens Iredale, 1938. Aust. Zool., 9: 119. Strangesta revera Iredale, 1943. Aust. Zool, 11: 68. Victorian Nat. Description: Shell medium, thin, with few calcareous elements, 4-5 whorls, spire flattened to slightly elevated, convex, rounded with a fairly wide umbilicus (approximately 1/3 shell diameter), aper- ture ovate-lunate. Sculpture of fine, regu- lar, radial striae above and usually smooth below. Colour of the shell light yellow to dark honey, without patterning (Fig. 1). Some morphs have a greenish tinge to the shell. The animal ranges from cream to charcoal grey to greenish grey and often has a mid-dorsal line of a contrasting colour. The head is long and when actively crawling can extend nearly two shell dia- meters out from the shell. The shell is set back over the tail. This elongated head is to accommodate the very large buccal mass and enable the snail to insert the head into the aperture of a prey snail and is an adaptation to the carnivorous habit. The radula consists of lanceolate, re- curved teeth grading rapidly from an al- most vestigial rhachidian to a major tooth at tooth 8, outside of which are about 3 almost vestigial laterals. Tooth 8 is over twice the length of tooth 1 and is very large with articulating surfaces with adjacent rows on the base-plate. Radular formula Fig. 2. Scanning electron microscope picture of the radula of Austrorhytida capillacea from Mt. Donna Buang, Victoria (NMVF5418) (x80). Vol, 104 No. 3 (1987) Fig. 3. Camera lucida drawing of the repro- ductive tract of Austrorhytida capillacea from Chatswood, N.SW. (AM C101000). Abbreviations used are: А — atrium; EP ~ epiphallus; HD – hermaphrodite duct; P – penis; PR — penial retractor; 5 - spermatheca; SD – spermathecal duct; SOD – spermoviduct; У — vagina; VD- vas deferens. 3-8-1-8-3, though there appears to be some local variation (Fig. 2). The reproductive tract is simple without talon or flagellum. The penis has very fine papillae in even rows and there is an epi- phallus about equal in length with the penis and vagina. The vas deferens is very short and the spermathecal duct moder- ately short leading to a simple wide spermatheca (Fig. 3). Types: Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832 - 2 syntypes MNHP (no number). Nanina fricta Gould, 1852 - holotype USNM 5473. Strangesta glaciamens Iredale, 1938 - holotype AM C55535; 2 paratypes AM C118189. Strangesta revera Iredale, 1943 – type lost. (Abbrev. MNHP - Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris; USNM - Unit- ed States National Museum, Washington; AM - Australian Museum, Sydney). 89 Type Locality: Port Jackson, Sydney. Distribution: Occurs from the coast and Great Divide of central New South Wales, along the Divide south through Victoria to about Mt Macedon and may occur in the Otway Ranges. Found in dry and wet forest in litter and under logs, but can be seen crawling on the surface and even on the trees in wet weather. Remarks: This is the type species of the new genus Austrorhytida based on a type locality in the Sydney area. However the distribution given for the species is from central New South Wales to south western Victoria in habitats ranging from coastal dry forest and woodland to wet forest to subalpine snow-gum woodland. A more detailed examination of a large collection of individuals may reveal a number of separate species within this group. A wide variety of different colour and size morphs certainly exist but examination of the shell. anatomy and radulae of these different morphs has so far shown them to all fall within the species limits described above. The species is an active carnivore and has been described killing and devouring a specimen of the native slug Cysropelta petterdi (Smith, 1980). It has also been Observed feeding on the introduced snail Helix aspersa in Sydney gardens (P. Colman - pers. comm.). Acknowledgements I would like to thank the staff of the Department of Malacology, Museum National 90 d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris for loaning the types of Helix capillacea Ferussac, 1832 and Mr, E, Rotherham of R.M.LT. for taking the photo- graphs. Thanks are also due to Mr. Phil Colman of the Australian Museum for access to their collections and information about the species. I am grateful to Mr. Phil Hollis and the Electron Microscope Unit of the Department of Anat- omy, University of Melbourne for use of the Scanning Electron Microscope. This work was supported by the Bureau of Flora and Fauna by funds from the Australian Bioligical Resources Study. REFERENCES Climo, F. M. (1977). A higher classification of New Zealand Rhytididae (Mollusca ; Pul- monata). J. Roy. Soc. N. Z. 7(1):59-65. Iredale, T. (1933). Systematic notes on Aust- ralian land shells. Rec. Aust. Mus. 19:37-59. Iredale, T. (1938). A basic list of the land Mollusca of Australia. Pt. III. Aust. Zool. 9:83-124. Iredale, Т. (1943). Guide to the land shells of New South Wales. Pt. 5 Aust. Nat. 11:61-69. Smith, B. J. (1969). A comparative study of two Australian paryphantid snails, with notes on their taxonomic relationships. Proc. Sympos. on Molluscs. India. Part 1:164:169. Smith, B. J. (1971). Carnivorous snails of the family Paryphantidae. Aust. Nat. Hist, 17(2):55-58. Smith, B. J. (1979). Notes on two species of rhytidid snails from Lizard Island, North Queensland. Rec. Aust. Mus. 32:421-434. Smith, B. J. (1980). Molluscs of Lake Mountain, Victorian Nat. 97(2):76. Smith, B. J. and Kershaw, R. C. (1979). Field guide to the non-marine molluscs of south- eastern Australia. Canberra : ANU Press. 285 pp. Victorian Nat. F.N.CV. Excursion to the Eastern Highlands Harrietville, January 10-16 1987 Twenty seven persons trayelled to the Feather- top Chalet at Harrietville on a sunny day mak- ing a lunch stop at Lake Nhillacootie. Andy Blackburn explained to us in the even- ing how the Eastern Highlands has evolved from the erosion of the level Mesozoie surface of between 40-170 million years ago leaving res- istant granite rock masses and broad flat bottomed river valleys many of which were later filled with lava flows during the tertiary volcanic era, We heard that uplift occurred producing the High Plains which were later warped and dissected by streams leaving lava residuals and plateaus. This region has Victoria's highest mountain (Mt. Bogong, 1983m) and several other mountains greater than 6000ft, including Mt. Hotham at 1832m. On Sunday January 11% it rained as we visit- ed Mt. Hotham and the Bogong Alpine Park. The road side was lined by golden (Oxylobium alpestre), the Prickly Shaggy-Pea and the cliffs covered with derwent Speedwell (Veronica derwentiana). Near the summit we spent time exploring a Herb Field and found mountain Caladenia (С. lyallii with glistening white segments, rosy red outside. Here also were golden flowers of a pros- trate, the Alpine Phebalium (Phebalium squam- ulosum subsp alpinium) and the starry tufts of yellow flowers of the Yellow Kunzea (К. muell- eri) and some low growing bushes with violet flowers (K. parvifolia). There were also small clumps of the pink Alpine Riceflower (Pimelea alpina), carpets of Celmesia sericophylla (many not in flower) and also some large snow daisies (Brachycombe mivalis var. alpina). We saw glacial and purple eyebrights (Euphrasia Glacialis and E. collina), the deep magenta of the Mountain Trigger Plants (Stylidium gram- minifolium), a prostrate grevillea (G. australis) and Hovea in flower on the rocks. We were all amazed at the prolific flowering of the snow gums (Eucalyptus pauciflora). We continued on the Alpine road to Omco where we visited an Historic Park and Museum. In the evening Dr. Roger Briggs and his wife gave us and audio-visual film on Queensland rain- forests, and Andy Blackburn showed slides of alpine flora, photographed on previous visits. The following day, Monday 12 January, and for the remainder of our visit the weather was glorious and sunny. We visited Mount Buffalo Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) Aw Photo: Waddell Daisies (Helichrysum adenoplurum var, wadilellae), und were delighted with the red colour of the candlebarks (Eucalyptus rubida) en route, We tunched in a brand new Information Centre near the Cresta run and were briefed by the Ranger, опе Grant Hull. Then we went back to Dingo Dell where there was a wonderful garden of Trigger plants mixed with lilac Daisy (Brachy- combe mivalis and B. scapigera) and masses of the Waddell everlasting (Helichrysum adeno- phorum var. waddellae) mixed in amongst flowering lance-leaf Orites with carpets of small pinkish-white Baeckia gunniara and В. utilis. On the wet uplands on the other side of the road were Silver Daisies (Сета asterilifolia) and also Candle Heath in flower (Richea conti- nentis) and common yellow Billy Buttons (Cras- pedia glauca) in abundance and three species of buttercup, the Granite (Ranunculus graniti- cola), 2 Gunn's Alpine (R. cunniarus), the Bog (R. pimpinellifolius). With them were the Mountain Hairy Willow Herbs (Epilobium ginnianum and E. cinereum) and two species of native violet (V. betonicifolia and V. heder- 91 aceae), both in flower. In the cutting nearby we found the Royal Grevillea (С. victoriae) and a white Westringia senifolia.There were also clumps of the violet kunzea and some snow aciphylls (A. glacialis). Опа walk around Lake Catani we saw beauti- ful specimens of the Black Anther Flax-lily (Dianella revoluta) and the Waxberry (Gaul- theria appressa). Margaret Dacey found a clump of Skyblue Sky Lilies (Herpolirion novae- zealandiae) on Mt. Hotham. On the following day, Tuesday January 13, we travelled via Mt. Beauty to Falls Creek and the Bogong National Park below Mt. Bogong. We had picnic lunch overlooking the Rocky valley Dam near Alpine mint bushes (Prost- anthera cuneaía) and noted that the predominant roadside feature was the luxuri- ant golden sprays of Hop Bitter Pea (Davisea latifolia). On Wednesday January 14 we had a day at Beechworth with a conducted tour of the town. We visited the Court House where Ned Kelly was tried in 1870 and had lunch in the Town Hall Gardens which had been planted under the direction of Baron von Mueller. In the evening a Mr. Clive O'Donnell, a local wild life photographer, gave a talk about the Mt. Buffalo region. On Thursday, January 15 we had a leisurely day in Wandiligong, an old gold mining town in picturesque Bell's Gully which is only 6km from Bright and has been classified as a special landscape by the National Trust. About 120 people live there now, where formerly there were 4000. One resident with a lovely garden invited us in to see the presently used bower of the Satin Bower-Bird surrounded with his collected blue objects such as drinking straws, plastic pegs etc. The local school, No. 275 is large and has a bell tower and once accommodated over 300 pupils; at present it has 9 pupils. We has lunch on the grassy banks of Morses Creek in the Alpine Park, 92 In the evening we attended a concert given by the C. A.E. Music Camp in the tiny Harriet- ville Community Hall. It was a joyous if some- what noisy occasion and lots of fun. On the river sand of the Ovens Valley where grew the Ovens wattle (Acacia parvissima), Bill Lock, one of the party, had found and guided us to see, some beautiful specimens of Austral ladies Tresses Orchids (Spiranthes sinensis). The daisy bushes, Musk and Snowy, (Olearia argophylla and O. lirata) near our Chalet were worthy of note, also the Christmas Bush (Prosi- anthera lasianthos) was in flower along the Ovens river. Dorothy Dawson and Pat Clancy had totall- ed 70 species of birds seen or heard. Amongst the most interesting were the satin Bower Birds (Bower only), Whip birds, King Parrots, Gang Gang and Red Rumped Parrots and the Rufous Fantail, Noisy Friar Bird, Mistletoe Bird, Ruf- ous Whistler, Yellow faced and white eared honeyeaters seemed to be everywhere, and there were Crested Honeyeaters. Eastern Spinebills, anda Jacky Winter was seen on Buffalo, Preda- tors were conspicuous by their absence, one Nankeen Kestrel only was seen. Pied Curra- wongs provided music all day at the Chalet and near the dining room was a nest of Striated Pardalotes who were feeding young. Black Cormorants were seen at Rockey Valley Dam. On Friday January 16, we travelled home slightly the worse for wear as a virulent viral gastro-enteritis had played havoc amongst our ranks. We had our lunch at Seven Creeks reserve in Euroa and travelled via Merton and Yea to the Maroondah Highway safely back to Melbourne driven in McKenzie’s by Tom. It was a day of 39°C with a strong north wind and devastating bushfires were burning in Heathcote and SW. N.SW. but our route was unaffected. Elizabeth К. Turner. Victorian Nat. FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Reports of Recent Activities General Meeting Monday, 16th March Honorary membership was awarded to Frank and Lucy May for 40 years of continuous membership. Mr. May worked for many years as a forester in the Dandenongs and he and Mrs. May had shared their interest in natural history since they were teenagers and used to cycle around the outskirts of Melbourne together. The Speaker for the evening was Mr. Max Campbell of the Applied Biology Department at RMIT who spoke about “Venomous Animals in Australia?’ Australia has one of the most deadly faunas in the world and has eleven species of snakes more venomous than the cobra. In the early days of European settlement in Australia there were many deaths due to snake bite amongst settlers who did not heed Aboriginal warnings. In India thousands of people still die of snakebite each year, but in Australia today there are few fatalities due to the availability of antivenene and improved first-aid techniques. Venom is a poison injected by one animal into another, either for protection or for food capture. The actions of various types of venom were described by Mr. Campbell; some immobilize muscles and lead to death of the victim due to respiratory failure, whilst others contain digestive enzymes which break down the muscles and other body tissues. In addition allergic reactions by certain individuals to particular venoms lead to many other deaths. Mr. Campbell went through the correct first-aid treatment in case of attack by a venomous animal. In most cases a pressure bandage should be applied tightly to the limb and the limb immobilized (95% of bites are on limbs). The bandage constricts the lymphatic system and will stop the venom spreading for hours. Medical Vol. 104 No. 3 (1987) attention should then be sought and the bandage only removed by the treating doctor, as removal by untrained medical staff before emergency facilities are ready, may undo the first-aid treatment and lead to spread of the venom. As many venoms are heat labile, the area of the bite should be kept warm to help the venom break down. Pressure bandages should not be appplied to Red-back Spider or Stonefish wounds as the venom causes so much pain that it is better to let it diffuse and death is not rapid (9! days in the case of the spider), so there is plenty of time to get medical help. In the case of a Blue-ringed Octopus bite (which causes respiratory failure) mouth-to-mouth resuscitation should be commenced as soon as any numbness or difficulty in breathing is experienced (do not wait until it stops, or blood pressure and heart rate will drop and death will ensue) and this should continue for a couple of hours until the venom wears off. Stings by various types of jelly-fish may be painful but are not usually fatal (although the victim may be at risk of drowning). Vinegar should be poured on the sting to help neutralize the venom. Alcohol should never be applied as it causes further nematocyst discharge and 50 increases the dose of venom. Other potentially dangerous animals include; ticks which should be pulled out gently by the head (the body should not be squeezed or more venom will be injected) and long-legged house centipedes. In Australia the venom of other centipedes, millipedes, scorpions, cone- shells, insects and platypus may cause sickness but are unlikely to cause death except in a particularly sensitive individual. Mr. Campbell recommended that all spiders be treated as potentially dangerous as little is known about the venom of most species. 93 Exhibits — A snake, probably the northern form of the Red- bellied Black Snake from Charters Towers. Dr. Jack Douglas. — Under microscopes; sections cut through Devonian limestone from Inverloch and Waratah Bay showing fossilized coral, Lithothamnion lichenoides var. patena or “Chinese Toenails” a coralline red alga from Inverloch, Myriophyllum integrifolium a very small water milfoil and also old FNCV and Hawthorn Junior photographs from 1946. Mr, Dan McInnes. - Specimens of Coprosma repens and C. robusta wo New Zealand species, naturalized on the Mornington Peninsula. Mr. Tom Sault. Nature Notes - A Golden Orb Weaver spider lives by her front door. Miss Margaret Potter. - Swamp Wallabys and a King Parrot seen at Mullam Mullam Creek at Mitcham. Miss Cecily Falkingham. - A Bird-dropping spider in his Banksia has laid 12 egg sacs over the last 5 months. The female probably stores sperm in her body over this period. Mr. Tom Sault. - About 50 White-throated Needletails seen in Boranic Gardens. Dorothy Naylor. General Meeting Monday, 14th April The Speaker for the evening was Mr. Robin Youl of the Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands, who spoke on “The Government's Role in Tree Growing" with an emphasis on its role in encouraging the planting of trees on private land. Two-thirds of Victoria's land is privately owned and much of this has been cleared for agriculture. In the past the indigenous trees of an area have been largely ignored when trees have been planted for wind- breaks, timber etc, and yet it is the indigenous trees which are usually most suitable for planting as they are already adapted to survive in that environment, usually tolerate fires, fit in with the landscape and provide a habitat for wildlife. The Government is currently encourag- ing landowners to revegetate their land with local indigenous flora and to protect existing stands of native vegetation. Several methods are used to revegetate an area; planting of seedlings grown from locally collected seed, transplanting of seedlings, direct seeding and natural regeneration by fencing off stands of remnant vegetation to exclude herbivores. Seedlings should be transplanted when very young and grass and weeds should be controlled. Direct seeding usually gives the best results and is very cheap. Mr. Youl went on to describe various agroforestry schemes in Victoria and overseas and spoke of the need to educate people about the value of trees. Too much poor quality agricultural land has been, and still is being cleared, and as a result we have large areas of land going to waste due to erosion and rising water-tables and salination. Exhibits - Under microscopes; hydroids from Black Rock and a species of filter feeding gastropod cemented to the base of an alga. Mr. Dan McInnes. - A wasp from a eucalypt gall. Mr. Urwin Bates. - Antimony minerals from the Steele's Creek mine near Yarra Glen. Mr. Andy Blackburn, Nature Notes - Abalone were observed in a rock pool at Black Rock to scuttle away very rapidly when approached by а large starfish. Mr. Dan McInnes, С. М. Ashburner Special Note for Authors Using Wordprocessors Many wordprocessing and microcomputer floppy disks can now be transcribed directly to our printer’s typesetting equipment, saving the effort and cost of rekeying. Authors of papers which have been typed on a wordprocessor should tell the editor (at the time the paper is first submitted), what type of machine and wordprocessing software was used. Note that printed copy must still be submitted. Queries can be directed to Russell Thomson, 17 Powlett St., Heidelberg. 344 5704 (B.H.). 94 Victorian Nat. (Continued from inside front cover) GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Meetings. Day Group - Third Thursday. Thursday, 18th June, Burnley Gardens. Meet at entrance of Gardens at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Joan Miller 836 2681. Thursday, 16th July, The Museum of Chinese - Australian History. Meet at Carlton Gardens, corner of Spring and Victoria Sts. at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Мг, Andy Blackburn 379 8960. Thursday, 20th August. Australian Gallery of Sports. Meet at the Conservatory, Fitzroy Gardens at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Betty Gillespie 578 1879. At the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Botany Group - Second Thursday Thursday, llth June. Members’ Night. Thursday, 9th July. “Botany in the Service of Medicine" Dr. Elizabeth Turner. Thursday 13th August. “Natural History Courses in North-east and South-west England? Miss Mary Doery. Geology Group - First Wednesday Wednesday, 3rd June. “The Ancient Floral History of South-east Australia” Dr. Jack Douglas. Wednesday, Ist July. Some aspeet of Mineralization in Victoria. Dr. МЕН. Ramsay. Wednesday, Sth August. "Minerals – a Practical Approach? Mrs. Gaby Love. Mammal Survey Group - First Tuesday Tuesday, 2nd June. Members’ Night. Tuesday, 7th July. To be announced. Tuesday, 4th August. To be announced. Microscopical Group – Third Wednesday Wednesday, 17th June. “The Diatom Experts? Mr. Bob Graham. Wednesday, 15th July. Display Night of Exceptional Slides from the Group's Slide Collection. Mrs. Barbara Ward. Wednesday, 19th August. "Fungi? Mr. Bob Graham GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Excursions Botany Group Saturday, 27th June. Royal Botanic Gardens. Saturday, 25th July. Boneseeding at Seawinds, Dromana and Winter Orchids. Leader: Mr. Tom Sault. Saturday, 22nd August, Warneet Heathland. Mammal Survey Group. Saturday, 6th - Monday, 8th June. Upper Lerderderg Gorge. Australian Natural History Medallion Council appointed Mrs. Tess Kloot to fill the vacancy left by Cecily Allen’s death, as Secretary to the General Committee of the Australian Natural History Medallion. Unfortunately, ill-health has forced Tess regretfully to resign from the position. Mrs. Shiela Houghton has now been appointed, and any correspondence relating to the Medallion should be addressed to her, c/- E.N.C V. National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 314l. LATE FEE The increasing costs of reminder notices - postage, stationery, and the numbers of late renewers have resulted in the need for a late fee to recoup some of these costs, which are substantial. Therefore, in 1987 a Late Fee of $2.00 shall be imposed on members who do not renew their subscriptions by the end of March, 1987. Council draws members' attention to the following points: Subscriptions cover the calendar year from January to December. Persons joining the Club in the second half of the year may pay a six month or an eighteen month subscription. Anyone paying a full year subscription in the second half of the year will be regarded as having paid for the current year and will receive back issues of that volume of The Victorian Naturalist. Subscriptions do not run from mid year to mid year. Members who fail to renew their subscriptions by 15 May will automatically be removed from the mailing list. * Prompt payment greatly facilitates the Club's operations. M. D. HOWES Hon. Secretary Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: FNCV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1985-1986 President; От JACK DOUGLAS, 42 Sunhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 А.Н.) Vice President: Mr G. LOVE, P.O. Box 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary; C/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Hon, Treasurer: Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Cres., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 A.H.) Subscription-Secretary: Mr М. STANFORD, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Editorial Material: The Editorial Committee, Victorian Naturalist, ЕМСУ, c+ National Herbarium, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra, 3141. Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 A.H.) Excursion Secretary; Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter: Mrs. CHRISTINE ASHBURNER, Lot 1, Union Road, Langwarrin, 3910 (789 8485 A.H.) Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr BOB GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073. Sales Officer (Books): Mrs H. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany; Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Mr D. Е. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 А.Н.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148. (211 4997) Microscopical: Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C V, is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1987 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) 333 y LIO ммм ny Е аа Joint Metropolitan Метбегѕ . . ...... . AT аня Не $27.00 Country/Interstate/Retired Members ete EE LSE үтү рЫ, М ИС $23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members.... . ЖАЛАА x .-.... $2500 Student (full-time) ..... када AI I а опите СТ АРЛ $18.00 Junior (under 18; по Victorian Naturalist) МАСОВНА e RATES. dad Aot tan $5.00 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist... ... “еы у Ме dee yi ВЕ ....%23.00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist + Fase eee ee eee $30.00 ДОУ se sk: sk IINE. У йет, pr гр em LN Au . , $2500 Subscriber Clubs ....... TE G СА S EIS : арза PY ася ..$23,00 Individual Journals ...... AM iri intei dete ..-$350 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after епа of March ае РЕЗЕ nO eh Ae no . $2.00 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY, LTD. 1-13 ABBOTSFORD ST WEST MELBOURNE. 328-4774 T EAA он DP „о si CEU ОР Ying nee MAL it ту NS |. 104, No. 4 July/August 1987 14AUG1987 | плим ОВА ublished by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA $3-50 egistered by Australia Post. Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 ЕМСУ DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Monday, 10th August, 8.00 p.m. Dr. Robin Hirst. “Where on Earth are We?" (Astronomy) Monday, 14th September, 8.00 p.m. Members’ Night Monday, 12th October, 8.00 p.m. Dr. Jim Bowler, “Environmental Changes and Human Occupation - the Last 60,000 Years? New Members Metropolitan: Mr, Max Bartley, 27 Yarra Road, Croydon, 3136. Margaret Panter, РО, Box 166, Clifton Hill, 3068. Miss Heather Rae, 49 Riley Street, Зошћ Oakleigh, 3167. Mr. Graeme Gillespie, 13 Halstead Street, North Caulfield, 3162. Carol and Bob Booth-Mylius, 10 Lloyds Avenue, Carnegie, 3163. Мг». G. Condron, 96 Shannon Street, Box Hill North, 3129, Mr. lain Livingstone. 34 Grattan Street, Montrose, 3765. Country: Mr. Peter Dingle, Rubicon School Camp, Rubicon, 3712. Mr. Thomas R. White, Kardella R.M.B. 2080, Korumburra, 3950. Mr. John М, Goss, 13 Essex Road, Mt. Martha, 3934. Mr. Anthony T. Mitchell, РО. Box 2508, Mildura, 3500. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 6th September. Braeside Metropolitan Park. This is a new Metropolitan Park with a good patch of heathland and wetlands and the public is asked for opinions on the proposed layout for the area - so come along and see it. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 алт, Fare $10.00. Bring a picnic lunch. Sunday, 4th October. Blackwood and The Garden of St. Erth. Leader: Mr. J. Myers. We will visit Long Forest (to look for orchids ete.) then lunch at Blackwood Mineral Springs. If desired bring cordial to flavour the mineral water. After lunch proceed to The Garden of St. Erth where we hope Mr. Tom Garnett will meet us. Coach will leave from Batman Avenue at 9,30 a.m. Fare $12.00. Bring a picnic lunch, Friday, 16th - Sunday 18th October. Waranga Basin, Rushworth. This is the Victorian Field Naturalists’ Clubs Association Spring get-together and most details have appeared in the two previous Naturalists. Cost for the weekend is $90.00 and this should be paid by the 14th September. The coach will leave from Flinders Street by the Gas and Fuel Building on Friday at 9.30 a.m. Bring a pienic lunch. Friday, 23rd - Sunday, 25th October. The King Island ЕМС. is celebrating its 25th anniversary and it is also 100 years since the first F.N.CV. expedition to the Island 50 it has been suggested that some members might like to go over for the weekend. Should any members wish to do this contact Kendall Airlines who run flights to the Island including packages with motel, guest house ог caravan accommodation. Phone Melbourne (03) 670 2677. Friday, 8th - Saturday, 16th January. Tasmania. Details are in the May/June Naturalist and bookings should be made as soon as possible so we can obtain Apex air fares, Should anyone prefer to go on the ferry and join us in Devonport they should arrange this and deduct the Apex fare of $146.00 from their payment. Balance of all payments should reach the Excursion Secretary by Monday, 9th November, GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Meetings. Day Group – Third Thursday Thursday, 20th August. Australian Gallery of Sports. Meet at the Conservatory, Fitzroy Gardens at 11.30 a.m. Leader: Betty Gillespie 578 1879. Thursday, 17th September, Blackburn Lake. Meet at Blackburn Lake at 11.30 a,m. Catch the 10,50 a.m. train at Flinders Street to Blackburn, Leader: Marg Wilson 836 3521. Thursday, 15th October, Banyule Flat Reserve. Meet at Rosanna Station at 11.30 a.m. Catch 10.56 a.m. train from Princes Bridge. Leader: Dan McInnes 211 2427, At the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Botany Group - Second Thursday. Thursday, 13th August. “Natural History Courses in North-east and South-west England” Miss Mary Doery. Thursday, 10th September, “Flowers of the Anglesea Area” Mrs. Шта Dunn. Thursday, 8th October. “Biological Control of Australian Acacias in South Africa? Dr. Tim New. Geology Group - First Wednesday. Wednesday, 5th August. “A Brief Geological History of Australia” Mrs, Gabi Love. Wednesday, 2nd September. “Borate Minerals from Anatolia, Turkey" Mr. Kemal Inan. Wednesday, 7th October. Some aspects of volcanics in Victoria (title to be confirmed). Mr. Е. В. Joyce, Mammal Survey Group - First Tuesday. Tuesday, 4th August. To be announced. Tuesday, Ist September. To be announced. Tuesday, 6th October, To be announced. Tuesday, 27th October. (from November) To be announced. Continued on inside back cover. The Victorian Naturalist Volume 104, Number 4 July / August, 1987 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: К. Thomson. Assistant Editor: V. Spencer Рта Noto e pts t rorem don Pei еа ос 100 Notes on the Biology and Osteology of Amphibolurus diemensis (Gray, 1841), the Mountain Dragon by D. S. Кеп!.................... 101 'Ehe-Identity:/of пе Tuam by E. Е, Gonole:. ОДИ а rater ei 105 A donation of seeds to FNCV Members by Leonard Fell.......... 107 Rare and Endangered Victorian Plants 4. Olearia sp. aff. pannosa by ЛЕ. Wisniewski, М. Н, Scarlett and К. Е Parsons.............. 108 Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria 5 Monotoca glauca (Labill.) Druce (Epacridaceae), an interesting record from southern Victoria by David Albrecht.................... 115 Naturalist Review by J. Н. Willis: “A Field Guide to the Larger Fungi of the Darling Scarp and South West of Western Australia” А И ү бајт уран к аге суу И ҮН ККИ. 121 Naturalist Note: Platypus in Melbourne by I. Faithfull............. 122 ROOT КОДУ AHO Ue тамы ы ллы тыа EU Es PUR YES Ренеа је фу, Proposed MMBW Braeside Park by К. Реагзоп................ SU 123 Natural History Abdio Visual (ENG NW) rues Im 123 RNG Y АЛИМОВ rae [sir eu: PIS ERR teins Ure Aa Pero « 124 New Legislation to Protect Flora and Fauna - But Can it Work? 130 Cover Illustration: The Mountain Dragon (see p. 101) Photo: Deborah S. Kent. President’s Note Sometimes I consider two or three themes before plunging ahead with my President’s Note, but this time I have no doubt about the item I wish to bring to your attention. I am going to record the marvellous effort of Mr. Alex Burns of Burleigh Heads Queensland who has achieved the magnificent total of 70 years FNCV Membership, or rather 71, now that 1987 has half-run its course! What a record! We recognize the support of those who attain 40 years with the Club by granting Honorary Life Membership and I’m pleased to say that we have 50 of these on our books at the present time – but 70 years takes a lot of beating. In fact our records indicate it has been achieved only once before, by Mr. George Coghill (Vict. Nat. Vol 69 July 1952), who incidentally was well known to Alex, and remembered as never appearing at Club Meetings without a buttonhole of Grevillea rosmarinifolia – They had style in those days! Alex is 88 and has been involved in many aspects of natural history. He has a world- wide reputation as an entomologist, and worked in Queensland as well as with the National Museum in Melbourne. He served in WWII and retired to Burleigh Heads where he remains after the death of his wife. He has about 30 publications listed in our Author Index, including a dozen *Nature- Notes from the Gold Coast”. His standing in entomology has been recognized by several awards, and he is listed in numerous directories, e.g. “Who’s who in the Commonwealth”, and “Who’s who of Intellectuals”. He received a Doctorate from the World University in 1986 and is one of 9 Deputy Delegates to that institution in Australia. He is well known in orchid circles, and is related to our last Australian Natural History Medal winner, Graham Pizzey. We are reading a citation at the September General Meeting, and although I don't expect Alex to travel to Melbourne to receive it, I hope that a few of his old friends may attend to aplaud this effort. Jack Douglas 100 Victorian Nat. Notes on the Biology and Osteology of Amphibolurus diemensis (Gray, 1841), the Mountain Dragon By DEBORAH 5. KENT* Amphibolurus diemensis is distinctive amongst Australian dragons in occurring in some of the coolest habitats occupied by any member of the group in Australia. However, despite its proximity to major south-eastern Australian centres of human population, very little is known of its biology. This note reviews certain aspects of this distinctive species’ biology. Taxonomically, | follow Cogger (1986) in using the generic name Amphibolurus for the species. Amphibolurus diemensis is a medium- sized dragon (maximum snout-vent length = 82mm) with females attaining much larger size than males. For example, the largest male in the Australian Museum collection measures 64mm SVL, but 33 females attain or exceed this size, the largest being 82mm SVL. The species is restricted to open habitats in the cooler regions of south-eastern Aust- ralia and is the only dragon occurring in Tasmania. In the northern part of its range it is restricted to higher altitudes but in the south it also occurs at lower elevations (e.g., Flinders Island, Bass Strait) (Rawlinson, 1967). Its occurrence at high altitude has led to its common name, mountain dragon. Previously, Amphibolurus diemensis was thought to extend north only as far as Sydney (Cogger, 1973; Rawlinson, 1974), but two independent records now extend this distribution north to the Tamworth area. The first record, though lacking a voucher specimen was caught at Dungowan dam (31°24'S; 151°21'E) (Tasoulis, 1980), and the second (AM R 107179), collected in 1982, was from the northern end of Werrikimbe National Park (31°08 '5; 152°14'E). * The Australian Museum, 6-8 College Street, Sydney, N.SW, 2000, Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) Specimens from the Australian Museum collection of Amphibolurus diemensis (N = 161) were examined for both repro- ductive and osteological information. All specimens were examined for reproductive information whilea selection of specimens (1/3 museum’s current holdings) represent- ing three different areas within the dragon’s range were examined for osteological in- formation. The three areas are: Sydney region (bounded by Munghorn Gap in the north and Kanangra Walls in the south); Snowy Mountains-Victoria area, and Таз- mania (including one specimen from Flin- ders Island). Osteology Forty-nine specimens of Amphibolurus diemensis were x-rayed for osteological data. Presacral vertebrae number is 22-24 (mode = 23; mean = 22.5; SD = 0.54; М = 48)and shows no sexual dimorphism, Moody (1980) recorded 20-25 presacral vertebrae for the family Agamidae, with the majority of species having 23-24 vertebrae. The Sydney region specimens have a mode of 22and a mean of 22.3 (SD = 0.47; range 22-23; М = 22) and the Tasmanian specimens have a mode of 23 and a mean of22.8(SD = 0.50; range 22-24; М = 19). A Kolmogorov-Smirnov two-sample test (Sokal and Rohlf, 1981) between Sydney and Tasmanian specimens indicated that the two sample populations differed significantly (P < 0.025). The geographically inter- mediate Snowy Mountains-Victorian speci- mens have a mode of 22 and a mean of 22.4 (SD = 0.53; range 22-23; М = 7). No tests were carried out using the Snowy Mount- ains-Victorian specimens as they were rep- resented by too few individuals. 'The number of lumbar vertebrae (1.е., those posterior presacral vertebrae with 101 —— diate = габ sun Figure 1. Amphibolurus diemensis – low light intensity/cool phase (photo A. E. Greer). noticeably smaller ribs) is 5-8 (mode — 7; mean = 6.5; SD = 0.62; М = 48) overall but possibly with some clinal variation: Sydney region specimens have a mode of 7 and a mean of 7.0 (SD = 0.47; range 6-8; М = 23); Tasmanian specimens have а mode of 6 and a mean of 6.1 (SD = 0.40; range 5-7; М = 19) while the Snowy Mountains-Victorian specimens have a mode of 6 and mean of 6.3 (SD = 0.51; range 6-7; М = 6). A two-sample test between Sydney and Tasmanian specimens yielded a similar result as before, i.e., that the two samples were significantly different (Р < 0.001). Postsacral vertebrae number is 40-48 (mode = 40; mean = 43.6; SD = 2.78; N = 20). Moody (1980) recorded 25-63 postsacral vertebrae for the Agamidae, with a bimodal distribution: “one group, about 40 vertebrae” and “a second group between 50 and 60 vertebrae". The postsacral verte- 102 brae number also shows clinal variation: Sydney region specimens have a mode of 47 and a mean of 46.5 (SD = 1.41; range 44-48; М = 8; Snowy Mountains- Victorian specimens a mode of 43 and a mean of 42.2 (SD = 1.17; range 40-43; N — 6), and Tasmanian specimens a mode of 40 and a mean of 41 (SD — 1.67; range 40-44; N — 6). Hence in terms of vertebral number, there is a north to south cline in Amphibolurus diemensis for lengthening of the body and shortening of the tail. The number of phalanges in the front and rear feet (manus and pes, respectively) is 1(1)-2(87). 3(88). 4(87). 4(5)-5(83). 3(87) and 2(86). 3(87). 3(1)-4(91). 5(96). 3(7)-4(87) counting both sides of the specimen. Thus the modal phalangeal formula is 2.3.4.5.3/2.3.4.5.4 which is the primitive agamid phalangeal condition (Moody, 1980). Fourteen cases of digit reduction, each involving only one phalanx, were en- Victorian Nat. Figure 2. Amphibolurus diemensis – high light intensity/warm phase (photo А. Е. Greer). countered; all were in five specimens. Ten of the 14 cases were in three animals from one location (Ouse River, Tasmania). Ten of the 14 cases were also bilaterally sym- metrical (not the same ten). Reduction occurred seven times in the fifth toe of the pes, five times in the fourth toe of the manus, and once each in the first toe of the manus and third toe of the pes. The most common reduction, i.e., in the fifth digit of the pes, is the same reduction that has also occurred in the species Ctenophorus clayi (Greer, in review) and the genera Moloch and Tympanocryptis (sensu Storr, et al., 1983, less аигИа), and the second most common reduction, i.e, the fourth toe of the manus, has occurred in Moloch. The reduction in the first toe of the manus is interesting because reduction in this digit in lizards usually involves both phalanges, not just one (A. Greer pers. comm. ); in Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) Amphibolurus diemensis the one remaining phalanx is differentiated as a claw. Reproduction Amphibolurus diemensis is an oviparous species laying 2-7 eggs per clutch (Hewer and Mollison, 1974; Rawlinson, 1974; James, 1983). James’ (1983) summary of certain reproductive parameters was based on the Australian Museum collection, but since his work, the number of gravid specimens in the collection has doubled. The data below summarize all available specimens in the A.M. collection. Eighteen gravid Amphibolurus diemensis females were examined for reproductive data, 15 by dissection and 3 by observation. A total of 64 eggs was recorded, 33 from the left ovary and 31 from the right. Ovar- ian eggs were found in seven specimens collected in October and November, and 103 oviducal eggs in eight specimens collected from October through to January. The three clutches laid in captivity were from gravid females collected on 3 November 1985 from the Mt. Wilson area, N.SW. The first clutch (6 eggs) was laid 21 November 1985, the second clutch (5 eggs) on 5 December and the third clutch (6 eggs) over а 13 day period (8 December – 4 eggs, 18 December - 1 ере and 20 December – 1 egg). Overall clutch size ranged 2-7 (mode = 5;mean = 4.5; SD = 1.62), and female SVL ranged 50-73mm (mean = 64.2mm; SD = 7.5). There was а positive correlation between clutch size and female SVL (r = 0.71, P < 0.01). The three gravid Amphibolurus diemensis mentioned above were initially placed in a large tank with a light/heat source and already containing several other species of small dragons. All three were dark in colour, tended to avoid the other lizards and were not interested in food. After the first female laid, she lightened appreciably in colour, became more active and began feeding. The animals were offered and fed on arthropods (mealworm larvae and adults, and cockroaches) and plant material (both fruit and vegetables). The second female after laying also lightened noticeably in colour; although not as light as the first female, she could easily be distinguished from the third female that was yet to lay. The second female also began feeding after laying. The third female which laid over a period of nearly two weeks was preserved immediately after laying the final egg, thus no further observ- ations were made. Colour changes similar to those exhibited before and after part- urition were also observed in the species at different temperature/light conditions. For example, a gravid female А. diemensis, chilled in the dark for 26 hrs exhibited dark body coloration (Fig.1), and the same in- dividual warmed for 3/4 hr under a light exhibited light body coloration (Fig. 2). Mouth Colour The mouth colour of Amphibolurus die- 104 mensis may also show clinal variation; the Sydney region specimens have a blue lining to the mouth (Swanson, 1976) with a bright orange coloured tongue (pers. obs.); the Victorian specimens are reported by Beste (1971) as having *a lilac coloured mouth and gums" and the Tasmanian specimens are reported as having “the inside of the mouth a pale flesh colour, the tongue deeper coloured" (flesh colour?) (Hewer, 1948; Hewer and Mollinson, 1974). Acknowledgements I wish to thank A. Greer for his encour- agement, assistance and the use of his photo- graphs in Fig. 1-2. I wish also to thank W. Boles, A. Greer, G. Shea and G. Swan for critically reading the manuscript. REFERENCES Beste, Н. 1971 Reptiles of Victoria — No. 3. Victorian Nat. 88(10);296-297. Cogger, Н. С. 1986 Reptiles and amphibians of Australia. 4th Edition. A. H. Reed and A. W. Reed, Sydney. 688pp. Hewer, A, M. 1948 Tasmanian lizards. Tüsmanian Naturalist (new series) 1(3):8-11. Hewer, A. and B. C. Mollison 1974 Reptiles and amphibians of Tasmania. Tasmanian Yearbook Ма. 8. рр. 51-60. James, C. R. 1983 Reproduction in lizards from the wet- dry tropics of Australia. Unpublished honors thesis, University of Sydney. 87pp. Moody, S. M. 1980 Phylogenetic and historical biogeographical relationships of the genera in the family Agamidae (Reptilia : Lacertilia), Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Michigan., 373pp. Rawlinson, Р. А. 1967 The vertebrate fauna of the Bass Strait Islands. 2. The reptilia of Flinders and King Islands, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 80(2):211-224. Rawlinson, P. A. 1974 Biogeography and ecology of the reptiles of Tasmania and the Bass Strait area. Pp. 291-338, in, W. D. Williams, ed., Biogeography and ecology in Tasmania. Monographie Biologicae 25; Dr. W, Junk, The Hague; 498pp. Sokal, R. В. and Е, J. Rohlf 198] Biometry, 2nd ed. W. H. Freeman and Company, San Francisco. 859рр. Swanson, S. 1976 Lizards of Australia, Angus and Robertson, Sydney. 80pp. Storr, G. M., L. A. Smith, and R. E. Johnstone 1983 Lizards of Western Australia. IL Dragons and Monitors. Western Australian Museum, Perth. 114рр. Tasoulis, T. 1980 Range extension for Amphibolurus diemensis. Herpetofauna 11(2):27. Victorian Nat. The Identity of the Tuan By L. E. CONOLE* Introduction Tuan has long been recognised as a vern- acular name for the Brush-tailed Phas- cogale Phascogale tapoatafa (Mar- supiala:Dasyuridae). Strahan (1980) was unable to choose between the two Abor- iginal names, Tuan from Victoria and Wambenger from Western Australia, and recommended Phascogale as the common name for the genus Phascogale. Mansergh and Hercus (1981) state that Tuan is a widespread name in Victorian Aboriginal languages for P tapoatafa. The name Tuan is widely used in south-eastern Australia by naturalists and professional biologists for P tapoatafa. | will show that in fact Tuan is not P tapoatafa, from references in ethnographic literature, information on the Aboriginal usage of Tuan listed in table 1. From the information in table 1, it appears that in western Victoria Tuan is the Sugar Glider Petaurus breviceps, and in eastern Victoria the Feathertail Glider Acro- bates pygmaeus. 1 am aware of only three references (possibly four) in the Victorian ethnographic literature to Phascogale tapoatafa (see table 2). The Reverend James Clow occupied the Corhanwarrabul run on the Dandenong Creek east of Melbourne in 1838 (Bride 1898). His homestead was called Tirhatuan - meaning “flying squirrel” (Bride 1898). Tirhatuan appears to be either a corruption of Tu-an-tu-an recorded by Smyth (1878), or it may actually mean "place of the flying squirrel". I would normally interpret “flying Table 1. Victorian Aboriginal Usage of Tuan. Species Source Aboriginal Names Iribe Area Duan Wotjobaluk Lake Hindmarsh Doan Wotjobaluk Victorian Mallee Tuan Tjapwurong South-west Victoria Tuugan Gunditjmara South-west Victoria Tuukan Gunditjmara South-west Victoria Tu-an-tu-an Bunurong/Woiworung Melbourne Tuan Krauatungalung Lake Tyers Toan Krauatungalung Lake Tyers Tirhatuan* Woiworung Dandenong Petaurus breviceps Petaurus breviceps Petaurus breviceps Petaurus breviceps Petaurus breviceps Acrobates pygmaeus Acrobates pygmaeus Acrobates pygmaeus Petaurus breviceps/ Smyth 1878 Massola 1968 Dawson 1881 Dawson 1881 Dawson 1881 Smyth 1878 Howitt 1880 Smyth 1878 Bride 1898 Acrobates pygmaeus * probably means place of the Tuan Discussion During interpretation of the identity of the fauna in Dawson (1881) (Conole, in preparation), and compilation of an Abor- iginal faunal vocabulary database for Vic- toria at the Victoria Archaeological Survey, I found that Tuan is not applied to Phascogale tapoatafa. Reading of the Vic- torian ethnographic literature produced the * PO. Box 13], Albert Park 3206. Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) Tribe names after Tindale (1974) squirrel" as Petaurus breviceps, but Smyth (1878) was quite specific in describing the Bunurong and Woiworung Tu-an-tu-an as Acrobates pygmaeus. For this reason, and because Bride (1898) does not have any reputation for zoological competence, I favour A. pygmaeus as the identity of Tirhatuan. Clearly, Tirhatuan is not Phascogale tapoatafa. Mansergh and Hercus (1981) conclude 105 Table 2. Victorian Aboriginal Names for Phascogale tapoatafa Aboriginal Names Tribe Area Source Warnda Krauatungalung/Braiakaulung Lake Tyers Howitt 1880 Knoore kye Jaara Daylesford Smyth 1878 Kutar* not given not given Smyth 1878 Mundarung Ngarigo Cobberas-Monaro Howitt 1904 * also used for Phascogale calura (note similarity to Kultarr for Antechinomys laniger) that Howitt (1880) erred in recording Warnda as the Krauatungalung and Braiakanlung name for Phascogale tapo- atafa as he also recorded it for a large gliding-possum (Yellow-bellied Glider Petaurus australis or Greater Glider Petauroides volans). 1 believe Howitt was wrong in recording the same name for two clearly different animals, but the widespread use of Tuan in Victoria for small gliding-possums indicates that Tuan is not Phascogale tapoatafa. Therefore, the doubt expressed by Mansergh and Hercus (1981) that Tuan was correctly used for Acrobates pygmaeus by Howitt (1880), as opposed to Phascogale tapoatafa as in current English usage, is unfounded. Howitt (1904) refers to a Tuan in his list of Ngarigo totemic animals — but gives little clue to which species he is referring. He does however distinguish it from the Petaurus gliding-possums, leaving the possibility that he is actually referring to Phascogale tapoatafa. This use of Tuan, if for P tapoatafa, is perhaps the earliest literature use of the word for that species — although no origin for its use is given. The Ngarigo call Howitt’s (1904) Tuan the Mundarung. Menkhorst (pers. comm.) provided the following information on early literature references to Phascogale tapoatafa as the Tuan. The possible first use of Tuan in the natural history literature was by Daley (1925) in reference to a “Brush-tailed Rat or Tuan" observed on an excursion to Wilson's Prom- ontory. Fleay (1929) used Tuan in his paper on Phascogale tapoatafa. Jones 1923-5), Troughton (1941) and Brazenor (1950) did not use Tuan. Wakefield (1971) stated “the origin of Tuan is unknown but is preferable to Brush-tailed Phascogale”. Although 106 Wakefield (1971) did not explain why Tuan was preferable one could speculate that its brevity and obvious Aboriginal origin were appealing. Conclusion In light of the information presented above, Tuan is an inappropriate vernacular name for Phascogale tapoatafa. Tuan appears to have been used by Victorian Aborigines for small gliding-possums. The Melbourne tribes of Bunurong and Woi- worung, and the far-east Gippsland Krauat- ungalung and Braiakaulung applied Tuan to the Feathertail Glider Acrobates pygmaeus, The Gunditjmara, Tjapwurong and Wotjobaluk of western Victoria used Tuan for the Sugar Glider Petaurus breviceps. The only references to the Brush- tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa that I have identified are in Howitt (1880) where the Krauatungalung are recorded as using Warnda, in Howitt (1904) where the Ngarigo possibly used Mundarung, and in Smyth (1878) where the Jaara called it Knoore kye. A reference in Smyth (1878) to the use of Kutar for Phascogale tapoatafa and the Red-tailed Phascogale Phascogale calura gives no precise location or tribe - it may be Victorian. Acknowledgements To Peter Menkhorst (Fisheries and Wildlife Service) for his valuable criticisms of an early draft of this paper, and for contributions on the early literature use of Tuan by Victorian naturalists. To David Clark (Victoria Archaeological Sur- vey) for comments on a draft, and information on Tirhatuan. Also to Don Hough (V.A.S.) for applying some clear thinking to a later draft of. this paper. REFERENCES Brazenor, C. W., 1950, The Mammals of Victoria, National Museum, Melboune. Victorian Nat. Bride, T. E, 1898, Letters from Victorian Pioneers, Government Printer, Melbourne. Daley, C., 1925, Excursion to Wilson’s Promontory, Victorian Naturalist 42:258. Dawson, J., 1881, Australian Aborigines, George Robertson, Melbourne. Fleay, D., 1929, The Brush-tailed Phascogale, Victorian Naturalist 46:135-6 Howitt, A. W., 1880, Papers of А. У. Howitt — Gippsland, Notes on the Kurnai Tribe. LaTrobe Library M.S. 9356, Box 1053 4(a). Howitt, A. W., 1904, The native tribes of south-east Australia, Macmillan, London. Jones Е. W., 1923-5, The Матта! of South Australia Parts I-III, Government Printer, Adelaide. Massola, A., 1968, Bunjil's Cave. Myths, Legends and Superstitions of the Aborigines of South-East Australia, Lansdowne, Melbourne. Mansergh, 1. and Hercus, L. A., 1981, An Aboriginal vocabulary of the fauna of Gippsland, Memoirs of the National Museum, Victoria 42107-22, Smyth, R. B., 1878, The Aborigines of Victoria, Part II (Reprinted 1972, John Currey O’Neil, Melbourne). Strahan, R., 1980, Recommended common names of Australian mammals, Australian Mammal Society Vernacular Names Committee. Tindale, N. B., 1974, Aboriginal Tribes of Australia, University of California Press, Berkeley. Troughton, E., 1941, Furred Animals ој Australia, Angus & Robertson, Sydney. Wakefield, N. A., 1971, Naturalist’s Diary, Cheshire, Melbourne. A Donation of Seeds to FNCV Members by Mr. Leonard Fell Over the years when Mr, Leonard Fell has travelled about the Australian countryside he has collected the seeds of native plants and propa- gated them in the harsh conditions of his property at Metung. He has now sent the Club some seeds (see list below), from the abovementioned plants that have been growing on his property for at least ten years, for free distribution to club members interested in growing native plants. Unless indicated, in parenthesis, the seeds are of 1986 vintage. The seeds will be stored, along with spare envelopes, in the Club Library area for members who can attend club meetings. Members who are unable to attend meetings can obtain some seeds if they write to the Secretary, enclosing a stamped, self addressed envelope. M. D. Howes List of Seeds Supplied (all 1986 seeds unless otherwise marked) Acacia beckleri (Flinders Ranges, S.A), (2 packets), . heteroneura . doratoxylon (Snowy, N.SW.)? . cognata (East of Orbost) . dactyoneura . lasciocalyx (W.A.) (3 packets) . obliquinervia (Upper Tambo, Buchan) Callistemon teritifolius (Flinders Ranges, S.A.) (2 packets) Cassia artemistoides (2 packets) С nemophila Eucalyptus tetragona (W.A.) (2 packets) E. caesia (W.A.) (2 packets) Е. redunca (2 packets) (1980) E. nutans (1980) Grevillea banksii (Northern N.SW. and Qld.) Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) & BS od Б С. leucopteris (W.A.) Kunzea baxteri (2 packets) needs moisture to flower well Kennedia macrophylla (W.A.) К. nigricans Syncarpia sp. - а small densely foliaged tree with attractive bark Trachymene coerules (previously caerulea) (Rottnest Island daisy) - blue mauve - a good pot plant, – an annual Banksia speciosa (W.A.) Callitris columellaris A pink flowered shrub from Mt. Sonder, Central Australia, originally confused with H. multilineata Germinates well Melaleuca spp. selection from Cane A tall free-flowering mallee from W.A. (very fine) From list supplied by Margaret Potter 107 Rare and Endangered Victorian Plants 4. Olearia sp. aff. pannosa By JOHN E, WISNIEWSKI* N.H. SCARLETT* AND R.F. PARSONS* Introduction This fourth paper in the series deals with Olearia sp. aff. pannosa, the Velvet Daisy- bush. While the populations dealt with here have previously been treated as Olearia pannosa Hook. (Willis 1972), a relatively common plant in South Australia, they are now believed to be either a separate species, following work by Wheeler (Hj. Eichler personal communication) or to be О pannosa subsp. cardiophylla (F. Muell.) D. Cooke (Cooke 1986 and personal com- munication). Pending completion of the revision by N.S. Lander (PERTH), this report will call them О. sp. aff. pannosa following Victoria: Land Conservation Council (1986). O. pannosa subsp. pannosa does not occur in Victoria, (Cooke personal communication) despite the statement in Cooke (1986). The aim of the present work is to establish the conservation status of this taxon in Victoria by comparing 1979 with 1986-7 assessments of size and condition of all Victorian stands still known. Field work was completed in May 1987. Description О, sp. aff. pannosa is a sprawling shrub to Im high with entire, ovate-oblong leaves about 7cm long and 4cm wide, glabrous above and densely tomentose below. The flowerhead, of white ligulate florets up to 25mm long and yellow disc florets, is large and spectacular (Figs. 1 & 2). The root systems include many tuberous roots up to 30cm long (Fig. 3). Although the species is said to be root-suckering (Cooke 1986), sectioning of some horizon- tal organs up to 0.5m long carrying sucker shoots (Fig. 4) showed them to be stems. These were buried at the junction of the *Botany Department, La Trobe University, Bundoora, Victoria 3083, Australia 108 Fig. 1. Olearia sp. aff. pannosa in flower, Anakie Gorge, 1977. litter layer and mineral soil and carried abundant roots. A proportion of the plants scored later as ‘small’ (Table 3) will certainly be shoots arising from such decumbent stems. However seedlings also occur; their presence occasionally at site D2 was con- firmed by excavation. The one mature plant excavated did not have a rootstock. While it is likely that some plants from near Point Addis resprouted after destruction of aerial parts by the 1983 wildfire, details of such resprouting are not known (M. White personal communica- tion). Distribution At present, the species appears to be re- stricted in Victoria to seven sites in and near the Brisbane Ranges and, disjunct from those, four sites near Point Addis (Fig. 5). Victorian Nat. Fig. 2. Olearia sp. aff. pannosa in flower, Whroo Forest, about 1968. Photograph by В. Fuhrer. ~“ | | Fig. 3. Whole plant of Olearia sp. aff. pannosa showing tuberous roots (expanded cortex). Scale bar divisions are Олт. Photograph by T. Phillips. A further site in Reilly’s Creek Gorge (J.H. Willis unpublished species list for Brisbane Ranges, undated), could not be relocated. Otherwise for Victoria there is only a 1854 collection by Blandowski in MEL from Mt. M'Ivor near Heathcote (the area was search- Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) Fig. 4. Segment of decumbent stem, showing fine roots and new erect shoots adjacent to an older dead shoot. Scale bar divisions are 0.1m. Photograph by T. Phillips. ed unsuccessfully by Willis) and an un- vouchered record ‘Wedderburn’ (Willis 1978) of unknown source (J.H. Willis personal communication). An unsubstan- tiated You Yangs report has not been exhaustively checked. Finally, a stand in 109 Table 1. General characteristics of Olearia sp. aff. pannosa sites in Victoria. Sites A to Р are in and near the Brisbane Ranges; sites G to 1 are near Point Addis. Site Topography Geology Topsoil texture Plant community Land tenure A N-NE Ordovician slate Silty loam Eucalyptus leucoxylon- Road reserve slopes and sandstone Е. macrorhyncha with Acacia pycnantha B Crest of Ditto Sandy loam Е. macrorhyncha- Road reserve SW slope Е. polyanthemos with А. pycnantha and Xanthorrhoea australis сл Crest of Ditto Sandy loam E. macrorhyncha- Private property SE-facing E. goniocalyx with spur A. pycnantha and X. australis C2 NE slope Ditto Loam Е. macrorhyncha- Private property Е. sideroxylon with > Myoporum viscosum 014 SW to SE Ditto Sandy loam E. macrorhyncha- Brisbane Ranges slopes E. goniocalyx with National Park A. pycnantha and X. australis E Е and S Ditto Sandy loam E. macrorhyncha- Private property aspects of Е. goniocalyx with ridges A, pycnantha Е SW facing Ditto Loam E. macrorhyncha- Water frontage cliffs E. polyanthemos with reserve A. pycnantha G Ridgetop Tertiary Sand E. sideroxylon with Council nature sediments X. australis reserve and road reserve H Ridgetop Ditto Sand Е. baxteri - E. obliqua Private property I SE slope Tertiary Ironstone E. sideroxylon- Lorne to sediments gravel Е, viminalis with Queenscliff Coastal A. pycnantha and Reserve and road X. australis reserve ‘Whroo Forest was photographed in about 1968 (Fig. 2) but it has not been possible to relocate this (B. Fuhrer, personal communication). Information from readers would be most welcome. Since the present work finished, 20 to 30 О. sp. aff. pannosa plants were found 8.4km ENE of Whroo. However, the site is on private property recently subdivided into two small allotments (J. Strachan personal communication). It is not the site photographed by Fuhrer (Fig. 2). In South Australia, its range needs further work. There may be as few as ten collections scattered over southern South Australia from Port MacDonnell to as far NW as Encounter Bay and Waitpinga. If 110 Table 2. Characteristics of fruits of Olearia sp. aff. pannosa, n = total no. of fruits examined. No. of fruits (Uo) Unexpanded Partly Site Date n and/or eaten by Filled* empty insects D4 23Fe]987 334 78 19 3 Е 23 Ее 1987 496 33 66 1 Ii 19 Mr 1987 546 29 68 3 12 19 Mr 1987 291 90 4} 3 *Fruits filled with white, apparently live tissue. Cooke’s (1986) treatment is accepted, to this should be added the subsp. cardio- phylla collections from the Mt. Remark- able area. The reservation status of the South Australian stands is unknown. Victorian Nat. Inverleighe Fig. 5. Location of the nine Victorian sites still carrying populations of Olearia sp. aff. pannosa. Hatching shows Brisbane Ranges National Park. Habitat In Victoria, О. sp. aff. pannosa is a species of shallow, rocky soils in woodland and open-forest areas where mean annual rain- fall ranges from 600 to 650mm. It occurs on a range of aspects but not on exposed NW slopes (Table 1). All Brisbane Ranges stands were on Ordovician slates and sand- stones with sandy loam, silty loam or loam topsoils, while all stands near Point Addis were on Tertiary sediments with either sand topsoils over sheet ironstone or topsoils of ironstone gravel, In the Brisbane Ranges stands, Euca- lyptus macrorhyncha is always present (Table Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) Table 3. Number of plants of Olearia sp. aff. pannosa at all known Victorian sites, 1979 and 1986-7. Number of Plants 1979 1986-7 Site Large Small Large Small A 15 76 5 12 В 2 - 1 12 СІ 13 1 - 29 C2 5 5 0 150 DI 29 20 5 0 D2 36 100nds 62 265 D3 44 100nds 40) 32 D4 Undiscovered 8 = E 61 100nds 109 100145 Е 44 11 8 0 G 14 65 51 94 н 4 2 8 15 1 Undiscovered 112 72 Total 267 419 1), but it does not occur in the Point Addis area. Acacia pycnantha and Xanthorrhoea australis often occur with О, sp. aff. pannosa in both areas. Soil fertility probably ranges from moderate in some Brisbane Ranges sites to low near Point Addis. Reproductive Biology The peak flowering period seems to be in about October. Fruits can be found between December and May; in 1987 some were still in the heads on 3 May. A high proportion of such fruits can be empty (Fig. 6) and a further large proportion can be lost to a beetle seed predator. Even given the widely varying level of predation, percen- tages of filled seeds do not exceed 3% (Table 2). The very few filled fruits available were placed on moist seed test circles in petri dishes at 25°C in light. At 15 days, 14 fruits were opened and their seeds removed and replaced in the dishes. Germination of these commenced at 22 days and reached 58 per cent at 42 days. For the similar number of fruits left unopened, germination did not start until 60 days and reached 47 per cent at 84 days. A further germination trial is in progress. Work is badly needed to see if seed viability problems limit regeneration in this species. Field evidence suggests that seed dispersal is limited. H.A. Boardman of She Oaks stat- 11 Fig. б. Ојеапа sp. aff. pannosa fruits collected оп 23 February 1987. Categories of fruits, A: Unexpanded, В: Expanded but with undeveloped or shrivelled seed (opened achene and shrivelled seed shown at right), C: Partly eaten by insects, D: Expanded fruit with developed full seed (opened achene and seed shown at right). Scale bars are 0.01m. Photograph by T. Phillips. Fig. 7. Transverse section of young Olearia sp. aff. pannosa stem showing three distinct growth rings. Outer margin of section just visible in top right hand corner. Section by Mrs. S. Chung, photo by Dr. I.A. Staff (X60). 112 ed that some site A plants present in 1979 had been present since at least 1941, indi- cating a minimum lifespan of 38 yr; the species appears to be a long-lived, slow- growing one. Field data suggest that inten- sive browsing by marsupials, sheep and rabbits can destroy adult plants and prevent seedling regeneration. Stem sections revealed distinct growth rings (Fig. 7). These could facilitate future studies on population age structure. Abundance and threats During monitoring, plants were scored in two size classes (Table 3), those with four shoots or more and having heights greater than 30cm being scored as large. Site A, a road reserve near Maude, has shown a major decline in numbers of both large and small plants, despite absence of Victorian Nat. stock or roadworks. Causes for the decrease are unknown, although rabbit browsing or excess runoff from the bitumen road could be involved. Roadworks remain a serious threat to all plants. At the site B road reserve near Steiglitz, of the two 1979 plants, only one remained while 12 small plants have appeared. Road- works remain a threat to all plants, especial- ly burial by spoil from grading. This is presumably the stand treated as being within Steiglitz Regional Park by Victoria: Land Conservation Council (1986) as the road reserve is unfenced here and contiguous with the Park. Sites C1 and C2 occur on private property near Steiglitz upon which sheep and caitle are grazed. АП larger plants have now dis- appeared (Table 3), though the numbers of small plants have increased markedly. It is possible that the large plants recorded in 1979 have been browsed off, with most small plants being sprouts from either the stem base or roots and few being seedlings. Though site C2 had a stock-proof fence in 1979, by 1986 the fence was no longer stock- proof. Several small plants were present outside the fence, possibly indicating some spread of the species since 1979. Because the growth habit of the species means that it can not grow out of reach of stock, it seems certain that, in the long term, browsing has the potential not опу to elim- inate mature plants but also to prevent seed production and seedling establishment. Species survival at sites like С1 and C2 is totally dependent on the goodwill of land- owners in providing protection from brows- ing. The four Anakie Gorge stands are within Brisbane Ranges National Park. While stand D1 has declined for reasons unknown, D3 has held its own and D2 may be increas- ing. These areas lack obvious threats. Since subdivision for housing in 1980, site E near Demott's Road is now located en- tirely on a single, privately-owned, 10 ha house block. House construction has not yet started and two of the three patches of the plant are on steep, rocky spurs. Effects Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) of changes if and when the whole subdivi- sion is oceupied are unknown. Present threats include rubbish dumping. Neverthe- less, this is one of the few sites showing a big increase in the number of large plants. Site F in the Moorabool Gorge is within a water frontage reserve. The main threat in 1979 seemed to be the chance of spoil from adjacent gravel quarries spilling downslope and burying plants. In 1986, no quarrying was occurring. Small plants, rare in 1979, were absent and numbers of large plants had declined, perhaps reflecting continued browsing pressure from wallabies and rabbits which both seem common, АП plants seen in 1986 were in sites which appeared difficult for browsing mammals to reach. A further Brisbane Ranges stand, of 200-300 plants on private property near Steiglitz (a single crown allotment in the Parish of Durdidwarrah) was found in 1982 (John Miller, personal communication). This was omitted from the present work. At the sites near Point Addis known in 1979, site G shows increases in both large and small plants. Interpretation is difficult because of patchy burning in the 1983 wild- fire and the appearance of small plants both on gravel road verges and on road edges which receive runoff plus the occasional removal of some small plants by road grader (Miss M.D. White, personal communica- tion). Eighty percent of the large plants are within 5m of the road verges. Threats include roadworks and presence of Chry- santhemoides monilifera (boneseed). Phyto- phthora cinnamomi (dieback) appears to be active just to the north but its effect on O. sp. aff. pannosa is unknown. Roadside plants at site 1 were reported to us by Miss M.D. White in 1986; we subsequently found further plants (112 large plants in total) here on public land (Table 1 & 3), with appreci- able numbers more than 10m from the road. Threats include roadworks, erosion of cut- tings and embankments and rubbish dump- ing. Again, boneseed 15 present. Itis a pity that studies on possible seed- ling and rootstock regeneration were not done after the 1983 wildfire at sites Gand I. 113 Site H is private land adjoining site О. Cattle browsing has eliminated much of the shrub layer and the O. sp. aff. pannosa population remains low. In 1986 a further private property stand was found west of site I. The stand contains at least 34 large plants, Both these sites and site E are un- conservable in the long term given present government policies on private land acquisi- tion. Conclusions In comparing the 1979 with the 1986-7 plant numbers (Table 3), small plants have been ignored given that many will be sucker shoots, some probably induced by fire and browsing. The long-term behaviour of the sucker shoots is not understood. In terms of large plants, most of the in- crease in numbers is due to discovery of an additional large stand. Plant numbers at most of the 1979 stands tend to have remain- ed similar (Table 3). This is perhaps not surprising given the apparent long lifespan of individual plants and the fact that few or no changes to management have been made. The discovery of a new reserved site carrying 122 large plants since 1979 is most welcome given the continuing rarity of this species. Regarding the conservation biology of Olearia species, of the nine species assessed for palatability by Cunningham ef al. (1981), three have aromatic leaves and the total range of palatability recorded is from not browsed to ‘sparingly browsed at times’, However, four of these have since been listed as becoming rare because of sheep browsing (Boehm 1983), Also, Olearia microdisca is an endangered species known to be threat- ened by browsing (Davies 1986). In the present case, there is clear field evidence that O. sp. aff. pannosa can be intensively browsed by mammals (H.A. Boardman, personal communication). At least four species of Olearia are known to be colonizers following fire or clearing and two such species are known to be en- dangered (Cunningham ef al. 1981; Davies 1986; Leigh, Boden and Briggs 1984). Although there are indications that О. sp. 114 aff. pannosa is long-lived and with poor seed dispersal, colonizing behaviour may be sug- gested by increasing densities of the species along disturbed road edges near Point Addis. Work is badly needed on the extent to which seedling establishment is disturb- ance-dependent. Although the species is now known from four reserves, known numbers of large plants remain small. Because of this and the uncertainties regarding viable seed produc- tion and need for disturbance, we regard the species as vulnerable Victoria-wide. Annual monitoring of all sites and careful manage- ment of all public land sites is essential. The conservation status of the species Australia- wide will only be known after field checking in South Australia and taxonomic revision. Acknowledgements We thank Н.А. Boardman and Магу D. White for their interest and their invaluable field observations; the work was funded in part by a grant from the National Estate Program of the Australian Department of Home Affairs. Max Bartley provided expert assistance with later phases of the work, REFERENCES Boehm, E.F. (1983). Overstocking in drylands: plant species endangered on the Mount Mary Plains, South Australia. Nature Conservation Society of South Australia Newsletter No. 83: 21-22. Cooke, D.A. (1986). Compositae. pp.1423-1658 In Jessop, J.P. and Toelken, H.R. Flora of South Australia Part Ш 3rd. Ed. South Australian Printing Division, Adelaide, Cunningham, G.M., Mulham, W.E., Milthorpe, P.L. & Leigh, J.H. (1981). Plants of Western New South Wales. New South Wales Government Printing Office, Sydney. Davies, R.J-P, (1986). Threatened Plant Species of the Mount Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island Regions of South Australia, Conservation Council of South Australia, Adelaide. Leigh, J., Boden, К. & Briggs, J, (1984). Extinct and Endangered Plants of Australia. Macmillan, Melbourne. Victoria: Land Conservation Council (1986), Melbourne Area District 1 Review. Proposed Recommenda- tions. Land Conservation Council, Melbourne, Willis, ЈН. (1972). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria Vol П Melbourne University Press, Willis, J.H. (1978). 507 species of indigenous Victorian plants which are variously rare, very localized and/or endangered, with localities as far as known. Forests Commission of Victoria, unpublished manuscript. Victorian Nat. Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria – 5 Monotoca glauca (Labill.) Druce (Epacridaceae), an interesting record from southern Victoria. By DAVID ALBRECHT* Introduction Although approximately twenty per cent of the presently known vascular plants of Tasmania are endemic to the island (Brown etal, 1983) many of the species represented in the Tasmanian flora also occur in Victoria and southern New South Wales. The floris- tic similarities between southern Victoria and Tasmania were recognised by early Australian botanists such as Ferdinand Mueller who in 1853 wrote “That the vege- tation of the southern parts of our province accords greatly with the Tasmanian flora may be demonstrated by the fact that more than half of the enumerated species are known to inhabit Van Diemen’s Land. . 7. The Victorian alpine region, the Grampians, Wilsons Promontory and the Otways in particular share many species with the Tasmanian flora. Of particular biogeo- graphical significance are those species with a very restricted distribution on the Aust- ralian mainland but with a more extensive range in Tasmania. Pimelea drupacea Labill. and Lindsaea trichomanoides Dryander for example occur on the mainland only at Wil- sons Promontory and Cyathodes juniperina (1. В. and С. Forster) Druce and Lepidium desvauxii Thell. occur at Wilsons Prom- ontory and few other sites on the mainland. The only Victorian populations of Pheb- alium squameum (Labill.) Engl. sensu stricto and Correa backhousiana Hook. complex, occur in the Otways; both species have a more extensive distribution in Tasmania. The recent discovery of Calorophus elon- gatus Labill. (Harris, 1984) and Grammitis magellanica Desv. ssp. nothofageti Parris (Barnett and Beattie, 1986) in the Otway * National Herbarium of Victoria, Department. of Conservation, Forests and Lands, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) region further strengthen the view expressed by authors such as Carr (1971) that there are strong phytogeographical links between the Otways and Tasmania. This article reports the occurrence of Monotoca glauca (Labill.) Druce in the Otway and south Gippsland regions of Victoria, a species hitherto believed to be a Tasmanian endemic. The mainland occur- rences provide further evidence for the close relationship between the southern Victorian and Tasmanian floras. The mainland popu- lations of М. glauca are not a recent field discovery, herbarium specimens of this species were collected in Victoria as early as 1874 but have been incorrectly ascribed to M. elliptica. The genus Monotoca and its Victorian representatives Monotoca is a small endemic Australian genus in the family Epacridaceae (tribe Styphelieae). The genus occurs in all states except the Northern Territory and contains 11 currently recognised species (Powell, 1983). Monotoca is derived from Latin, meaning producing offspring but once (Stearn, 1978), which alludes to the usually 1-сеПеа ovary. Other characters that contribute to the distinctiveness of the genus are the glabrous corolla lobes that are not overlapping in bud and the two opposite bracteoles subtending each flower. In addition to M. glauca, there are three other Victorian species, viz M. rotundifolia J. H. Willis, a wiry prostrate or ascending shrub € 30cm high, known in Victoria only from Brumby Point, Nunniong Plateau; M. scoparia (Sm.)R.Br, an erect shrub to approximately 1.2m high, widespread in heathland and forests with healthy under- storeys on poor sandy or skeletal soils and 115 Fig. 1. Monotoca glauca a-d. a. section of flowering shoot xl; b. flower x20; c. leaf undersurface x3; d. inflorescence x5. M. elliptica e. inflorescence x5. 116 Victorian Nat. Fig. 2. А 6m high M. glauca specimen at Waratah Bay, South Gippsland M. elliptica (Sm)R.Br., a shrub or small tree to approximately 6m high occurring in near coastal areas from Wilsons Promontory east to the N.SW. border (all collections from the Otways previously referred to М. elliptica are M. glauca). Table 1 outlines the principal characters distinguishing M. glauca, M. scoparia and M. elliptica. The number of Monotoca species in Victoria remains only tentative as the identity of populations from the Victoria Range in the Grampians and populations from several subalpine localities in eastern Victoria is currently uncertain. Description of Monotoca glauca A densely branched shrub or small tree 2-8m high. Bark ultimately rough and fis- sured, Branchlets brown, covered with short spreading hairs, becoming glabrous with age. Leaves alternate, spreading or reflexed. Petioles 0.5-1.7mm long. Lamina narrowly elliptic to oblanceolate or occasionally obovate, 8-36mm long, 2.1-7mm wide; apex Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) pungent with а 0.2-1.5mm mucro; margins plane or slightly recurved; upper surface green, glabrous; lower surface glaucous with conspicuous venation. Inflorescences axil- lary, each a 2-9- flowered shortly ped- unculate spike or occasionally reduced to single flower. Bracts, bracteoles and sepals ovate-orbicular, obtuse, margins ciliate. Bracts 1 per flower (or sometimes absent when inflorescence reduced to a single flower), 0.4-Imm long, usually persistent on the straight or zig-zag puberulent rhachis, usually absent from the base of the ped- uncle. Bracteoles 2 per flower, 0.5-1mm long, inserted immediately below calyx. Flowers bisexual or unisexual by abortion of pollen or ovules (in such cases the plants dio- ecious). Calyx of 5 imbricate segments 0.7-I.1mm long. Corolla white, rotate, com- posed of a short tube 0.5-0.8mm long. and 5 lobes 0.8-1.5mm long, the corolla tube shorter than or occasionally almost equal to the calyx. Anthers exserted from the corolla tube, 0.5-Imm long. Ovary tapering to a short style, together c.lmm long, glabrous. Nectary a 5-lobed cup, 0.2-0.4mm long. Fruit an ovoid drupe, c.2mm long, maturing to a pale yellowish-brown colour. See Figs 1 and 2. Distribution - past and present Тће formation of Bass Strait in the Oli- gocene or Miocene epochs, 10-38 million years before present, resulted in the initial separation of Tasmania and mainland Aust- ralia which until then had formed one con- tinuous land mass (Gill, 1962; Galloway and Kemp, 1981; Barlow, 1981). Since its form- ation, Bass Strait has been open and closed many times. The history of the later tertiary period is uncertain (Barlow, 1981), however during the Pleistocene epoch alone (2,000,000-10,000 years before present), five major worldwide glacial phases have been recognised (Ericson and Wollin, 1968; Rawlinson, 1974). During these glacial periods vast amounts of water were locked up in expanses of ice and consequently an extensive landbridge between Tasmania and the Australian mainland was formed by the dropin sea level. Exchange of plant species 117 Table 1. Principal characters distinguishing М, glauca, М. elliptica and М. scoparia M. glauca M. elliptica M. scoparia Habit shrub or small tree shrub or small tree shrub 0.2-1.2m high 2-8m high 2-6m high Leaves 8-36mm long, 10-25mm long, 3-7mm 6-15mm long, 2.1-7mm wide wide 1-2.6mm wide Inflorescence a 2-9-flowered axillary a terminal or axillary a 2-4-flowered axillary spike (individual raceme (individual spike (individual flowers sessile or flowers distinctly flowers sessile or almost so) or stalked) or rarely almost so) or reduced occasionally reduced reduced to a single to a single flower to a single flower flower Bracts | 0.4-Imm long, those > пт long, 0.4-0.6mm long, those subtending flowers usually persistent, but often absent from the base of the peduncle sometimes leaf-like and to c. 4mm long, those subtending flowers deciduous; subtending flowers usually persistent, a pair of empty bracts usually present at base overlapping deciduous empty bracts also present at base of peduncle of peduncle Calyx/corolla tube corolla tube < calyx Anthers exserted from corolla tube corolla tube > calyx, or sometimes equal to calyx in female flowers corolla tube » calyx half exserted from corolla tube half exserted from corolla tube Flowering season summer (Dec-March) late winter-spring (July-Oct.) autumn (March-June) between Tasmania and the Australian main- land would have been possible during these glacial periods, however dune formation on the exposed floor of Bass Strait may have restricted migration to those species adapted to this edaphic condition (Galloway and Kemp, 1981). Hope (1978) analysed the pollen-bearing sediments in Cave Bay cave on Hunter Island and presented a recon- struction of the vegetation on the Tas- manian - Australian mainland landbridge during the last pleistocene glaciation. The oldest sediment zone which spans the period 28,000-c. 23,000 years before present contained relatively high frequencies of heath pollen, principally from the genera Monotoca and Sprengelia. This led Hope to suggest that an open shrubland may have prevailed on parts of the landbridge during this period, Although the Monotoca pollen 118 was not identified to specific level it is very probable that M.glauca was involved. If this were the case M.glauca may have had а more or less continuous distribution from Tas- mania to parts of the Australian mainland. During interglacial periods the sea level rose as glacial ice melted and the trans- gressing water drowned the landbridge, iso- lating Tasmania from the Australian main- land. The islands of Bass Strait are con- sidered to be more elevated remnants of the former landbridge that have escaped inun- dation (Jennings, 1971). The sea level reach- ed its present level about 6,000 years ago, but there is some controversy as to whether it has sincethen remained stationary, oscil- lated slightly or whether there has been a small but persistent rise (Marginson and Ladiges, 1982). Despite the periodic opening Victorian Nat. виа | XE uS d 97 0 = ә ә не • 42° • Fig. 3. Distribution of M. glauca based on herbarium specimens lodged at MEL (Victorian localities) and HO (Tasmanian and Bass Strait Island localities, from Brown et al (1983). of Bass Strait during interglacial periods, it has been the rule rather than the exception for Australia and Tasmania to form one land mass during the last few million years (Galloway and Kemp, 1981). The present known distribution of M. glauca is shown in Fig. 3. In Victoria M. glauca occurs at Sealer's Cove on Wilsons Promontory, Waratah Bay and several local- ities in the Otways. It is relatively widespread in Tasmania (see Brown et al (1983) for add- itional unvouchered Tasmania records) and also occurs on some Bass Strait islands such as Flinders, King and Kent group islands. The present pattern of distribution suggests that the current populations are remnants of a formerly more extensive distribution. Marginson and Ladiges (1982) and Wilt- shire and Reid (1987) have recently investi- gated the pattern of variation within Eucal- yptus species that have an Australian main- land-Iasmanian distribution. Wiltshire and Reid (1987) found that although consider- able genetic variation exists between main- land and Tasmanian Е. perriniana Е. Muell. ex Rodway there is no question of altering the taxonomic status of the species. Mar- ginson and Ladiges (1982) on the other hand found major differences in seedling Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) morphology between mainland and Tas- manian-Bass Strait populations of E. nitida J. D. Hook. The mainland taxon was sub- sequently described as a new species, E willisii Ladiges, Humphries and Brooker (1983). Although detailed study of the geo- graphical variation within M. glauca is beyond the scope of this article, such a study would doubtlessly provide fascinating insights into the pattern of variation between mainland and Tasmanian-Bass Strait populations isolated at least since the last pleistocene glaciation. Habitat In Tasmania M. glauca grows in, от on the edge of open forest on relatively infertile soils derived from sedimentary parent mat- erial (J. Kirkpatrick pers. comm.). The known Victorian populations occur in similar habitat. At Waratah Bay M. glauca isarelativley common species in Eucalyptus obliqua – E. radiata open forest. The soil at this site is a relatively infertile sandy loam and the understorey varies from sclero- phyllous to fern dominated. M. glauca attains tree proportions (to c.7m high) in moister sheltered positions. In the Otways, M. glauca grows on tertiary sands in vege- tation ranging from tall open forest domin- ated by E. obliqua, E. regnans and *Otways messmate' to heathy woodlands dominated by E. baxteri (G. Carr and S. Harris pers. comm.). Beauglehole et al (1977) also record M. glauca (listed as М. elliptica) from Leptospermum juniperinum — Melaleuca squarrosa closed scrub in the Otways. Acknowledgements I am most grateful to Mr. G. Carr, Mrs. M. Corrick, Dr. P. Gullan, Dr. J. Kirkpatrick and Mrs. S. Harris for providing information on the habitat and distribution of Monotoca species in Victoria and Tasmania; to Mr. R. Barley for preparing the illustrations in Fig. 1. and Dr. R. Spencer for assistance with word processing; and to Mr. S. Forbes and Dr. J. Ross for valuable comments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Barlow, B. А, (1981). The Australian flora : Its origin and evolution in Flora of Australia Vol. 1, Australian 119 Government Publishing Service, Canberra. рр, 25-75 Barnett, P. and Beattie, S. (1986). Finger fern Grammitis magellanica ssp. nothofageti Parris (Grammiti- daceae) - A new record for the Australian mainland. Victorian Nat. 103:7-8. Beauglehole, A. C., Carr, С. W. and Parsons, К. F. (1977). A floristic check-list of the Otway region, Victoria. Proc, R. Soc. Vict. 89:99-121. Brown, M. J., Kirkpatrick, J. В. and Moscal, А. (1983) An atlas of Tasmania's endemic flora. Tasmanian Conservation Trust. Carr, G. W. (1971). Vegetation of the Parker River, Cape Otway region, part 2. Geelong Nat. 7:99-106 Ericson, D. B. and Wollin, G. (1968). Pleistocene climates and chronology in deep-sea sediments. Science, М.Ү, 162:1227-1234. Galloway, В. W. and Kemp, Е. M. (1981), Late cainozoic environments in Australian in A. Keast (ed.) Eco- logical biogeography of Australia, W. Junk, the Hague. pp. 51-80. Gill, E. D. (1962). Canozoic, in A. Spry and M. К. Banks, The geology of Tasmania. J. Geol. Soc. Austral. 9:215-234. Harris, S. G. (1984). Calorophus elongatus Labill. (Restionaceae) - a new record for the Australian mainland. Victorian Nat. 101:163-165, Hope, С. S. (1978). The late pleistocene and holocene vegetational history of the Hunter Island, north- western Tasmania. Aust. J. Bot. 26:493-514, Jennings, J. N. (1971). Sea level changes and land links in D. J. Mulvaney and J. Golson (ed.) Aboriginal man and environment in Australia, A.N.U. Press, Canberra. pp. 1-13. Ladiges, P. Y., Humphries, С. J. and Brooker, M. I. Н. (1983). Cladistic relationships and biogeographic patterns in the peppermint group of Eucalyptus (informal subseries Атугааттае, subgenus Monocalyptus) and the description of a new species, E. willisii. Aust. Л Bot, 31:565-584 Marginson, J. C. and Ladiges, P. Y. (1982). Morphologi- cal and geographical disjunctions in forms of Eucalyptus nitida Hook.f. (Myrtaceae): with special reference to the evolutionary significance of Bass Strait, southeastern Australia. Proc, К. Soc. Vict. 94 (3):155-167. Mueller, Е. (1853). First general report of the government botanist on the vegetation of the colony. John Ferres, Government Printer, Melbourne. Powell, J. M. (1983). Epacridaceae in B. D. Morley and H. R. Toelken (ed.) Flowering plants in Australia, Rigby Publishers, Adelaide. pp. 111-114. Rawlinson, P. A. (1974). Biogeography and ecology of the reptiles of Tasmania and the Bass Strait area in W. D. Williams (ed.) Biogeography and ecology in Tasmania, W. Junk, the Hague, pp. 291-338. Stearn, W. T. (1973). Botanical latin. 2nd Ed. David and Charles Publishers, Devon. Wiltshire, В. 1. E. and Reid, J. B. (1987). Genetic variation in spinning gum, Eucalyptus perriniana F. Muell. ex Rodway. Aust. J. Bot. 35:33-47. Naturalists Review Bv J. H. WILLIS ‘A Field Guide to the Larger Fungi of the Darling Scarp and South West of Western Australia' Bv KEVIN GRIFFITHS Private publication (1986). 21 x 15 cm. 80 pp. colour reproductions of 113 species. The fungal flora of Australia is so vast, and as yet 50 poorly documented, that any serious attempt to render it identifiable must be praise- worthy. Monographs are certainly needed on each of the multitudinous genera of agarics, puffballs, pore-fungi, coral-fungi, cup-fungi etc.; but, befor this is feasible (doubtless many years hence), there is a place for regional accounts of the better known species. Apart from J, B. Cleland's two volumes on the larger fungi of South Australia (1934), much of his nomenclature now superseded, only two States (Victoria and Queensland) would seem to have produced anything in the nature of descriptive manuals for the fungi of their particular regions. 120 Thus, the first-ever illustrated guide to larger fungi in Western Australia is especially welcome. This slender handbook evolved from the delight and fascination evoked in its author, an amateur, by appearances of local fungi at Parkerville, W.A. Kevin Griffiths painted water-colours of more than 150 species, and then had them identified by Mr. Roger N. Hilton (University of Western Australia). With microscope facilities and further critical study of fungal affinities, he decided to share his knowledge (and enthusiasm) in book form, hoping that others might be inspired to enter this exciting if very neglected field of research. Text and colour reproductions are attractively Victorian Nat. arranged on strong glossy paper, the descriptions being simple but interestingly presented, Of the 113 species depicted, at least 91 (81%) are known to occur also in Victoria, so the Griffiths Guide would be quite useful to fungus hunters in our south-eastern State, The area covered — “Darling Scarp and South West" — is about 90,000 sq. km., less than half that of Victoria which is much richer mycologically. A novel approach to arrangement of the vari- ous genera, and their species, is to emphasize the fungal families as a basis of classification throughout this guide-book; familial features had been largely ignored by former mycological writers, at least in Australia. There are 16 families to accommodate the 48 genera treated — an average of only 3 genera per family. A budding excursionist might well be daunted by the prospect of carrying around a powerful microscope, instead of simple hand lens, in order to tell whether a toadstool with white gills and ringed stem fitted into the Amanitaceae (gill trama "divergent") rather than the lepiotaceae (gill trama "jnverse"), or whether one having rusty-brown gills and spores belonged to Bolbitiaceae (apical pore on (ће spore) instead of to Cortinariaceae (no apical pore). Incidentally, Roy Watling [ Vic. Nat. 102 : 119 (July/Aug, 1985)] had assigned Descolea to the Cortinariaceae, yet Griffiths (p. 37) now places it in Strophariaceae (with apical pore) - both can't be right! The double-page colour key to genera (pp. 72 and 73) is good, though sometimes misleading; for instance, the "large volva" ascribed to members of Agaricus is seldom apparent, One may be pardoned for querying the accuracy of some identifications, e.g. p.24 Lacrymaria asperospora (Coprinaceae) — where are the coarse, shaggy brown fibrils so characteristic of the caps in this species? p.48 Polyporus pelliculosus (Polyporaceae) – this "tough woody type of fungus" appears quite unlike true 7yromyces pelliculosus which is soft, spongy and with very shaggy pellicle. p.55 Clathrus pusillus (Clathraceae) — it looks much more like Anthurus rothae as depict- ed in Cleland’s Toadstools and Mushrooms etc. of South Aust. 2:t.10, fig. top right; the reviewer has found genuine C: pusillus in the Wongan Hills (Sept. 1963), with all the features ascribed to this species by Cleland (pp. 280-81). In Roger Hilton’s Foreword (p. 3) it is stated that “Those [water-colours] of Willis (1965) and Cleland (1934) suffer from outdated printing methods and bear little resemblance to nature" If that be so, and I doubt it, then the updated printing methods of the present Field Guide have not achieved any better resusts with Hypholoma Jasciculare ("Sulphur Той” — p. 37) which is hardly recognizable as the same toadstool (yellow top and lime-green gills) that abounds in Victoria; also, the Griffiths portrayals of Ramaria fumigata (p. 44), Phellinus rimosus (p. 49) and Tremella mesenterica (p. 52) have such a bleached-out appearance that they are not at all representative of the same colourful species with which Victorians are familiar. Compare Cortinarius subarcheri (p. 25) with the same but brilliantly purple fungus depicted in our Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms t. 1 fig. 5 (ed. 4, 1965). Despite the above criticisms of some illus- trations, Kevin Griffiths must be warmly con- gratulated for breaking new ground and, together with his accomplished printer, producing such an excellent, reliable and useful book, The whole slim volume is so pleasant and profitable to peruse that one has no hesitation in recommending it to the field naturalist, botanical student, and more seasoned mycologist. No price is indicated, but a figure between $12 and $16 would be realistic; may good sales fully justify all the work expended, Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) 121 Naturalist Note Platypus in Melbourne By IAN FAITHFULL* On 29th January 1985 at 8.05 p.m. I saw a platypus in the Yarra River at a bend 330m north of the Johnston Street road bridge in Kew. It swam upstream close to the northern bank, alternately diving and on the surface: 7 s under, 3 $ on the surface, 7 under, 3 up, 5 under, 5 up; and then disappeared. I have returned on numerous occasions to this place but have not seen a platypus again. Since the sighting was unusual I sought out other observations. Mr. Domenic Quar- esima provided some confirmation with his report of the animal some time in October or November 1984 near the Walmer Street footbridge, a point further downstream and below Dights Falls. The river had been running high and about a week after the downpours a single platypus was watched as it frolicked near a rocky bank in the early morning. It swam off upstream after being watched for several minutes. Mr. Will Ashburner has related some Observations by his father at Burnley Gardens in the 1950s. Mr. Ashburner senior reported that the species was common at this place, which is further downstream again, at this time, the river being fringed by willow trees which are now absent. Peter Menkhorst of the Arthur Rylah Institute «Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands) has kindly provided further information (Pers. Comm., Nov. 1985). He notes that there are numerous early records for the Yarra and its lower tributaries including the Plenty River, Gardiners, Darebin, Merri and Koonung Creeks, but that the platypus seems to have disappeared from all but the Yarra and Plenty by the early 1960s. It persisted in the Plenty at Yallambie (Macleod) until March 1983 when Mr. Ian Temby made the last of his long series of sightings there. The records for the metropolitan section of the Yarra since the mid 1970s are given as follows by Mr. Menkhorst (records up until November 1985); April 1976. One observed by Mr. Howard Jarman at Bulleen, 3km ENE of the Bank- sia Street Bridge. 14th August 1976. One observed in the same area by Mr. Menkhorst. IOth July 1976. One found dead at Fairfield Park (Fisheries and Wildlife registration number 10 846). Further records are desirable. Naturalists should search their favourite section of river during the evening and early morning or at night and report sightings to the Mammal Survey Group. I am grateful to Mr. Peter Menkhorst for his help. 100 Years Ago PLATYPUSIN THE YARRA. — Two old pupils of mine, Messrs. Grove and Nye, while boating recently on the Yarra, just above the Johnston Street Bridge, observed a platypus swimming about. They gave chase, and succeeded in effecting a capture, and kindly brought me the specimen alive. It was a young male, about fifteen inches in length. 1 fed him, and placed him in a warm nest, after watching him swim and dive a while. But he seemed to have been injured by the oar during capture, and he died twenty-four hours after I received him. It is, I think, some time since one of these amimals has been met with so near Melbourne. — A. H. S. Lucas. Victorian Nat. V3 March 1887 p.153. А. H. S. Lucas was editor of the Victorian Nat. (1884-92) and President of the F.N.C.V. from 1887-89, 122 Victorian Nat. Proposed MMBW Braeside Park By RON PEARSON* Following the closure in 1980 of the Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works sewage treatment farm at Braeside, 25km South-East of Melbourne, the Board decided to convert the area into one of their series of Metropolitan Parks. The land has an area of 295ha, being approximately half of that bounded by Lower Dandenong Road, Springvale Road, Governor Road and Boundary Road. Prior to its acquisition by the Board of Works in 1928, the land was used as a grazing property by a number of users, Arising largely from interest shown by a number of individuals and groups concerned with the flora and fauna of the area the Board decided to investigate the possibility of converting it to a park which placed special emphasis on the natural features of the area. То assist in the planning of the park an Advisory Committee was appointed comprising Board Officers, members of five local Councils and four local interest representatives. Now that the Committee has been sitting regularly for 18 months, and after consultation with the general public a plan has been prepared for the development of the park. It will be developed progressively over the next 5 years aiming towards the concepts in the prepared plan: (a) to upgrade the existing heathlands and woodlands by allowing the natural regeneration of certain areas, and where plausible in other areas, by revegetation utilising plants raised from seeds collected locally. Revegetation will be designed to conform to the natural species composition. The heathland area, because of its ecologically sensitive nature will be fenced and entry will be by a permit system. A heathlands education centre will be erected adjacent to the entry to the heathland area. This total area comprises about 30% of the park. (b) the wetlands which initially were the northernmost arm of the former Carrum Swamp were used as part of the system for sewage disposal during the period the MMBW used the park as a sewage treatment farm. Over the years this area has become a favorite haunt for many species of birds. It is planned to extend the wetlands, encourage growth in and around its boundaries and provide observation points and low key bird hides. This area comprises about 20% of the total area, (c) in the centre of the park, an area of about 25% of the park, mainly grazed woodland will be fenced to provide a marsupial grazing area, (d) the remaining 25% of the park, largely adjacent to main roads, will be used for picnic areas, car parking, park maintenance facilities and buffer plantings of indigenous trees and shrubs. Surveys have been conducted which record over 330 vascular plant species in the park, of these about 200 are native. Among the native plant species a number are considered to be rare in the Melbourne area: Eucalyptus pauciflora, Diuris punxtata, Monotoca scoparia, Ricinocarpus pinifolius, Acacia ulicifolia var. brownei, Trachymene anisocarpa and a naturally occurring hybrid of Leptospermum т wrsinoides and Г. laevigatum. About 100 bird species have been recorded in the area, as well as 9 mammals, 8 reptiles and 5 amphibians. * Mr. Ron Pearson has recently been appointed a member of the FNCV Council and is a member of the Braeside Park Advisory Committee. Natural History Audio — Visual Presentation Council has decided to sponsor an audio-visual type presentation of the plants, animals and birds of a section of Australia, or preferably Victoria. It has been suggested that the ‘audio-visual’ could illustrate the flora and fauna to be seen along the path of an early Australian explorer at the time of the expedition, or some acceptable alternative proposal. It is envisaged that the presentation would be used by a variety of organisations such as schools, senior citizens clubs, garden clubs and historical and natural history societies. It would allow an ‘expert type’ presentation by anyone who could handle the equipment. Members who have some expertise in these fields and who would like to participate in bringing this project to fruition are asked in the first instance to contact Ron Pearson (Hon. Secretary) by telephone on 584 7443. Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) 123 Mammal Survey Group Annual Report 1986-1987 Introduction This report reviews the activities of the Mammal Survey Group during the year covered by trapping permit 86-41 issued by the Department of Fisheries and Wildlife. A summary of the groups trapping activities and successes is presented and a list of currently scheduled activities for the coming year is provided. Administration The following are members of the outgoing committee: Chairperson Bill Farrugia Honorary Secretary Julian Grusovin Treasurer Ray Gibson Records Offficer Peter Myroniuk Members Without Portfolio Mibel Aguilar Tom Sault Malcolm Turner At the time this report was written a new committee had not yet been elected Newsletter A group newsletter is produced monthly prior to the regular meeting. The newsletter is freely available but there is a charge of $4.50 to cover postage costs. The newsletter is currently received by about forty club members. The newsletter includes information about forthcoming meetings and camps and provides reports on previous meetings and camps. General news items and matters of concern are also communicated. Policy Directions 1. The group has adopted a policy of actively pursuing prospective members. This policy will be expedited by publicising the work of the group through articles in natural history and conservation magazines and publications; providing publicity at venues likely to be frequented by nature lovers and interested parties; and attempting to involve other natural history groups in field survey work. Any successes in this area will be of benefit to the Club as a whole. Survey trips are to be planned with at least one of the following criteria in mind: — The area has sensitive conservation values and/or natural history interest — The area is abundant in wildlife and is useful for training new members and in maintaining animal handling and identification expertise. - Baseline data exists from previous surveys and fresh data could yield interesting results - An area may be surveyed by request if it looks promising. ~ Monthly Meetings The group meets on the first Tuesday of the month at 8.00p.m. in the Herbarium. Eleven such meetings are held each year, with the exception of January which is our normal Christmas recess. The meetings are open to all members, their guests and visitors, Average attendance at meetings during the year has been 16 members and 3 visitors. Guest speakers provided us with a varied and informative set of presentations throughout the year. Our program was as follows: 4th March 1986 Steven Craig The Yellow-bellied glider 25th March Grant Norbury Nutritional aspects of the Western Grey Kangaroo 6th May Peter Mitchell Social Behaviour of Koalas 3rd June Martin Schultz Seals of Victoria Ist July Peter Durkin Conservation values of East Gippsland Sth August Amanda Embury Primates at the Melbourne Zoo 2nd September Members Night 7th October Graham Coulson Radio Tracking Western Grey Kangaroos 28th October Discussion on Big Desert Wilderness Trapping Work 2nd December Members Night/End of year party 424 Victorian Nat. 3rd Feb. 1987 Simon Ward Pygmy Possums of Victoria 3rd March Laurie Conole — Sub-fossil remains in the Brisbane Ranges 7th April Andrew Bennett Fauna of the North-West Study Area Field Work Eight field trips were conducted during the period that F&WD Trapping Permit No. 86-41 was in force. These are listed together with trapping and other survey results elsewhere in this report. Surveys to be conducted under the 1987/88 permit are as follows: March Strathbogies April East Gippsland June Upper Lerderderg August Snow trapping at Lake Mountain September Mt. Strickland November Sunday Island Further surveys may be initiated from time to time as opportunity arises or as a need is perceived. Big Desert Gram- Rush- | Currawong Big Desert Wilderness pians worth | Bushpark Wilderness Locality Lat. ass 36?37'S | 37°46'S 35?45'S Lon. 141509 Е 145 °%04 Е | 145°12'E 141°22'E Date 31.3.86 1.4.86 17.8.86 | 19.10.86 | 3.11.86 | 4.11.86 zl Species: 0 0 Cercartetus concinnus 1 Rattus rattus 2 C. lepidus 1 4 Pseudomys apodemoides T 1 1 E Frosty Hollow Big Desert MMBW Farm East Gippsland Wilderness Werribee Locality 37185 148°S8'E 35975 141°20'E | 37°59'S МАЗЗЕЈ Date 28.12 | 29.12 | 30.12 | 31.12 | 1.1.87 |25.1.87 | 26.1 15.2.87 Species Rattus fuscipes 3 6 3 8 9 Antechinus stuartit 1 2 2 1 А. swainsoni 1 1 1 Eptesicus sagittula 1 E. regulus 5 Chalinolobus morio 1 Nyctophilus gouldi 1 P. apodemoides 1 2 Mus musculus 4 К. rattus 5 | Н \уйготув chrysogaster 3 Vol. 104 Мо. 4 (1987) 125 Big Desert Wilderness March 1986 Grampians June 1986 Rushworth August 1986 Currawong Bushpark October 1986 Big Desert Wilderness November 1986 Errinundra Plateau Christmas 1986 Big Desert Wilderness January 1987 MMBW Farm Werribee February 1987 Spotlighting and Sighting Data Macropus fuliginosus, Vulpes vulpes, Lepus capensis, Oryctolagus cuniculus, Morethia boulengeri, Bearded Gecko, Painted Dragon Petrogale penicillata scats, predator scats Macropus giganteus, Trichosurus vulpechula, gecko Pseudocheirus peregrinus, Petaurus breviceps (heard) Petaurus breviceps Pseudocheirus peregrinus Tawny frogmouth Ctenotus robustus, C. schomburgkii, Jacky lizard, Stumpy tail lizards, Mallee Dragons Petauroides volans, Trichosurus caninus, Vombatus ursinus, Tachyglossus aculeatus, Petaurus breviceps, Felix catus, Vulpes vulpes, copperhead snakes, various skinks Jacky Lizards Blind Snake sp, Oryctolagus cuniculus, lepus capensis, Mustela putorius, White-lipped snake, Tiger snake This is not an exhaustive list as not all field observations have as yet been consolidated. Botany Group Annual Report 1986 President: Miss Margaret Potter Minute Secretary; Mr. Arthur Thies Programme Committee: Miss Marie Allender, Mr, Peter Carwardino, Mrs. Helen Stanford, Mrs. Hilary Weatherhead. The Botany Group meetings have again been well supported, the usual attendance being approximately 30. One meeting, that at which Dr. Jim Willis spoke on his trip to China, proved so popular that we were pleased to welcome a very large number of visitors, the hall being filled to capacity. The programme and speakers for 1986 were: Feb. “Australia Spring in Summer” Mar. “Fraser Island” Apr. “Crete: a Flora in Isolation” May “Daisies” June Members’ Night July Aug. “Endangered Plants” Sept. “Sandringham Flora Revisited” Oct. diversity” Nov. “A Botanist Visits China” Dec. “Wildflowers of the Nepean State Park Walking Tracks” “Prostanthera and its Allies: a discussion of problems and - Miss Mary Doery - Mr. Andy Blackburn - Mrs. Hilary Weatherhead - Mrs. Judy Barker - Mrs. Ilma Dunn and Mrs. Stefanie Rennick - Mr. David Cheal - Ms. Daintry Fletcher - Mr. Barry Conn - Dr. Jim Willis Annual Meeting and Members’ Night. In addition, excursions were conducted on the fourth Saturday of each month from February to November. Numbers participating in these were disappointing. Venues and leaders were: Point Lonsdale - Seaweeds (Mrs. D. Sincora); Kinglake National Park (Mr. A. Thies); Nepean State Park (Mrs. S. Rennick); Fungi at Fernshaw (Mr. T. May); Organ Pipes and Brimbank Park (Mr. А. Blackburn); Studley Park, Kew (Mr. R. Robinson and Mr. J. Yugovic); Warrandyte - Acacia (Mr. I. Morrison); Sandringham - Bay Road Reserve and Beaumaris HS. Heathland (Ms. D. Fletcher); Courtney's Road, South Belgrave (Mrs. Н, Weatherhead); Lake Mountain (Mrs. I. Dunn). 126 Victorian Nat. The visit to the Nepean State Park resulted in a group returning later in the year to pull boneseed at “Sea Winds”. It was an eye-opener to see so many native species struggling to survive under the boneseed and hence the possibility for regeneration of the native flora once the boneseed is eradicated. This could become an on-going project to which, hopefully the Botany Group will commit itself. Once again we are indebted to all those from outside the Club especially, as well as to those within the Club, who have given of their time and knowledge and so contributed to another successful year. Margaret Potter (President) Day Group Annual Report 1986 Chairman; Mr. Ian Gillespie Vice Chairman: Mrs. Joan Miller Secretary: Mr, Dan McInnes Once more excursions suitable for public transport were arranged for the year 1986. Interesting visits were made to the places listed below and a member of the group acted as leader and supplied historical and background information for each excursion. Month Excursion Leader Feb. Red Bluff and Half Moon Bay Margaret Wilson Mar. Puffing Billy Trip to Lakeside Ian Gillespie April “The Seeing Eye Dog School" Malvern Joan Miller May Brimbank Park M.M.BM. Keilor Andy Blackburn June Fawkner Park and The Jewish Museum Dan McInnes July Ringeraft Diamond Salon Dan McInnes Aug. Mounted Police Depot St. Kilda Road Betty Gillespie Sept. Warrandyte Joan Miller Oct. Zoological Gardens Ian Gillespie Nov. Kananook Creek Seaford Margaret Wilson The average attendance was the same as last year 14 with a top of 20 at Red Bluff and Half Moon Bay. D. E. McInnes (Secretary) е Microscopical Group Annual Report 1986-87 The Group was under the Chairmanship of Mr. Urwin Bates. The group’s membership and attendances remained constant throughout the year. Miss Phyliss Johnston donated books and microscopical equipment, including slides prepared by the late Dr. Wishart, with a request that they be included with the slides in the Wishart Collection held by the Microscopical Group; this request has been complied with. Lectures and Speakers of the year. Mr. J. Dawes (2) 1. Microscope slides and Accessories over the years. 2. Early Books on Microscopy and Natural History. Mr. D. McInnes (1) Rotifers, with a film on Rotifers made by the late P. Genery. Mr. J, Endacott (1) Rheinberg Filters and Crystals under Polarised Light Mr. U. Bates (1) Moths and Butterflies, with film on Slime Moulds. Dr. E. Peters (2) 1. Parasites affecting Mankind. 2. Movie and Still photography through the Microscope. Mr. R. Ward (1) Grinding a Telescope Mirror. Мг Е, D. Graham (1) Diatoms of the Latrobe Valley. Members’ Interests and Display Night (2). Two evenings were enjoyed by the members and visitors during the year. Mrs. Е. С. Graham (Secretary) Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) 127 Geology Group Annual Report 1986 This year being my 14th as your Chairman (1 took over from Roy Dodds in 1973) I begin to worry whether I am still performing my duties to the desired standard. I place this sobering thought before you as we ring in our 40th year as a group. Annual reports always seem difficult to write. What to include; what to omit; who have I forgotten to thank. The highlight for 1986 was probably three rather superb slide nights; (1) Galapagos Islands, Ms. Г. Bennett (it was good to see Leslie back with us), (2) Kashmir and the Himalayas, thanks to Graham Baker, (3) Antarctica, re Messrs. G. Clarke, P. Marsh, and K. Stuwe (all graduates at Melbourne University). It was probably due to these that, once again, attendances increased (by 15%). Maybe 1987 will see us break the 1971 attendance figure! The year presented both scope, and variety, with respect to subjects. How many have we remembered; Mr. D. Tworek (Conservator, Melbourne Museum) - Monuments and their conservation; Dr. E. Lohe (Melbourne University) - Carbonate Complex of the Lennard Shelf, Kimberleys, W.A.; Mrs. Gabi Love with “Petrology for Beginners", and Dinosaur Extinction Theories along with an expose of the Tangshan (1976) Earthquake in China. То our regular, participating stalwarts, I say, thank you. Please remember the 4th February 1988 and our 40th Anniversary "celebration". Our speaker that evening is Dr. Andrew Prentice (NASA and Monash University); his subject is obviously, “Voyager”, the Solar System, and confirmation of his theories. As is customary I take this opportunity to thank everyone who has helped me throughout 1986. Last, but not least a special thank you to Helen, my secretary, for being there when needed. Graeme C, Love (Chairman) Citation For Outstanding Service - Alex. М. Burns At the General Meeting on Monday September 14, 1987 a Citation for Outstanding Service will be presented to Alex N. Burns. Dr. Burns, who during his working life worked as an entomologist, has been a member of the FNCV for 71 years. АП members are urged to be present for this important event. Macedon and Pyrete Ranges Bibliographies The Macedon Range Conservation Society reference. A select list of recent and com- has published a valuable research document entitled *Annotated Bibliographies to the Flora, Fauna and Landscape of the Macedon and Pyrete Ranges". The 18 page document, compiled by Ian Lunt, includes 95 reports, articles, books and submissions which relate to the natural environment of the two ranges. АП articles are arranged in categories (e.g. flora, mammals, planning, etc.) to enable easy prehensive reports, which provide the most useful information on the biology of the ranges, is also included. The annotated bibliographies will prove invaluable to everyone with an interest in the flora, fauna and landscape of the Macedon and Pyrete Ranges and surrounds. Copies are avail- able for $3.00 (to cover production and mail- ing costs), from the Macedon Range Conserva- tion Society, РО. Box 51, Macedon, 3440. Past Issues of the Victorian Naturalist Do you have any unwanted copies of past Victorian Naturalist issues? Dan McInnes (Victorian Nat. Sales Officer) frequently gets requests for past issues, and stocks are running low for some volumes. In particular, Vol 103 No. 2 (March/April 1986) is in low supply. If you have any old copies of the Naturalist you wish to donate to the club, please contact Dan McInnes, 129 Waverley Rd., Malvern, 3145. Ph.: 211 2427. 128 Victorian Nat. FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Reports of Recent Activities Annual General Meeting Monday, 11th May The annual report of the Club for 1986-87 was read by the President, Dr. Jack Douglas. The Treasurer’s report for the year 1986 was then read by the Treasurer, Ms. Yvonne Gray. The Auditor’s report has already been printed in the March/April issue of the Naturalist, Election of Office-bearers and Council Members All positions were declared vacant before the elections began and the results are as follows: President; Dr. Jack Douglas, Vice- President; Mr. Graeme Love, Hon. Treas- urer; Ms. Yvonne Gray, Assist. Treasurer; Mrs. Helen Stanford, Editor; Mr. Russell Thompson, Assist. Editors; Miss Diana McLellan and Miss Vicki Spencer, Lib- rarian; Mrs.Sheila Houghton and Acting Excursion Secretary; Miss Marie Allender. Positions which remained vacant were: Hon. Secretary, Assist. Secretary, Assist. Librarian and Programme Secretary. R. M. Bland of Danby, Bland, Provan and Company was re-elected as the Club’s Auditor, The Council of the FNCV consists of the President, Vice-President, Immediate Past President (Dr. Douglas) and ten other members. The following people were elected to Council: Ms. Yvonne Gray, Mrs. Sheila Houghton, Mrs. Helen Stanford, Mr. Stephen Forbes, Miss Marie Allender, Mr. Richard Faragher, Mr. Ron Pearson, Mr. Michael McBain and Mr. Stephen Henry. Other positions were filled by the following people: Conservation Co-ordin- ator; Mr. Stephen Henry, Club Reporter; Mrs. Christine Ashburner, C.CV. Repre- sentatives; Mr. lan Faithfull and Mr. Michael McBain, Book Sales Officer; Mrs. Helen Stanford, Vic. Nat. Sales Officer; Mr. Dan McInnes, Publicity Officer; Miss Margaret Potter and Information Officer at General Meetings; Mr. Norm Stanford. Vol. 104 No. 4 (1987) The President, Dr. Jack Douglas, then gave his Presidential Address entitled “A Naturalist’s Reminiscences?’ Dr. Douglas commented on the natural- ists of today and yesterday and then pre- sented his own story as a field naturalist as a series of reminiscences illustrated by many slides. He divided his memories into child- hood, student, work and recreational ex- periences and began by recalling getting his Gould League Certificate when in Grade 5 at school in the Otways and being awarded a prize for best bird imitation for his impression of a Boobook Owl. His memories from student days included seeing rockpools crawling with crayfish at Moonlight Head and a reported Tasmanian Tiger further along the coast. He also recalled some of the places he had been to in his early field days as а geologist in the Victorian Mines Department. One memorable holiday incident was the “Cobra in the Scrub” which turned out to be a Black Swan with a broken wing, which took a lot of getting into a large sack before it could be released into the fox-free environment of a local lagoon. А number of highlights from overseas trips were recounted including an encounter with a bear in the Western Rockies and the bleak but beautiful Yorkshire Moors. The variety of observations and love of nature were typical of most naturalists, claimed Dr. Douglas, and he urged everyone to go on a trip through their own past and recall some forgotten incidents that had meant a lot to them at the time. Exhibits – Under microscopes: Hydroids, including some in the process of budding; Pondlife from Caulfield Racecourse Lake; Foraminifera and a note that the gastropod exhibited last month was of the family Vermetidae (worm shells). Mr, Dan Melnnes, - Fossil shells of the Miocene age from Muddy Creek. Mr. Andy Blackburn. - a number of dead wasps which had, as larvae, infested a Grape Vine Moth caterpillar. Mr. Urwin Bates. 129 Nature Notes Miss Stephanie Rennick spoke about conservation issues on the Mornington Peninsula. The Peninsula is undergoing very rapid development and the need to save some of the remaining natural areas is becoming more urgent. Although the Government has purchased some land they lack funds to purchase Greens Bush Farm, an important corridor between parts of the Nepean State Park, The Victorian Conservation Trust has set up а trust to obtain money to purchase the Farm. Some land has already been bought but more money is needed to ensure a sufficiently wide buffer zone, All donations would be gratefully accepted and the Government is matching all funds raised, General Meeting Monday, 15th June Silence was observed by the meeting to mark the recent death of Miss Violet Ballam, as Honorary Life Member, who joined the Club in 1943. Miss Ballam had been a member of the Botany Group and had been especially interested in Acacias. The Speaker for the evening was Dr. Bill Birch, Curator of Minerals, Rocks and Meteorites at the Museum of Victoria, who spoke about "Crystals? Dr. Birch began by defining crystals and describing how they are formed. Crystals are solid bodies bounded by natural plane surfaces and their geometry depends on the chemical composition of the mineral, They grow by mineral deposition on the outside of thecrystal. This may occur as hot liquids crystalize, by drawing out of solutions, from gases (e.g. around volcanos) or, in the solid state, within metamorphic rocks. A particular mineral may exhibit different crystal shapes. It is not always known why a particular shape has developed but all can be formed by rotations around the crystal's planes of symmetry and its internal struc- ture remains the same. Тће most perfect crystals are those which are able to grow in free space without interference. Gold forms cubical crystals on the rare occasions it has been found to have had the space to do so. Crystalline gold is very highly prized due to its rarity. Dr. Birch told of some of the techniques used by crystallographers to study crystals and finished by describing some of Vic- toria's more interesting crystal deposits. His talk was well illustrated by slides. Exhibits - under microscopes: slides by Mr. Paul Genery showing a Hymenopteran and a section of a tecoma. Mr. Urwin Bates. - a fungus, Pluteus cervinus Mrs. Sheila Houghton. Nature Notes - Two yellow rosellas were seen feeding on a nature strip in Rosebud. As they were either the South Australian or the Tasmanian form of the Crimson Rosella they were a long way out of their range. Mr. Tom Sault. — Perhaps they had escaped from an aviary. Mr. Andy Blackburn. - Large flocks of seagulls recorded from the Essendon area coming from the south in the morning and back again in the evening. They breed on Mud Island and near the Westgate Bridge. Mr, Urwin Bates. - ^ discussion followed about seagulls and the need to control them as they are out-competing other seabirds Гог nesting sites. C.M. Ashburner New Legislation to Protect Flora and Fauna - But Can it Work? On Friday 24th July 1987, the Victorian Minister Гог Conservation Forests and Lands (Joan Kirner) released for public comment proposed legislation for a Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1987. The government intends to introduce the Bill for this Act in the spring session of parliament later this year. The proposed legislation provides a public process for identifying and protecting threatened species and communities of flora and fauna, as well as a new instrument for protecting habitat crucial for their survival - the Interim Conservation Order. Copies of the proposed legislation and explanatory information are available from the Department of Conservation Forests and Lands (DCFL). Whilst this legislation is a bold new initiative, it is difficult to see how the DCFL can address the many additional demands upon its resources which will flow from the introduction of this legislation. Indeed, at the time of printing, staff of the Wildlife Management and Freshwater Fisheries Management branches of the DCFL are involved in a formal industrial dispute with the Department over the existing staff crisis and its inevitable impact on the conservation of fish and wildlife in Victoria. Ed. 130 Victorian Nat. Continued from inside front cover Microscopical Group. – Third Wednesday Wednesday, 19th August. “Fungi?” Mr. Bob Graham. Wednesday, 16th September. "Aquatic Life" Mr. Ray Power, Wednesday, 21st, October. “Movie and Still Photography through the Microscope" Dr. E. Peters. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Excursions. Botany Group Saturday, 22nd August. Warneet Heathland. Saturday,26th September. Anglesea — for the Wildflower Show. Saturday, 24th October. Bush Reserves at St. Andrews and Panton Hill. Leader: Ms. Dorothy Mahler. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS The Victorian Naturalist invites contributions of original papers relating to Australian natural history, particularly of Victoria, All papers are assessed by an independent referee before publication. Short contributions of natural history observations are also invited for use as “Naturalist Notes”, These contributions may be edited, or excerpts published, at the Editors’ discretion. Such notes are not normally refereed, and may be submitted more informally. All contributions are to be written in concise, simple English. For cost reasons, authors of original papers submitted for publication are requested to conform with the following guidelines. Any author who has difficulty in complying with these guidelines, or has queries concerning manuscripts, should consult the Editors before submitting a manuscript. Submission of Manuscripts Manuscripts should be sent to The Editorial Com- mittee, Victorian Naturalist, ЕМСУ., С“ The National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra, 3141. Two typewritten copies of the manuscript should be submitted. Authors are advised to retain a further copy. Format Text should be fully revised, typed double spaced on one side of the paper only, with a wide margin, pages numbered consecutively, and should contorm in style to recent issues of the Victorian Nat. Author's name and address or institution should appear beneath the title. Underline only those words (о be italicised in the text i.e- genus and species names, and titles of periodicals and books, АП measurements should be expressed in the metric system (SI units). Relerences should be cited in the text as Brown (1981) or (Brown, 1981). Footnotes must be avoided. Acknowledgements should be grouped at the end of the paper before References. References should be listed alphabetically by author's surname at the end of the paper. АП references should be cited in the text. Abbreviations of titles of periodicals should conform with those in A World List of Scientific Periodicals (4th ed., Butterworth). Refer to recent issues of the Victorian Nat. for the formatting of references. Tables and Figures Tables should only be used for essential data needed to show important points in the text, They should be numbered consecutively, referred to in order in the text, and designed to fit within the print area of 115 x 180 mm. Each table must have an explanatory caption. Figures may be in the form of drawings or photographs. They should be identified on the back with the author's name and the figure number. The top should be indicated and the magnification by scale where appropriate. Compass directions must bc indicated where necessary. АП figures should be referred to in the text and numbered consecutively (Fig. 1, Fig. 2 etc.). Figures should be carefully prepared and should be submitted ready for publication. Each should have a short caption, Maximumsize is 115 x 180 mm; single column width is 55 mm. Figures are preferably submitted at actual size. Lettering on Figures should be done by the author; care is needed to ensure that all letters are legible after reduction. Line drawings should be made in black ink. Photographs should only be used where essential due to the high cost of printing plates. They should preferably be unmounted, glossy black & white prints, showing good detail and moderate contrast. Proof and Reprints Galley proofs will be sent to the author, who should correct and return them as soon as possible. Only the minimum 8f corrections should be made. Multiple copies of articles can be prepared for the author only at the time of printing. These will be in the form of print run-ons and priced as follows for each multiple of 50 copies: 1-2 pp 3-4 pp 5-6 pp 7-8 pp 9-10 pp 11-12 pp 13-14 pp SIE 25 935 545. 555 — $65. "375 Orders for these 'reprints' must be made at the time authors return their corrected proofs to the editor. Taxonomic Papers Papers describing new taxa will not be accepted for publication unless the primary type material 48 deposited in a recognised public museum or herbarium, It is suggested that in other more general papers where taxonomy is discussed, voucher material be lodged in a public collection, and the repository details cited in the text. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: ЕМСУ, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellene. The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. » Key Office-Bearers 1985-1986 President: Dr JACK DOUGLAS, 42 Sunhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 А.Н.) Vice President: Mr G, LOVE, P.O; Box 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary: Мг; RON PEARSON, 33 Avenza St., Mentone, 3194 (584 7443) Hon. Treasurer: Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Cres., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 А.Н.) Subseription- Secretary: Mr N. STANFORD, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yatra, 3141. c у Editor; Mr. | . THOMSON, ENCY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (344 5704 В.Н.) AE Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, ЕМСУ, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 А.Н.) Excursion Sec ety: Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter: Mrs. CHRISTINE ASHBURNER, Lot 1, Union Road, Langwarrin, 3910 (789 8485 A.H.) Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr. STEPHEN HENRY, 22 Odenwald Rd., Eaglemont, 3084. Sales Officer (Books): Mrs H. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer ( Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Мг D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148, (211 4997) Microscopical: Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the E.N.C V, is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. на аи а rates for 1987 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) . с ль $25.00 Joint Metropolitan. Members и. eo. 2 eels IA IA ee Lyrae? TEY ми ИВО О Country/Interstate/Retired Members (ies M e ep X TRE ие НИ nonr Ea pe $23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members ..... ................ ваља жа: .,, ; $25.00 Student (full-time) . я at PEMA tree таа $18.00 Junior (under 18; по ‘Victorian Naturalist) . 220577. TT ~ ЕВЕ Рт ти - $5.00 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ...... ее ЗК јан Ы: A cu 22D T. Overseas Sie sad a a to Victorian Naturalist . оля пса athens $30.00 "Affiliated: Clubs" n. Tte oer aab ыы ME RT a A TOP ВА DERI DN $25.00 Subscriber Clubs .......... "Жа (Il nie de iens НЫ Два =. Aue cra ын tota Phu $23.00 Individual Journals шә FERRE cu рат БЫР ko nr: Ре LEE $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), arter.engotMarc de UE Е. a a ЕМЕ E Рини. $2.00 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS РТУ. LTD. 1-13 ABBOTSFORD ST, WEST MELBOURNE. 328-4774. ol. 104, Мо. 5 September/October 1987 Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA $3.50 Reaistered by Australia Post. Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 ЕМСУ DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Monday, 12th October, 8.00 p.m. Dr Jim Bowler, “Environmental Changes and Human Occupation - The Last 60,000 Years? Monday, 9th November, 8.00 p.m. Australian Natural History Medallion Presentation to Dr. Ron Green of Victoria Museum, Launceston. Note: Meeting will be held at the Royal Society, 9 Victoria Street, Melbourne. Buffet dinner 6 p.m. $12.50. Please notify Acting Secretary if you wish to attend. Payment on the night. Monday, I4th December, 8.00 p.m. Professor Roger Short, *Chimps and Gorillas in the Wild? New Members Metropolitan Mr. Maurice Riga - Springvale Joint Metropolitan Student Mr. Frank Udovicie - Sunshine Mr. C, Buckingham - Warrak Mr. Fred Thorpe and Mrs. Dorothy Thorpe - Hawthorn Mr. Peter Newall and Mrs. Robyn Newall - Research ЕМСУ. EXCURSIONS Friday, 16th - Sunday, 18th October. Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Association Spring weekend, See previous Naturalists or contact Marie Allender 527 2749, Friday, 23rd – Sunday, 25th October. King Island. See last Naturalist. Sunday, 8th November. Mt, Beckworth, This will be a combined excursion led by the Ballarat ЕМС. which will be attended by the Nature Plants Preservation Society and the Creswick ЕМС. We have been invited 1o join the excursion and meet at Crockers at the corner of Sturt and Armstrong Streets, Ballarat at 9.30 am or at the Public Gardens in Clunes at 12,30 pm. This will be a private car excursion and | would appreciate it if members with cars could offer a lift to members without transport. Should you have a spare seat and not know of anyone requiring transport could vou let me (Marie Allender) know and if anyone without transport will give me their name I will try to put them in touch. The morning will probably be mainly birding in swampy areas near Clunes and the afternoon at Mt. Beckworth. Take a picnic lunch. Sunday, 6th December, Presidents Picnic Winchelsea area. This is the final excursion for the year so we hope to see a good attendance. The coach will leave from Batman Avenue at 9.30 am. fare $12.00. Bring a picnic lunch. Members going by car should contact the President or Excursion Secretary about a week before the excursion. Friday, 8th - Saturday 16th January 1988. Tasmania. Members are reminded final payments are due Monday, 9th November. Details of the trip have appeared in the previous Naturalists but anyone requiring further information should ring Marie Allender. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to atend any Group Meetings, Day Group - Third Thursday Thursday, 15th October, Banyule Flat Reserve. Meet at Rosanna Station at 11.30 a.m. Catch 10.56 a.m. train from Princes Bridge. Leader: Dan McInnes, 211 2427 Thursday, 19th November. Patterson River, Carrum. Meet at Carrum Station 11.33 a.m. Catch the 10.40 a.m. train from Flinders Street, Leader: Dan Mclnnes 211 2427, At the National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Botany Group - Second Thursday Thursday, 8th October. “Biological Control of Australian Acacias in South Africa? Dr. Tim New. Thursday, 12th November, “Operation Revegetation”: Community Nursery, Knox. Mr. Andrew Paget. Thursday, 10th December. Annual General Meeting and Member’s Night. Continued on inside back cover. Naturalist Volume 104, Number 5 September / October, 1987 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: R. Thomson. ОИ И ie ле и ayes Cae TRITT ROT E 136 Litoria peroni (Anura: Hylidae) : An Addition to the Amphibian Fauna of the Melbourne Area by M. J. Littlejohn and P. A. Harrison 137 Legacy from the Late Violet E. Balaam...................... 140 Bush-peas of Victoria - Genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) - 22 by CCo cce oat LOL LEE A ыал ыс. NORD SE TUE їн 141 о № 144 Insect Visitors to Helichrysum bracteatum (vent.) and some other Asteraceae near Bombala, New South Wales by G. A. Webb.... 145 Trap Disturbance during the Survey of Small Mammal Communities Dus ЕСИР LR E ӘК Ри roo ls AM Toy 150 Naturalist Note: Another Strange Foraminifera Found at Black Rock. Port Phillip Bay. Boderia turneri (Suborder Allogromiina) by D. E. О PE а р S cm ot d 154 Comment on the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act, 1987........ 159 Work-to-rule at Arthur Rylah Institute, Heidelberg ............ 160 Australian Natural History Medallion 1987................... 160 И SDODLU USA Tere RS erp m A rem TUTTI T cu 161 Lis veo fom m Е SA nL ал ин и лик 161 Cover Illustration: Litoria peroni see page 137. President’s Report 1986-87 Although no significant anniversaries or notable events were recorded in the FNCV 1986-87 year, І am pleased that this Annual Report is presented to a Club in good condition in most aspects of its activities, Our General Meetings continue to be well supported with attendances rarely below 60, and this is in large measure due to the efforts of our Programme Secretaries who have managed to obtain first class speakers on pertinent subjects, and to the large range of interesting and informative exhibits. It is pleasing to note an element of visitors and new members at all recent meetings. Field excursions continue to be reasonably well patronized with some уегу successful overnight trips and the memorable KANGAROO ISLAND excursion of several days as highlights. Our group meetings have a keen following under capable and enthusiastic leaders, We still however have problems filling Council and other offices, and again I appeal to any who may now find the time available to nominate for positions at the May elections. The Victorian Naturalist continues as a high standard publication acquired by dozens of local and overseas Libraries as well as being received as part of subscription benefits. Many members may not realize that early issues published at a time when there were few if any other vehicle for naturalists comments, have become a most important focus for research studies. The appointment of an Editor to lead the editorial group should facilitate production. Honorary Memberships were granted to members, Mr. Frank May and Mrs, Daphne Boyle, making a total of 52 in this category, This number, unusually large for most organizations, is a measure of the support received over a lifetime by these recipients and an indication of the longevity of naturalists, but fortunately still well within our financial capabilities. Special congratulations must go to Mr. Alec Burns formerly of the Museum of Victoria and now a resident of Burleigh Heads, Queensland, for obtaining the 70 years membership mark, achieved I believe only once before in the history of the club. As indicated above our finances are in a very healthy condition, with contingency funds for foreseeable commitments in special accounts for publication, Australian Natural History Medallion etc. Although we all deplore the need for recent small subscription increases I hope members realise that we must continually maintain a viable economic position. The name of Graham Pizzey was added to the honour role of winners of the Australian Natural History Medallion this year. My congratulations again, and I suggest that members unable or disinclined to attend other meetings might try to get together with us next November at the Royal Society Hall where the 1987 award will be made. This venue has been chosen because of rebuilding and extensions to the Herbarium, our headquarters for many years. We are currently negotiating with the Department fo Forests Conservation and Lands about our future occupancy, Finally I am very grateful for the magnificent support I have received from the outgoing Council and office bearers, Without this dedicated band of workers your Club would not be in the satisfactory condition that it is as we approach our 108th year of existance. J. Douglas President FNCV 136 Victorian Nat. Litoria peroni (Anura: Hylidae) : An Addition.to the Amphibian Fauna of the MelbourneArea `; ВУ М. J. LITTLEJOHN* AND Р. A HARRISON” Ру“ , d ( ~ "i Cl | * E. 7 The anuran amphibian fauna that occurs we heard tH iHe distinctive advertisement call within a radius of 40km of the Melbourne 4 General Post Office was first described by of a male of ria., „beroni (Tchudi),, а species not previously krownto occuriathis Littlejohn (1963), who listed 11 species known to occur in the area. Litoria lesueuri (Dumeril and Bibron) was subsequently area. The male was calling from emergent vegetation in a swamp on the east side of Dunnett Road, adjacent to the Yan Yean Fig. 1. Litoria peroni – adult male collected 2.5km SSE of Whittlesea, Victoria, on 17 December 1985. added by Martin, Littlejohn and Rawlinson (1966), after its discovery at Riddell by B. Smith and G. F. Watson and later at Bulla (within the Melbourne Area) by P. A. Rawlinson. On the night of December 17th, 1985, while on field work in the Whittlesea area, * Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) Reservoir, 2.5km SSE of Whittlesea (37932' S, 145908' E). This specimen was subse- quently located and collected (Fig. 1), and is now preserved in the Research Museum of the Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne (Catalogue No. 31/85). Calls of two other individuals of 1. peroni were also heard on the same evening, on the eas- tern side of Dunnett Road adjacent to the retaining wall of the Yan Yean Reservoir, 137 Fig. 2. Geographic distribution of Litoria peroni in Victoria (solid circles), based on Brook (1982), with adjacent localities being represented by a single symbol, Localities mentioned in text (open circles) are numbered as follow: 1 = Yan Yean Reservoir; 2 = Coburg; 3 = 5.6km S of Healesville; 4 = 8.0km SSE of Yea; 5 = 60km NNE of Yarram. 6.0km S of Whittlesea (37934' S, 145907’ E). It is indeed surprising that L. peroni had not been recorded from the Whittlesea area pre- viously, considering the amount of field research that had been carried out there over the previous 25 years. We can only attribute the oversight to a lack of trips to the area during the early summer, and to cool weather during visits made in the late spring. The species may be (or have been) exten- sively distributed along the valley of the Plenty River. Moore (1961) listed one specimen of L. peroni, trom Coburg, (37945' S, 144958' E) (Fig. 2), in the collection of the American Museum of Natural History; but in the absence of supporting data, we had treated the locality as possibly incorrect, and so had not listed it as a species which is present in the Melbourne Area. It now seems reason- able to consider that L. peroni also occurs, or may have occurred, in the drainage of the 138 Merri Creek. The Museum of Victoria has four specimens of L. peroni (D44880-3) from 5.6km S of Healesville (37942' S, 145931' E) (Fig. 2), collected by Mr. D. Thomas in 1973. It is possible, however, that ihe population of L. peroni in the Heales- ville area is derived from introduced speci- mens (J. Coventry, pers. com.). Brook (1982) summarised the known geographic distribution of L. peroni in the Atlas of Frogs of Victoria, including the locality 5.6km S of Healesville (Fig. 2). Since publication of the atlas by Brook (1982), we have also heard calls of L. peroni along the Yea River, 8.0km SSE of Yea (37916' S, 145?28' E) (Fig. 2), and obtained tape recordings of calls and collected specimens Of adults from marginal and emergent vegetation associated with a fire dam in a forested area, 6.0km NNE of Yarram (38931 S, 146?42' E) (Fig. 2). The morphology of adults, larvae and Victorian Nat. eggs, the structure of the male advertisement call, and the electrophoretic properties of haemoglobin of L. peroni were described by Martin et al. (1979) in their account of the closely-related, new species, L. tyleri. The limited data on breeding activity in Victoria have been summarised by Brook (1980). Unless otherwise indicated, the following account is based on information presented by Martin et al. (1979) and our unpublished observations. 4.0 kHz 2.0 0.4 0.8 А ААА, white vegetal pole; there are three layers to the jelly capsule. No detailed information is available on the size, appearance or locations of egg masses. Larvae A full description (with illustrations) was provided by Martin et al. (1979). The larvae are pale golden-yellow in life, with a dark lateral stripe extending from the snout, through the eye, and along the dorsal edge of the body and tail musculature. An 12 1.6 20 SECONDS Fig. 3. Audiospectrogram (FLA shape, 300 Hz bandpass) of ће advertisement call of à male of Loria peroni (Таре Reference R367, Мо, 9) recorded 6.0km NNE of Yarram, Victoria, at а wet-bulb air temperature of 14,39€, on T December 1980. Morphology Adults Litoria peroni is а distinctive species which is unlikely to be confused with any other anuran occurring in the Melbourne Area. The adults are medium-sized frogs (about 45 to 55mm snout-vent length), with the typical body-form of a tree frog. There are well developed discs and almost complete webbing on the fingers and toes; and the second finger is longer than the first. L. peroni is an excellent climber. The dorsal surface is light grey-brown, scattered with fine green spots, and the texture is warty, The posterior surfaces of the thighs are yellow with fine black variegations. The ventral surface is white and granular, except for the dark vocal sac of mature males. Eggs Тће diameters of the clear jelly capsules range from 2.80 to 3.12mm (mean = 3.00mm), and those of the embryos from 1.48 to 1.56mm (mean = 1.52mm). There is a dark brown animal pole and а creamy- Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) advanced larva with a total length of 44.2mm had a tail length of 26.8mm. The mouth dise is typical of most Australian hylid larvae; there are two upper and three lower rows of teeth, and two or three rows of papillae extend around the sides and back of the mouth disc. Development from fertilization to metamorphosis takes about six months. Breeding Biology Calls have been heard from September to January in Victoria (Brook 1980), Males usually call from elevated sites in marginal and emergent vegetation associated with permanent or near-permanent still water; they may also call from the ground or floating vegetation. Breeding pairs of L. peroni were obtained in the Jervis Bay area, N.SW., in late October (Martin et al. 1979). Barker and Grigg (1977) reported that males begin calling in September from elevated positions or on the ground; clasping occurs at the calling site, (hen the amplectant pair 139 Table 1. Physical characteristics of the advertisement calls of three males of Litoria ретот, recorded 6.0km NNE of Yarram, Victoria, on 1 December 1980 (Tape Reference R367). Subject No. 367/3 367/7 367/9 Mean Wet-bulb air temperature (°C) 16.2 16.1 14.3 15,5 Call duration (5) 1.97 1.96 2.16 2.03 Notes рег call (п) 34 29 2 30 Note repetition rate (notes/s) 17.0 14.7 Ц, 14.6 Note duration (ms) 39.5 51.2 51.2 473 Pulses per note (п) 9 9 11 9.7 Pulse repetition rate (pulses/s) 264 19] 185 213 Dominant frequency (Hz) 1602 1699 #1748 1683 * А second peak of equal intensity was present at 1914 Hz. descends into shallow water where several Acknowledgements hundred eggs are deposited. The advertisement call consists of a drawn-out sequence of rapidly-repeated, short notes, gradually increasing in intensity. The call may be described as a long, loud “chuckle”. А full description, including an audiospectrogram, was provided by Martin et al. (1979), who included only one small sample of calls of three individuals from Victoria (recorded at Gipsy Point, East Gippsland). As this attribute can greatly facilitate identification and detection of L. peroni in the field, another brief physical description is presented. No tape recordings were obtained in the Whittlesea area. Accordingly, recordings of three males from 6.0km NNE of Yarram were analysed on a processing digital oscilloscope (Norland 3001/DMX). Values for selected physical attributes of one call of each individual are given in Table 1, and an audiospectrogram of one of them (produced on a Kay Elemetrics 6061-B Sona-Graph) is presented in Figure 3. This study was carried out with the support of the Australian Research Grants Scheme (Grant No. D18315884), and research funds provided by the University of Melbourne. Field collections were made under Scientific Collecting Permit No. 85/57, issued by the Victorian Ministry for Conservation, Forests and Lands. We thank Dr. G. Е. Watson for his comments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Barker, J, and Grigg, G. (1977). A Field Guide to Australian Frogs. Rigby, Adelaide. Brook, A. J. (1980). The breeding seasons of frogs in Victoria and Tasmania. Victorian Nat, 97:6-11. Brook, A. J. (1982). Atlas of Frogs of Victoria. 1982 edn. Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Publication No. 6. Littlejohn, M. J. (1963). Frogs of the Melbourne area. Victorian Nat, 19:296-304. Martin, A. A., Littlejohn, M. J., and Rawlinson, P. A. (1966). A key to the anuran eggs of the Melbourne area, and an addition to the anuran fauna. Victorian Nat, 83:312-315. Martin, A. A., Watson, С. F, Gartside, D. F, Littlejohn, M. Ј., and Loftus-Hills, J. J. (1979). A new species of the Litoria peronii complex (Anura: Hylidae) from eastern Australia, Proc. Linn. Soc; N.S.W. 103:23-35. Moore, J. А. (1961). The frogs of eastern New South fales, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 121:149-386. Legacy from the Late Violet E. Balaam The Club has received a collection of books and an amount of $500 from the estate of the late Miss Violet E. Balaam, a Life Member of the Club. Miss Balaam, who joined the Club in 1943 was also a member of the Bird Observer’s Club and the Society for Growing Australian Plants. The Club is grateful for this benefaction and will put the money towards the improvement and upkeep of the Club’s Kinglake property. R. B. Pearson Hon. Secretary. 140 Victorian Nat. Bush-peas of Victoria - Genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) - 22 By M. G. CORRICK* Pultenaea hispidula R.Br. ex Benth. in Fl. austral. 2:133(1864). Pultenaea hispidula is a spreading shrub 0.6-1.1m high, usually with widely spread- ing, arched branches. The stems are terete and densely covered with a mixture of long and short hairs. The leaves are alternate, oblong-elliptic or obovate with a acute but blunt tip and distinct petiole. Including the petiole they are (4-)5-7(-8)mm long and (0.7-)1-2(-3)mmm wide, The leaf margin is incurved. The upper leaf surface is light green with a few scattered pale hairs, the lower surface is darker, usually slightly scabrid and more hairy than the upper surface. Occasionally the leaves are glabrous. The stipules are 1-2mm long, lanceolate with long, slender recurved points and are partially united. Their colour varies from medium to very dark brown. The flowers are axillary with 2-5 clustered towards the tips of short lateral shoots along the length of the branches. The pedicel is about I-1.5mm long and densely hairy with short, erect hairs. Bracts are absent but the stipules on the floral leaves are enlarged. The bracteoles vary from broadly ovate to narrowly lanceolate, 2-5.5mm long and 0.5-3mm wide. In some forms the bracteoles are three-lobed from the base, Their colour varies from medium to very dark brown, occasionally the three lobed form has the centre lobe green. They are attached to the base of the calyx tube and can be shorter than the calyx tube or up to almost as long as the whole calyx. The calyx, excluding the pedicel is 3-5.5mm long with acute lobes about equal in length to the tube with the upper two joined higher than the lower three. It is * M. G. Corrick, 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, 3103. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) variously hairy or glabrous, or occasionally viscid. The standard is orange with dark brick red lines surrounding a pale yellow blotch at the base of the lamina; the wings are orange and the keel dark brick red. Colour varies considerably between populations, some forms being more yellow.than orange and with the dark markings much reduced. The Black Range form is deep orange with dark red lines and shading on both surfaces of the standard and on the tips of the wings and keel. The ovary is densely covered with pale hairs and scattered hairs extend half-way up the style. The mature pod is plump and at least half enclosed by the calyx. Flowering time is from about mid Octob- er to late November. P hispidula is a most variable species and this description follows Willis (1972) in which he synonymized P recurvifolia (Benth. Williamson, P readeriana Williamson and P pubescens Williamson under a broad concept of P hispidula. The characters which Williamson used to distinguish his species are extremely variable. Three-lobed bracteoles occur sporadically in almost all forms of the species, and can be present or absent on the same plant. Leaf shape and size vary markedly, and although plants with a soft hairy appearance and arched, or slightly weeping branches are fairly typical, some populations, e.g. from the Grampians Black Range are more rigid and erect, whereas populations from near Nelson are almost glabrous with very narrow, recurved leaves. A form in the southern Grampians is not- able for its very broad, almost flat leaves, richly coloured flowers and dark stipules. Further studies may show both this and the Nelson form to be worthy of recognition as distinct taxa. 141 e, SS ANI) za «КО ES И $ 04 ASTA 0T] X ак " E, «A а / д 2 n) V Fig. 38. Pultenaea hispidula. Belgrave form: A, habit x 1; B, calyx x 5; C, leaf, lower surface showing stipules x 12; D, ts. leaf x 12; E, standard x 5; F, ovary x 10 (A-F from Corrick 5972, MEL). Cape Nelson form; G, pod and calyx showing three-lobed bracteole x 10; H, seed x 10; Гапа J, leaf x 12 (G-J from Woolcock 1523, MEL). Southern Grampians form; К and L, leaf x 12; M, bracteole x 10 (K-M from Corrick 5728, MEL). Black Range form: N and O, leaf x 12; P, bracteole x 10 (N-P from Corrick 1912, MEL). 142 Victorian Nat. Fig. 39. Known distribution of P hispidula in Victoria. E о TR: Fig. 40. P. graveolens. Stipules, from Corrick 7871. P hispidula is also occasionally confused with P graveolens (see following note for discussion of differences). At Teddy Bear Gap in the Grampians Serra Range there is an interesting popu- lation which appears to bea series of hybrids between P hispidula and P. mollis. Both species are present as well as numerous plants showing intermediate characters. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) Gordon Paterson of Wartook has shown me unusual forms in the northern Grampians near Roses Gap and Wallaby Rocks which may also be hybrids, some possibly involv- ing P costata. P hispidula is widely distributed in forests across southern Victoria, mainly south of the Dividing Range except for occurrences in the northern Grampians. It also occurs in south-eastern South Australia and in New South Wales. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: New South Wales, Near Georges R., Robert Brown (BM-Iype); Grampians: Victoria Range, A. C. Beauglehole 4068 (MEL), 23.1.1957; Black Range, M. G. Corrick 1912 (MEL), 27.x.1969; Teddy Bear Gap, M. G. Corrick 5728 (MEL), 20.xi.1976. Dandenong Range, M. G. Corrick 5972 (MEL), 20.x.1977; Cabbage Tree Creek, W. Hunter (MEL 651520), x.1950; Langwarrin, H. Weatherhead (MEL 530557), x.1977; Cape Nelson, C. and D. Woolcock 1523 (MEL), 13.x.1983. Pultenaea graveolens R. Tate A full description and illustration of P 143 Inflorescence: Flowers: Bracteoles: Stipules: P. hispidula Axillary but clustered at tips of lateral shoots; stipules of floral leaves en- larged. Subsessile or with pedicel 2mm Usually lanceolate, 2-5.5mm long tapering to long, slender tip, occasion- ally trifid or leaf-like, slightly hairy to glabrous. Lanceolate, I-2mm long, flat with + recurved, slender tip, usually united in the lower half, slightly hairy to glab- P. graveolens Axillary but not clustered at tips of lateral shoots; stipules of floral leaves not enlarged. Distinctly pedicellate, pedicel up to 3mm long. Boat-shaped with mid-rib forming a thickened keel, glabrous, resinous 1-2(3)mm long, never trifid or leaf-like. Boat-shaped with mid-rib forming a thickened keel, not united, tip incurv- ed but whole stipule standing away rous. Perfume: dation. graveolens has already been published in this series (Corrick 1981). More recently, how- ever, Webber in Jessop and Toelken (1986) has placed it in synonymy under P hispi- аша. I consider P graveolens to be a distinct taxon readily distinguishable from any of the forms of P hispidula described above. The following table sets out the main diff- erences between the two species. The most obvious and consistent distinguishing feat- ures of P graveolens are the small boat shaped stipules, the strong perfume and the waxy exudation. Unobtrusive, sweet, no waxy exu- from the stem, glabrous, resinous, Highly aromatic, and with a yellow waxy exudation. Acknowledgements Гат most grateful to Richard Barley for prep- aring the accompanying illustrations, to the Keeper of Botany, BM, and the Director, AD, for the loan of specimens and to Gordon Paterson for help in the field. REFERENCES Corrick, M. G. (1981). Bush-peas of Victoria (15), Victorian Nat. 98:42-44. Jessop, 1. P. and Toelken, Н. К. ed. (1986). Flora of South Aust. Pt. 2, ed. 4 (Government Printer: Adelaide). pp. 677-678. Willis, J. H. (1982). А Handbood to Plants in Victoria 2, Dicotyledons. (Melbourne University Press: Melbourne). p.272. 100 Years Ago EXPERIMENTS WITH A TADPOLE. — In the late Mr. Denton’s little book, “Is Darwin Right?" there occurs the following statement:— “If tadpoles be kept in the dark they will never turn into frogs? Being sceptical as to the truth of the statement, I resolved upon putting it to the test, and accordingly captured two tadpoles of the beautiful golden-green frog (Ranoidea aurea) in the Fitzroy Gardens, I placed them in a wide-mouth glass jar and put them in a dark cupboard, where not the faintest gleam of light could penetrate, This was on the 20th January last. 1 replenished the water each night. On the second day one of the tadpoles died. I removed the dead tadpole and well washed the jar, re-filled it, and returned the living tadpole; but it also died on the seventh day, I believe owing to absence of light. Hence, I conclude, whatever truth the statement mentioned may contain, it is based on the fact that under such conditions they never live to pass through the metamorphosis from the tadpole state into the mature batrachian. — 8, Н. WINTLE. Victorian Nat. V3 March 1887 p.153. 144 Victorian Nat. Insect Visitors to Helichrysum bracteatum (vent.) and some other Asteraceae near Bombala, New South Wales By G. A. WEBB* Introduction In recent years there has been an increased interest in the role of insects in the pollination of Australian native plants (Armstrong 1979, Hawkeswood 1978, 1981 a and b, 1982, Ireland and Griffin 1984, Webb 1985, 1986a and b, Williams 1977, Williams and Williams 1983). Most of these studies have concentrated on species of the Myrtaceae. Little has been recorded of the insect visitors to species in other plant families, including the Asteraceae. Hawkeswood (1978) and Williams and Willi- ams (1983) reported several species of Buprestidae from flowers of some Helichrysum and Cassinia from around Sydney, New South Wales. To my knowledge, except for Stenoderus ssp. (Ceramby- cidae) on Helichrysum and Senecio (Best 1882), no other Coleoptera have been recorded on flowers of Asteraceae in Australia. During the summers of 1983-84 and 1984-85, insects were collected from flowers of Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.) Andr. and some other Asteraceae near Bombala, New South Wales and these data are presented here. Study Areas and Methods Several localities near Bombala were visited: 1. Bombala town — Helichrysum obcordatum (DC) Benth. and Helichrysum semipapposum (Labill.) DC. occurred on a rocky hillslope in а low shrub heath. Many Н, obcordatum plants were examined while only 3 H. semipapposum plants were in flower. Other plant associates were Casuarina nana Sieber ex Spreng, Platysace lanceolata (Labill) Norman, Bossiaea foliosa A. Cunn., Oxvlobium procumbens Е. Muell. and stunted Eucalyptus pauciflora Sieber ex Spreng. 2. Coolangubra State Forest (30km south east of Bombala) – Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.) Andr. was widespread and abundant in disturbed areas, particularly on roadsides, in the forest. Bedfordia arborescens Hochr was a common understorey shrub of tall open moist eucalypt forest of the area. A number of flowering В arborescens plants were examined but few insects were observed. 3. Nalbaugh State Forest (35km south east of Bombala) - Cassinia longifolia R. Br. was Widespread and abundant in forest and wood- * Foresiry Commission of New South Wales, P.O. Box 100, Beecroft, N.SW, 2119, Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) land, and particularly in young Pinus radiata D. Don plantations, Two sites (A and В) both in В radiata plantations were visited, Insects were collected at various times of the day either by hand or with a manually-operated aspirator. F. obcordatum, H. semipapposum, and В salicina were examined on single occasions only (12 Dec. 1983, 12 Dec. 1983, 11 Dec. 1983 respec- tively) while insects were collected from М. bracteatuim on several occasions between 19 Dec 1983 and 17 Jan 1984, C. longifolia was examined on 21 and 23 Jan 1985. All specimens are current- ly held in the Forestry Commission of N.SW. In- sect Collection. Results and Discussion Most Asteraceae are characterized by having narrow florets arranged in a com- pact head or capitulum (Hamilton 1919; Lawrence 1985). In Senecio (Lawrence 1985), florets may be female or bisexual with bisexual florets undergoing anthesis before developing into the female phase. Anthers dehisce inwardly into the tube formed by the ring of anthers before the floret actually opens. These anthers and later the pollen mass within the anther tube are pushed upwards by the elongating style so that the pollen is usually dispersed before the stigma, emerges, thus reducing in-breeding. This pattern of floral development may vary according to longevity, self-compatability and tendency towards out-breeding (Law- rence 1985). Unlike most flower types (Faegri and Van der Pijl 1979) where pollinators have to brush past pollen bearing anthers to gain access to the nectar sources, in the Asteraceae the outer florets of a capitulum are usually female and thus an insect which alights on the rim of the capirulum will contact receptive stigmas first and then move inwards towards male florets. Thus, self-pollination is minimised while the chance of cross-pollination is enhanced. The concentration of flowers into a compact head also enhances pollination success by ensuring maximum use of the pollen vector. 145 Cribb (1969) considers the floral arrange- ment of the Asteraceae to be one of the most efficient for pollination. Thirty-eight species of beetle, representing 15 families, were recorded from one or more of the 5 species of Asteraceae examined (Table 1). All beetles had pollen present on the body though it is not known what proportion was pollen of species of Asteraceae, Clerids carried the greatest amount of pollen, trapped within the dense covering of hairs and setae over the entire body. However only small numbers of clerids were recorded during the study. Hawkeswood (1981) and Ireland and Griffin (1984) have noted the importance of clerids as vectors of Angophora and Eucalyptus pollen. The Scarabaeidae appear to be the most important beetle pollen vectors since they are common, relatively large, and trap substantial amounts of pollen amongst hairs on the body and legs. The importance of the Scarabaeidae as pollen vectors has been noted before for other plants (Hawkes- wood 1978, 1981, 1982; Webb 1985, 1986). Despite the great abundance of Moredellids on some of the flowers examined, they carried little pollen and are therefore unlikely to be major pollen vectors. Interestingly the Buprestidae, often one of the most abundant and conspicuous ele- ments of blossom fauna (Hawkeswood 1978, 1982; Webb 1986a,b), were uncommon on the species of Asteraceae examined. In fact only a single individual of Stigmodera bella Saunders was recorded on Cassinia longifolia while one and two Stigmodera scalaris (Boisd) were recorded on Helichrysum obcordatum and Cassinia longifolia respectively. None of the five bup- restids so far recorded from species of Aster- aceae (this study, Hawkeswood 1978, Willi- ams and Williams 1983) are host specific since all have been recorded from other plant families, principally Myrtaceae and Proteaceae (Hawkeswood 1978; Webb 1986a,b; Williams and Williams 1983). Species of Diptera, Hymenoptera, Hemi- ptera and Orthoptera were also recorded on Н. bracteatum but no specific identifica- 146 tions are available yet. Since all had pollen adhering to the body they must also be considered potential pollen yectors. The most numerous insects on H. bracteatum, other than beetles, were syrphid flies, scoliid wasps and native bees (Apoidea). All three groups proved difficult to capture, however, the few specimens of each that were taken had heavy pollen loads (*** in the beetle rating) and are probably important pollen vectors. A wide range of insects, other than beetles, have previously been recorded from the flowers of species of Asteraceae (Table 2). These include the orders Hymenoptera, Lepidoptera, Mecoptera, Diptera, Hemi- ptera and Thysanoptera. The majority of these records, however, are anecdotal and no indication of their relative importance in pollination has been given. Recently, however, Lawrence (1985) recorded а number of insect taxa from Australian Senecio and indicated that native bees (Hali- ctidae) and to a lesser extent Syrphid flies were the most important pollen vectors. Lawrence also observed thrips (Thripidae) on Senecio which she suggests were feeding on nectar in the corolla tubes. It would seem, from this study and that of Lawrence (1985), that a wide range of insects may be involved in the pollination of species of Asteraceae though Scarabaeid beetles, syrphid flies, scoliid wasps and native bees (Apoidea) are probably the most important pollen vectors. By virtue of their floral structure, Aster- aceae seem well suited to pollination by pollen seeking insects however the presence of nectar in at least some Asteraceae (Clem- son 1985, Lawrence 1985, Webb pers. obs.) suggests that pollen is not the only attrac- tant. The occurrence of many primarily nectar seeking beetles on the Asteraceae examined also supports this contention. However, Clemson (1985) noted that a number of Asteraceae used by the intro- duced honey bee Apis mellifera L. only produce small quantities of nectar. Since the nectar of two species of Asteraceae, Cassinia longifolia and Helichrysum diosmofolium (Vent.) Sweet (Webb, pers. obs.), is strong smelling but quantities of available nectar may be small (Clemson 1985), there may be Victorian Nat. Table 1: Coleoptera recorded from flowers of some Asteraceae near Bombala, New South Wales. | Bu 5 Š E E E $ 5 5 Cassinia =8 ss | 55 zs | 55 longifolia a= COR uU Mm oS CMS Sc RULES ex S S S & S a b Col: Buprestidae Stigmodera bella Saunders м R Stigmodera scalaris (Boisduval) * R R Col: Lycidae Metriorrhynchus rhipidius Macleay * U Metriorrhynchus rufipennis Fabricius z R Col: Scarabaeidae Eupoecila australasiae Don. е R Diaphonia dorsalis (Donovan) ыу: R Diphucephala nr. aurolimbata Blanchard br C Phyllotocus erythropterus Blanc xu C Phyllotocus macleayi Fisch. * G © Phyllotocus rufipennis (Boisduval) жа, је < Col: Mordellidae Mordella nr. australis (Boisd) * * * Mordella dumbrelli (Lea) * (S Mordella leucosticta Guerin * 5 Mordella nr promiscua Erichs yi S © + " Mordella nr svdnevana Blackburn * А (5 R A Mordella nr tristis Lea in A Mordella nr humeralis Waterhouse t = * Mordella nr limbata Waterhouse ei * + Mordella sp. 1 Е * sp. 2 * * Col: Cleridae Phlogistis nr eremita Blkb. m R Eleale intricata? Klug. ERP R Eleale pulchra Newman MS. R Eleale nr. viridus Guerin set (M R Neoscrobiger sp. үүн! R Col: Coccinellidae Coccinella repandra Thb. v © Diomus notescens Blkb. ҖАЕ Ie Harmonia conformis (Boisduval) * R R Col: Cerambycidae Pempsamacra pygmaea Newman # R Stenoderus suturalis Oliv. У [4 R Col: Cantharidae Chauliognathus pulchellus Macleay i R R Chauliognathus nobilitata Er. m R Col: Belidae Belus nr. tenuis Lea з R Col: Curculionidae Perperus sp. г R Col: Tenebrionidae Lepispilus rotundicollis Blkb. * R Col: Cistelidae Neocistela ovalis Blkb. * U Col: Oedemeridae Asclera sublineata Waterhouse Ў, U U Pseudolyces haemorrhoidalis Е. * U U Col: Chrysomelidae Monolepta nr picticollis Blkb. * U Paropsisterna nucea Er. * U Col: Elateridae Anilicus xanthomus (Macleay) | | ы R Pollen Load * ~ light (scattered covering, isolated patches or grains) ** — medium (concentrated isolated patches or moderate coverage) *** _ heavy (heavy covering overall or most of body) Abundance R (rare) - 1103 individuals U (uncommon) - 4 to 10 individuals С (common) = 10 to 100 individuals A (abundant) - more than 100 individuals Abundance data for the Mordelidae have been lumped. For some species of Asteraceae it was physically impossible to collect and sort the vast number of individuals present. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) 147 (£861) swen pue sure, (02) (6961) 1uour&ew (61) (6Р6Т) 1чәшАр (81) (8р61) 1uoui&ew (LI) (£61) 1uoui&ew (91) (1661) 1uoui&ew ($) (7861) $5214 (РП) (FL6I) 9quio210]N (£1) (5961) 1ouououw (21) (5861) ээизла\ет (11) (#261) Алоцв1ом (01) (p861) чән (6) (861) роомѕәмен (8) (6961) &o^eq (L) (6261) /2 12 unsoD (9) (0961) змоллта ($) (2881) 1528 (p) (6160) Suoxisuuy (£) (әзер ои) snoui&uouy (5) (LL61) snour&uouy (1) ‘AJUO лорло о} $12251 JO иопеэцииэр! зојеотриј + Ка (РГ) sepueuuvy (T1) эвриэцен 922921215 (ID гврпоцен (ID әерйицү. (ID эерщал$ (ID зету (p) эвроАаше125) 0129и2$ (00 эврювиа (сє) oerpid y sidajopod (9). (9*0. (91) әерпәцо2 20210 (T1) герпоцен sauoutu401d2] (6)* (ср) эвризнен wnaaidijH (6101) эвризиен (I) pHo (61721) PPNA (p) геролаштла) (Є) eeproea 4 (£D (£D (СП) эерноцаоцзиу | (05) əepnsərdng шпклуоцан (91) зерпоцен (028) огрпзолапа 01115500) (115) зерпоцен әшоә&цәрлд (9)+ 202 (81) герпзпод (5) герпоцен 2152]2)) (2111215019419) ($1) эвриэцоэ D224101024V/ рлә1йоцр$АЦ р елојф шон елә 21214022 elaidopida] elojdouawAy 212140365 `512ә5ш Аа ранил эе25е1215\ Z 27401 Victorian Nat. 148 some element of deception in attracting pollen vectors. Further data on quantity and concentrations of nectar is required. REFERENCES Anonymous (1977). Australias Outback. Rigby Ltd., Adelaide. Anonymous (no date). The living bush. Australian Women’s Weekly (Aust. Consolidated Press), Sydney. Armstrong, 1. A. (1979), Biotic pollination mechanisms in the Australian flora — a review. New Zealand J. Bot. 17:467-508. Best, D. (1882). Longicorn beetles of Victoria V. Southern Sci. Record. 2:35-38, Burrows, С. J, (1960) Studies in Pimelea I. The breeding system. Trans. К. Soc. New Zealand 88:29-45, Clemson, А. (1985). Honey and Pollen Flora Inkata Press, Melbourne, Costin, A. B., M. Gray, C. J. Totterdell, D. J. Wimbush (1979). Kosciusko alpine flora. САВО, Melbourne, Cribb, J. W, (1969) Pollinations with special reference to Queensland Plants Od. Маг, 19:70-75. Davey, К. (1969) Australian Desert Life. Lansdowne Press, Melbourne. Faegri, К. and L. Van Der Р (1979). The Principles of Pollination Ecology 3rd. Ed. Permagon Press, Oxford. Hamilton, A. G. (1919). Pollination of some Australian plants. Austr. Nat. 4:75-81. Hawkeswood, T. J. (1978). Observations on some Buprestidae (Coleoptera) from the Blue Mountains, N.SW. Aust. Zool. 19:257-275. Hawkeswood, T. Г. (1981а). Insect pollination of Angophora woodsiana. Е. M. Bail (Myrtaceae) at Burbank South-east Queensland, Victorian Nat. 98:120-129. Hawkeswood, 1. J. (19816). Observations on some jewel beetles (Coleoptera:Buprestidae) from the Armidale district, north-eastern New South Wales. Victorian Nat, 98:152-155. Hawkeswood, Т. J. (1982). Notes on insect pollination of two species of Eucalyptus (Myrtaceae) from south-west Western Australia. Victorain Nat. 99:28-37, Hearn, D. A. (1984). Blooms of the Australian Wilderness Kevin Weldon and Associates, Sydney. Ireland, J. C. and А. В. Griffin (1984). Observations on the pollination ecology of Eucalyptus muellerana Howitt in east Gippsland Victorian Nat. 101:207-211. Keighery, G. J. (1974). Mecoptera as vectors - а new record, West. Aust. Nat. 13:17-19. Lawrence, M. E. (1985). Senecio L, (Asteraceae) in Australia: Reproductive bilogy of a genus found primarily in unstable environment. Aust. J. Bor. 33:197-208. Michener, C. D. (1965). A classification of the bees of the Australian and Pacific regions Bull. Amer Mus. Nat. Hist. 130:1-362. Morcombe, M. (1974). Wildflowers of Australia. Australian Universities Press, Sydney. Press, T. (1984). Small creatures of the Australian Wilderness. Kevin Weldon and Associates, Sydney. Rayment, T. (1931). New and remarkable bees, Proc. R. Soe, Vict. 43:42-61. Rayment, T. (1935). A cluster of bees. Endeavour Press, Sydney. Rayment, Т. (1948). Some bees from the Victorian Alps Victorian Nat. 65:118-119. Rayment, Т, (1949). New bees and wasps - part X. Victorian Nat. 65:271-272. Rayment, T. (1953). New bees and wasps of XX Victorian Nat, 70:68-71. Webb, G. А. (1985). Insect pollinators of Hakea microcarpa (Proteaceae) Bombala, New South Wales, Victorian Nat. 102:104. Webb, С, A. (1986a) Insect pollinators of Кинзеа umbigna (Sm) Druce (Myrtaceae) near Sydney, New South Wales. Victorian Nat. 10312-15, Webb, С. А, (1986b). Flower-visiting beetles of some New South Wales Leptospermoidea Victorian Nat. Williams, G. A. (1977). A list of the Buprestidae (Coleoptera) collected from Leptospermum flavescens Sm. al East Minto, New South Wales. Aust, Ent. Mag. 3:81-82. Williams, G. A. and T. W. Williams (1983). A list of the Buprestidae (Coleoptera) of the Sydney basin New South Wales, with adult food planting records and biological notes on food plant associations Aust, Ent. Mag. 9:81-93. Now available The Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the Wimmera area, Victoria, by A. С. Beauglehole. Copies are available from the author, price $10 including postage. (A. C. Beauglehole, 3 Beverley Street, Portland, Victoria 3305). Copies of reports on the following areas are also available: Corangamite-Otway; Alpine; East Gippsland; North Central; Melbourne; Ballarat; South Gippsland; South West; Gippsland Lakes Hinterland; Murray Valley; also Victorian Vascular Plant Checklists - 13 Study Area and 24 Major Grid Distribution. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) 149 Trap Disturbance during the Survey of Small Mammal Communities By V. T. READ* Abstract Trap disturbance was recorded during a study of capture methods for small mammal communities in Bodalla State Forest (N.SW.). Up to 80% of the traps were set off each night before the cause of the disturbance was identified and deterred. Dingoes are suspected as the cause. Introduction Faunal surveys, which are designed to provide information on the size and dis- tribution of animal populations and the structure of the community in which they co-exist, require habitats to be sampled in a standardized way (Myers, et al, 1984). Standard sampling methods are important for robust statistical comparison of animal communities from different habitats. The importance of standard methods is re- emphasised for survey teams using grid configurations, as they are more sensitive to the intensity of trap placement compared with traps set along index-lines (Read, sub- mitted paper). With the requirement for robust statisti- cal results goes the concern that the traps and trapping intensity used to sample the community are the same during the samp- ling period. However most faunal surveyors will acknowledge that disturbance to their sampling does occur due to animals moving or springing traps, although this is rarely discussed in their reports and less frequently accounted for in their analyses. Disturbance to a trapping programme is reported here. The disturbance occurred to small mammal traps during a research pro- ject which was designed to assess the effici- ency of eight sampling methods (i.e. grid and index-line configurations with 5, 7.5, 10 and 20 metre spacings between traps) for their * Division of Water and Land Resources CSIRO G.P.O. Box 1666, Canberra, A.C.T., 2061. Current address: Department of Geography University of Western Australia. 150 ability to adequately represent the small mammal community in three forest environ- ments with different logging histories (Read, 1984). The three sites were located in the Bodalla State Forest, 16Кт WSW of Narooma (N.SW.) and adjacent to Mt. Dromedary. Site 1 (more than 50 years since logging) had a few large mature eucalypts with a dense, entangled undergrowth and ran along a creek bed. Site 2 (14 years since logging) had a well developed upper canopy, sparse lower canopy and a species-rich ground cover, dominated by up to six species of ferns. Site 3 (7 years since logging) was dominated by silver top ash (Eucalyptus sieberi) with a poorly developed lower canopy. The domi- nant species at each site are listed in Table 1. The small mammal species found at the sites were Antechinus stuartii, A. swainsonii Rattus fuscipes, R. Rattus, Mus musculus, Perameles nasuta, Pseudomys novae- hollandiae and Sminthopsis leucopus. Elliot aluminium live-capture traps (300x100x90mm) were set during seven field trips between May and July, 1982. The traps were baited with a mixture of peanut butter, rolled oats and honey; they were enclosed within a plastic bag and contained cotton wool bedding inside to reduce stress to captive animals. The traps were set on the first afternoon of each field trip and were checked and cleared during the early mornings of the following three days. As disturbance to the traps became evident, they were left during day-light hours. Evidence of disturbance Following the first night of trapping, three traps had been set off without cap- turing animals. This was unquestioned and attributed at that stage to either the trigger mechanism being too sensitive or medium sized mammals (e.g. R. fuscipes) setting them off without capture. Victorian Nat. Table 1: List of dominant plant species at each site SITE 1 ( 50 years) SITE 2 (14 years) SITE 3 (7 years) Upper Canopy Acacia irrorata A, obtusifolia Eucalyptus bosistoana Е. botryoides Е. muellerana Acacia falciformis А. irrorata А. obtusifolia Angophora floribunda Eucalyptus globoidea Е, longifolia Е. sieberi Angophora floribunda Eucalyptus globoidea E. muellerana Е. sieberi Lower Canopy Indigofora australis Nolalaea longifolia Persoonia linearis Psychotria esculentum Synoum glandulosum Zieria smithii (8) Acacia obtusifolia Elueocarpus reticulatus (11) Acacia irrorata А. obtusifolia Correa геПеха (8) Ground Cover Gahnia sp. Geitonoplesium cynosunt Hibbertia dentata Lichen Pandorea pandorana Poa sieberana Acacia irrorata Entolasia stricta Oplismenus imbecillis Poa sieberana Pteridium esculentum Smilax australis (29) Pteridium esculentum Lomandra filiformis Microsorium diversifolium Moss Pieridium esculentum (18) (25) N.B. Species with percentage cover values and Land Resources CSIRO). 10% included as dominants (data supplied by Division of Water Numbers in parenthesis for the two lower strata are the total number of species Occurring, Fig. 1. Disturbed Elliott trap with bag, hinge wire and cotton wool removed. Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) During the second night, a further trap was sprung but this time with the bait removed. Then on the first night of thethird trip, the cotton wool was removed from one trap. The second night resulted in 12 traps having their plastic bag systematically removed, and on the third night of this trip, two traps were found with the hinge wire removed (Figure 1). The following nights of the third trip resulted in widespread unbagging of traps and pilfering baits. This was of concern as at times, a considerable proportion of the traps were set off. Records of the disturbance are listed in Table 2. They clearly show the increase in the percentage of traps being disturbed, particularly during Trip 3. This suggests that the animal was learning how to get the bait by first removing the bag and later by removing the hinge wire. 151 The cause of the disturbance Initially, the disturbance was attributed to the long-nosed bandicoot (Perameles nasuta). Mascot wire cage traps, set in conjunction with the regular trapping pro- gram, caught the bandicoots (which were released each morning) but did not prevent the disturbance. Additionally, bandicoots were never recorded at Site 3 where disturbance to the traps was as troublesome as the other two sites. Teeth marks in the sheet aluminium of the traps and perforations in the removed plastic bags suggested that the disturbance was caused by dingoes (Canis familiaris dingo). Patches of sand were laid at the sites and dingo tracks were recorded subsequent- ly near disturbed traps. Prior to this, dingoes had been heard howling nearby and were occasionally seen along bush tracks. They were never observed at the trapping sites. Once, when setting traps along an index- line, the sound of traps being unbagged was heard at the beginning of the line, about 50 metres away. Even careful retracking along the line failed to expose the cause although the sounds made by the retreating animal could be better attributed to a dingo than a bandicoot. Other possible causes of disturbance were Table 2: The percentage of traps disturbed for all three sites in Bodalla State Forest % of traps disturbed as recorded by the following observations Dute Мо. traps set unbagged bait taken set off bedding out wire out Trip 1 26.5.1982 198 1.5 27.5.1982 198 0.5 1.5 28.5.1982 198 2.0 Trip 2 1.6.1982 249 2.0 2.6.1982 249 0.4 3.6.1982 249 4.4 Тир 3 9.6.1982 34 2.9 11.8 2.9 10.6.1982 59 20.4 15:3 13.6 5.1 11.6.1982 59 22.0 10.2 20.4 3.4 12.6.1982 91 40.6 8.8 36.2 2.2 13.6.1982 100 52.0 12.0 33.0 4.0 14.6.1982 100 71.0 10.0 51.0 4.0 15.6.1982 34 61.8 23.5 52.9 8.8 Тир 4 17.6.1982 34 2:9 18.6.1982 59 81.6 30.5 TRT 25.4 6.8 19.6.1982 59 84.7 ST 78.0 27,2 11.9 20.6.1982 109 20.2 9.2 34.9 11.0 9.2 21.6.1982 100 3.0 13.0 1.0 22.6.1982 100 8.0 5.0 23.6.1982 50 4.0 14.0 Trip 5 29.6.1982 67 24.0) 3.0 18.0 3.0 1.8 30.6.1982 67 48.0 21.0 43.5 4.5 1.7.1982 67 7.5 10.5 9.0 1.5 1.5 Trip 6 7.7.1982 198 20.7 5.0 19.2 8.7.1982 198 17.2 Т1 21.2 2.0 3.5 9.7.1982 198 1.5 3.0 8.1 1,5 5 10.7.1982 35 8.6 14.3 8.6 11.7.1982 35 60.2 22,6 45.7 11.3 12.7.1982 35 11.3 8.6 17.2 2.9 Trip 7 23.7.1982 25 24.7.1982 25 25.7.1982 25 2.0 16.0 26.7.1982 34 5.8 2.9 14.7 27.7.1982 34 2.9 5.8 11.6 28.7.1982 34 2.9 2.9 152 Victorian Nat. considered. Double-sided adhesive tape was attached to the door of a large number of traps, including many that were disturbed. No hairs recognizable as being from sugar gliders (Petaurus breviceps), Greater Gliders (Petauroides volans) or possums (Trichosurus vulpecula and Pseudocheirus peregrinus) were collected, although these species had all been observed at some of the sites. The brush-tailed possum (7: vulpecula), a potential suspect, was common at Site | but not at the other two sites. However, no hairs from dingoes were recorded either. Method adopted to reduce the disturbance Assuming that dingoes were the cause of disturbance, measures were taken to deter them. Yellow rain-coated scarecrows, orange flashing roadlights, blaring transistor radios and blazing camp fires were attempted in that order. They were placed near the site, but of sufficient distance to not influence small mammals. Each deterrent was effect- ive for the first night of its use but no longer. Attempts were then made to lure dingoes away from the sites by cooking beef off-cuts approximately 500 metres from the sites. Even if they did succumb to the odours, there was no reduction in the rate of disturbance. The final solution was to have people sleep close to where the traps were set. Table 2 shows the effectiveness of this by the reduced disturbance during the later trips. Discussion The suspicion of dingoes as the agents of disturbance is based on circumstantial but substantial evidence. Foxes have been suggested as a further alternative but neither Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) they nor their signs were observed near the sites. The impact of disturbance on the research project could not be objectively assessed. One of the trips was abandoned because of the problem and the methods were repeated at a later date. Before the problem was solved, the traps were checked frequently during the night and although it is accepted that some traps were closed for some time, it is considered that the methods were reasonably tested in each situation. Whether or not animals were taken from the traps is unknown. The fact that traps without captive animals as well as those with them were disturbed suggests that the disturbing animal was seeking the bait. However, at Site 1, two frequently caught Antechinus stuartii individuals failed to appear in traps during the final days of the project. They may have fallen victim to the suspected dingoes, or they may have dispersed or died through natural causes. No other individuals were obviously missing from the records. Acknowledgements Dr. Chris Dickman of the Department of Zoology at the University of Western Australia critically reviewed the manuscript. REFERENCES Myers, K., Thackway, К. M., and Read, V. T., (1984) Faunal survey — principles and problems IN К. Myers, C. В. Margules and 1. Musto (Ed's) Survey Methods for Nature Conservation (Vol. 1), Proc. Workshop, Adelaide, 1983:217-66. Read, V. T., (1984) The Survey of Small Mammal Communities in Forest Environments of Australia, M. Resource and Environmental Studies thesis, Australian National University, Read, У. T., Malafant, K. W. J. and Myers, К. A comparison of Grid and Index-line Trapping Methods for Small Mammal Surveys submitted to Aust. J. Wildlife Res. 153 Naturalist Note Another Strange Foraminifera Found at Black Rock. Port Phillip Bay. Boderia turneri (Suborder Allogromiina) By О. Е. MCINNES* In the Victorian Nat. V. 100(6) under the heading “А strange Foraminifera found at Black Rock” a description was given of Shepheardella, a foram that looked like a thin thread of red cotton with fine root-like processes called myxopodia, streaming out from each end. The strange story was told of how the Shepheardella broke up into many parts and then rejoined to form one complete Shepheardella again. (anastomose); most Forams are marine and most have small calcareous shells, but one suborder has only a chitinous outside layer instead of a shell, and the chitinous layer is flexible and capable of changing shape. This suborder is named the Allogromiina and it contains both the Shepheardella and the foram now to be described. On the bottom of petri dishes kept in marine aquaria could be seen, now and again, a tiny piece Fig. 1. Boderia turneri: various shapes (а) Баг = 5mm (b,c) bar = 2mm. This article is about quite a different Foram, but one that is still closely related to the Shepheardella. The Foraminifera are single celled animals like amoebae but with fine threadlike pseudopodia which can join together *129 Waverley Road, East Malvern 3145. 154 of what seemed to be brown seaweed stuck on the glass. It was 1 to 4mm long and irregular in shape, but on examination with the low power microscope, from each pointed irregularity there was a tuft of fine ‘roots’. On further examination, these fine ‘roots’ were seen to be the same as the myxopodia of Shepheardella. Victorian Nat. Fig. 2. Водета turneri (a) first division (Баг = Imm) (b) formation of ovals (bar = 0,1mm) (c) clusters forming in ovals (d) escape of flagellates (bar = 0.1mm). Greater magnification revealed that it was one of the Foraminifera characterised by a chitinous outside skin but with variable shape (see Fig. 1). One feature is that sometimes from one projecting corner, the myxopodia stream out like a long river then branch into an array of fine threads as in Fig. Қа). The myxopodia, which are the pseudopodia of the animal, are best described as a river of protoplasm, a river that may be short or very long, breaking up into tributaries then into streams here and there joining and forming a network. The remarkable part is that, not only do all parts of the river system carry a flow inwards but, amazingly, also carry a flow outwards, bringing food particles in and carrying waste particles out. Sometimes even large masses can be seen caught in the flow, bumping along, stopping, then on again, continuing until the body of the foram is reached. Here the incoming load flows into the body of the foram where it is churned around in an inside current, the internal current must then carry the waste material outside where it is taken away by the outgoing current of the myxopodia. Perhaps some material is rejected before entering the body as some large particles have been seen to be caught up in the outgoing flow as soon as they arrive. This foram was named Boderia turneri by Strethill Wright (1867) and his description includes Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) some observations about the reproductive process. As I have had the opportunity to observe this process of reproduction several times, and as these Observations are different to those of Strethill Wright, it has been suggested that these observations be placed on record, hence this article. The specimens of Boderia I have seen are always the brown seaweed colour when seen with transmitted light but with top lighting look more a grey colour. In size they can vary from Imm to 5mm in length and up to 2mm wide. The shape in always irregular. like a series of bays and pointed headlands from which stream the myxopodia, which may be short, like fine roots or long, like a river system. The myxopodia change in length from time to time but the inward and outward flow continues always. If a myxopodium breaks, the ends branch out and meander around until they touch, then they join up, and continue as before. The first sign of reproduction is the breaking up of the foram into 20 to 30 parts each shaped like fingers or long ovals, sometimes very irregular, (as shown in Fig, 2(a) and 2(b), then usually by the next day these parts will divide into tiny ovals 0.07mm to 0.lmm in length and 0.05mm to 0.07mm in width; some of the ovals may still be joined together (Fig. 2(b)). The contents of the ovals are granular in appearance, similar to the contents of the foram. 155 Fig. 3. Boderia turneri flagellate form (a) bar = 0.002mm (b) at rest in upright postition (c-g) five day old flagellates (bar = 0.006mm) (c) side view (d-f) view from above (g) view when flagellate is vertical. At a later stage the contents of the ovals are seen to be clustered into a dense clump near the centre of the oval (Fig. 2(c)). About 12 hours later some of the ovals will show a few flagellates swimming around inside the oval and other ovals will be a packed mass of flagellates swimming actively around, every now and again one will escape out through the neck of the oval and swim out into the great unknown. (Fig. 2d). Under 800 x magnification they were seen to be jelly-bean shaped with a dense round area at the front and the very vigorous swimming action of a flagellate, although I could not actually see the flagellum. However with the help of Dr. Richard Hamond and his super objectives using the “Nomarski” system of illumination the flagellate was seen as shown in Fig. 3(a). The length of the body of the flagellate was approx. 0.002mm. Thousands of flagellates could be seen but 156 most were consumed as soon as they emerged by the various protozoans moving around. One observation of interest was that some flagellates came to a resting position in a vertical stance with the dense front end at the top and the rear end stuck to the glass as in Fig. (3b). To avoid this predation I transferred one Boderia to a fresh petri dish clear of debris and predators. At first it adhered to the bottom of the dish (in a form similar to Fig. 2b) and then it developed to the stage of small ovals as in Figs. 2(c) - 2(d). Later the bean shaped flagellates as in Fig. 3(a) could be seen moving around inside the ovals but this time the dense nucleus at one end was tinged a bright red colour, this made observation much easier. When the flagellates emerged from the ovals, they moved with a side to side swinging movement with the red nucleus trailing along at the rear end, at times the flagellate would gyrate around and Victorian Nat. Fig. 4. Boderia turneri (a) before division (Баг = 5mm) (b) ovals with *Euglenoids" inside (bar = 0.1mm) (c) various shapes assumed by Euglenoids (bar = 0.016mm). Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) around as though tied to an anchor, then the final stage would be for the jelly bean shaped flagellate to come toa stop in the vertical position and this time the red colour of the nucleus was quite easily seen in the upper position. Hundreds could be seen resting in this vertical stance, always red spot upward. From this position some would gyrate around or swim away with the side to side motion. Up to this time I had never been able to see any actual flagellum but after looking vainly with 800x magnification, I changed to 400x and with a slight alteration to the lighting then saw the flagellum at last. No wonder I had not seen it, I was looking for the flagellum at the front but there it was trailing out behind. Although close to the limit of vision I was able to observe the action of the flagellum for long periods and find an explanation of the unusual antics of the flagellates as follows; the flagellum, twice as long as the body and attached to the end of the body opposite the dense nucleus rests on and drags along the bottom like a soft wet rope as in Fig. 3(c). The gyrating motion is easy to understand if the flagellate is anchored to one spot by the flagellum. The forward motion is explained by a swinging from side to side attached at the front by the flagellum as in Fig. 3(d)-3(f). The resting stage with the flagellate vertical with the dense nucleus at the top is shown in Fig. 3(g). The observations of the breakdown of Boderia turneri into 20 or 30 initial parts and then into tiny ovals were similar to those of Strethill Wright. However, instead of flagellates appearing from the ovals, he describes *a swarm of naviculoid bodies. . . from each of which, in a day or so, there issued a minute nucleated amoeboid mass, These little amoebae existed for weeks...near the surface without assuming an envelope or putting forth pseudopodia? I had observed the process of Boderia breaking down into smaller parts then into the tiny ovals several times, and the result had always been the formation of flagellates, never was there anything like the amoebaes that Strethill Wright recorded. But, on January 19th 1986 I found a Boderia in one of my petri dishes, and made the following observations: From my notes (condensed). January 19 11.00am Found another Водета. Quite unusual in shape, nearly filled 5.0mm field of microscope. Is it ready to break up? (Fig 4a) 2.00pm Yes, it has started to break up into small parts. Will keep a time check on it. 7.00pm Boderia completely broken into thin lines and 157 some of these аге starting to contract into small ovals. Over 200 thin lines. 11.00pm Nearly all the thin lines have divided into small ovals that cover an area in a circle 10mm wide. January 20 10.00am Ovals not fully developed, some still attached. Dense clusters can be seen formed in the ovals. Most ovals still connected by thin strands of protoplasm. January 21 11.00am A breakthrough? I have observed with 800x (40x water - immersion and 20x eyepiece) at least 8 amoebae inside an oval. They are 0.016mm long 0.009mm wide, Their movement is similar to à Euglena. The more Llook at them the more they look like Euglena. (Note, Euglena are cigar shaped flagellates that van alter the body shape rapidly). Their rapid movement is quite different to the slow spreading of amoebae. They are not amoebae, 1 will call them "Euglenoids", Some of the ovals are still connected together and with the "Euglenoids" inside look like Fig. 4(b). January 22 11.00am Have spent half an hour watching the "Euslenoids" that have hatched out of the ovals of the Boderia, they are now moving around the outside of the ovals. The “Euglenoids” are long ovals in shape and move and swim rapidly with one end to the front but their shape can be quickly altered to any shape from a normal fat cigar to the shape of a sphere then to a flattened pancake then back to the long oval then a swim forward. Round granules can be seen inside the "Euglenoids". See Fig. 4(c). This change is tvpical of the action of a Euglena, there is simply no sign of the flowing аспоп of an amoeba, but even with 800% magnification and with “Modulation Contrast" 1 cannot see any sign of the flagellum although it must be there to cause rhe vigorous swimming action (unless there are cilia too fine to see). Strethill Wright states that an amoeboid mass emerged from the ovals, and it is easy to see how the "Euglenoids" could be thought to be amoebae, the contortions in shape would lead to that conclusion unless vou were also familiar with the contortions of Euglena. Now a question arises, Is the Boderia with the reproductive "Euglenoids' a different species from the Boderia with the reproductive flagellates? Or are they two phases of the one species? It is known that some species of Foramanitera have а dimorphic life evele (Albani, 1979) with a ‘schizonr’ asexually producing embryos (possibly 158 the euglenoid form here) which grow into a form known as the "gamont" which then produces gametes (often flagellated). These gametes then conjugate to form a zygote which developes into the schizont form. Some species may even have a trimorphic life cycle. I have observed the breakdown of Boderia into ovals and then into flagellates several times now but this is the only time 1 have observed the breakdown into ovals with “Euglenoids”. Although the ovals are the same іп size, there are hundreds of flagellates in an oval but only about up to 25 “Euglenoids” in an oval. Strethill Wright states that his “Amoebae” floated on the surface and that later he found minute Boderia on the bottom of the dish but in my case as it was summer 1 had to put the petri dish back into the aquarium to keep cool. On January 23rd I searched among the empty ovals for half an hour but did not see any trace of the “Fuglenoids” If they had risen to the surface I would have lost them in the aquarium or they would have fallen as prey to the various protozoans in the water. An observation showing the similarity in behaviour between Shepheardella and Boderia іп breaking down into small parts then rejoining together to form one complete body. September 121h 85 Found а Boderia 4.5mm long 0.75mm wide. Close to side of one of the petri dishes. September 13th Moved Boderia to the centre of dish to observe with higher power but it broke into two pieces. 1.75mm long and 0.75mm long. Within 5 minutes myxopodia were streaming out, September 15th The two Boderia have disappeared, there is just a network of threads. Is it in the stage to form into the tiny ovals? Observed with the 40x water immersion objective and 10x evepiece the whole network of threads is seen to be streaming in all directions, joining up and separating, with clumps of the contents moving in апу direction but no sign of concentration into larger clumps. The direction of the flow of elumps seems to be quite erratic, although there seems to be a constant flow of the protoplasm in both directions in the threads, the clumps seem to move in one way then reverse and go the other way. September 16th What has happened? There is no sign of the network of myxopodia but nearby is a complete Boderia 3.0mm long and 0.5mm wide with Victorian Nat, тухоро а streaming from 7 to 8 points, Has the — What a remarkable creature! network of wildly streaming threads and elumps combined to again form the original Boderig? The КЕГЕКЕМСЕУ Shepheardella reformed after breaking down into Albani, A. (1979) Recent shallow warer foraminifera а dozen small pieces (as described Welfare rom NSW. Aust, Marine Sciences Assoc P x MelInnes, D. E... (1983), А strange Foraminiferan found e es, 1983). с "ria he e Вене ү 4 i Метпе ‚ 1983). The Boderia has gone one better at Black Rock, Port Phillip Bay, Victorin Nat. and reformed after breaking down to just threads 100:251-55. о! streaming myxopodia. Strethill Wright, T., (1867) On Boderia turneri (nov. gen.) Again we can say, as we did with Shepheardella, and its reproduction, Journal Anat. Physiol. 1, 335. Comment on the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act, 1987 In Victoria, many species of llora and fauna have become extinct since European settlement and while these losses were probably unrecognized and certainly unmourned during the first century of occupation, the last 50 years has brought on increasing awareness ofthe quality of our environment; this has been reflected in a number of largely unconnected Parliamentary Acts that have sought to reduce the extinction rate, The Flora and Fauna Guarantee brings most aspects of flora and fauna conservation under one Act. The Act has also changed the emphasis from protection of individual species, as was inherent in the Wildflowers and Native Plants Protection Act 1958 and Wildlife Act 1975, to that of protection of species or communities through the protection of their habitat. This legislative change of emphasis has been made to catch up with the technical realities of conservation and is welcome, For those who haven't read it, the Act intends “...to establish a legal and administrative structure to enable and promote the conservation of Victoria's native flora and fauna and to provide for a choice of procedures which can be used for the conservation, management or control of flora and fauna and the management of potentially threatening processes? Lofty aspirations indeed and Ms Kirner, the Minister for Conservation, Forests and Lands (CFL), should be congratulated for having a go at what has always been a difficult political, legislative and technical problem. The Act contains two main approaches to conservation, the best of which is undoubtedly the establishment of а new seven member committee of scientific experts which will streamline the previously cumbersome operation of focussing special attention (‘Listing in the new terminology) on either threatened species, threatened communities or potentially endangering processes. The committee have been left with vague terms of reference and will have to decide their own definitions and measures of endangeredness. The final recommendation for ‘Listing’ is to be approved by the Minister. Once listed, the species, communities or processes must be investigated by the Director-General of CFL who will provide an Action Statement that deals with conservation and management. For the ‘critical habitat’ of a listed species or community, a short term protection of up to 2 years and 60 days is to be provided; in special circumstances, by an Interim Conservation Order (ICO) which has power over all land, public and private. The second main approach is the preparation, by CFL, of a Conservation Strategy which will set out how conservation and management objectives for all flora and fauna are to be achieved. In addition, the Director-General of CFL may direct that management plans be prepared for any group of flora or fauna. Conceptually the Act is good but in the area of management and implementation of action it is vague and inconclusive. The ‘Strategy’, Action Statements, preparation of management plans ete. falls back to the operation of CFL which has been shown to lack either funds, manpower, efficiency or energy when dealing with exactly these questions in the past. How does the Minister propose to overcome these problems? Will extra funds be allocated? Will extra staff be allocated to field research from the plump upper and Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) 159 middle management area? The information that forms the basis of management decisions simply hasn’t been collected in the field. The Interim Conservation Order, which has been heralded as a major initiative, is at best a short term stop-gap measure to provide protection against unspecified dangers and at worst will be dangerously counter productive. It has already stretched further the strained relations between country landholders and CFL through statuary provisions that appear overbearing and unjustified, There is precedence for private landholders bulldozing interesting areas of bush just to avoid the possibility of public interference. It is sad to see that the farming community, which to a large extent was the mainstay of the country Field Naturalist Groups and a constant source of data and specimens, should be alienated io the point of aggressive confrontation. In contrast to the threats implicit to private ‘land managers’, the way in which [COs apply to public land managers is far from clear. It is on public land that the major conservation battles have and probably will take place (e.g. Burramys on Mt Hotham and the forests of the Errinundra Plateau) and the new ground rules must be clearly explained. As a statement of intent, this Act is an excellent step forward, as a committment to action it is decidedly shaky, In large part, the successful implementation of the crucial management section of the Act will rest with the research staff of CFL. It will not work in the current atmosphere of cynicism caused by underfunding in the research wing. Work-to-rule at Arthur Rylah Institute, Heidelberg As reported in our last issue (Vol. 4, no. 104, p. 130), Wildlife Management and Freshwater Fisheries Management Officers of the Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands (DCFL) have undertaken industrial action claiming that continual reductions in staffing and funding cannot proceed hand- in-hand with a steady increase of new programs and initiatives. According to the Victorian Public Service Association, API staff have been placed under an ever- increasing burden of work which many officers have addressed by working longer hours, taking work home and by continually deferring due leave. However, for many staff, the burgeoning work-load is overshadowed by their concerns as to the long-term effects of inadequate staff resources upon the conservation of Victoria’s fish and wildlife. As a result of negotiations, DCFL has now accepted that selected programs on both fish and wildlife must be deferred, and that the Department, rather than individual officers, will bear the responsibility for any ramifications. DCFL has also agreed to small increases in staff for worst-affected sections of the two Divisions, however it will be some time before the precise number of new positions will be finalised. While these measures, together with a ‘work-to-rule’ banning unpaid over-time, will bring limited relief for pressured wildlife and fisheries staff, morale remains low at the Arthur Rylah Institute and at other research sections of the DCFL. This does not auger well for flora and fauna conservation in Victoria. Australian Natural History Medallion 1987 Dr Robert H. Green, Curator of Zoology, Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston, has been selected to receive the award for 1987. The Medallion will be presented at the General Meeting on Monday, 9 November 1987 at 8pm., and Dr Green will give the Medallion address. The meeting will be held at the Royal Society, 9 Victoria Street, Melbourne, and a buffet dinner will be available there from 6pm., price $12.50. If you plan to come to the dinner, please notify the Acting Secretary, ЕМ.СУ., National Herbarium, Birdwood Ave. South Yarra, 3141, because we need to know numbers for the caterers. Payment to be made on the night. 160 Victorian Nat. Library Report 1986/87 During the year the library has benefitted from donations or bequests from members, most particularly from the library of the late Cicely Allen, which contained many books which our library did not have, or later editions than the ones we possessed. Donations have also been received from Tom May, Dr. Elizabeth Turner, Mrs Flor- ence Vasey, John Strong, Mrs Hilary Weatherhead and Miss Pat Carolan. Notable additions to the library, from donation or by purchase include Flora of Australia v.46; Zoological catalogue of Australia ул & 2; Duncan/ Isaac: Ferns and allied plants of Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia; Hollands: Eagles, hawks and falcons, Ride: Guide to native mammals of Australia; and Pether- ham/Kok: Plants of the Kimberley region of Western Australia. In all 72 books were added. The library will in future be receiving Australian wildlife research, as a result of a new exchange agreement with CSIRO; and a subscription has been taken ош for Australian mammalogy, at the request of the Mammal Survey Group. It is gratifying to see that the library continues to be well-used. 101 books and periodicals were borrowed during the year. It appears, however, that some members are unclear about the con- ditions under which books can be borrowed. Ву- law 901) reads, in part, The maximum retention of library books without renewal shall be two months. Books may be renewed monthly for а maximum period of six months provided no other member requires the book. Sincethe library is there for the use of members we have no wish to impose undue restrictions, but as the only time that there 15 access 10 the library is during meetings, many people wish to use it Гог reference only, and the continuing absence of books can be very frustrating. If you have books overdue from the library, please return them. In November a very successful book sale was held, of books, mainly duplicates, withdrawn from the library, wich raised nearly $800. Council has agreed that some of this money should be used for the care and maintenance of the archives, and itis hoped to put this matter in hand in the coming year. Some cataloguing and indexing has already taken place. We recently acquired an interesting photograph album from the 1940s of the Nature Show exhibits and other activities of the Club and the Junior Field Naturalists Club, now the Haw- thorn Juniors. A start has been made on the slide library of Club activities, with a collection from Claire Taylor. We were also fortunate to obtain a large collection of slides from the late Joyce Annear. There have been few interlibrary loan requests this year, but we have had two requests for archival material: one from the Phillip Institute of Tech- nology for photographs taken on the Club excur- sion to the Grampians in the 18905, and the other from the Australian National Gallery for material relating to J. W. Lindt, М. J. Caire and W, Baldwin Spencer, in connection with an exhibition of nine- teenth century photography which they аге mounting for the Bicentenary. Finally 1 should like to thank Mrs Olive O'Hagan for her continuing help with the library, and also those who have acted as library assistants at Group meetings. Sheila Houghton Hon. Librarian FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Reports of Recent Activities General Meeting Monday, 13th July The Speaker for the evening was Mr. John Coventry, the Curator of Herpetology at the Museum of Victoria, who spoke on “Рто- hibited Imports/Exports – Reptiles? Mr. Coventry began with a rundown of the regulations set out in the Wildlife Protection Act to protect plants and animals potentially, or actually endangered. Many Vol. 104 No. 5 (1987) third world countries have not signed the internation wildlife protection treaty and continue to allow endangered species to be imported and exported. Australia, as a sig- natory to this treaty, must do all it can to halt this exploitative trade. It is because of this obligation that the Museum is called on to provide an identification service for the Customs Department. Any animal products apprehended by 161 Customs and suspected to be from ап endangered species are sent to the Museum for indentification. Indentification can be quite difficult for inexperienced people and Mr. Coventry told of one case where what was initially thought to be crocodile skin turned out to be moulded kangaroo skin. If an item turns out to be prohibited it may be either kept by the Museum, returned to its place of origin at the expense of the importer of destroyed. Attempts are being made to educate people so that they will not attempt to bring prohibited items into the country. Buyers for large retail chains are being taught to use simplified keys to distinguish between different leathers and so tell the legal from the illegal, By taking this trouble importers will not have to risk the very large fines they will face if found in possession of prohibited imports, There are displays in all Australian inter- national airport departure lounges so that the public will be aware of the regulations. Mr. Coventry believes that the situation regarding prohibited imports is improving in Australia as he sees many fewer turtle shells and such things than he once did. Мг. Coventry went on to give many in- stances of operations to smuggle protected species into and out of the country and finished by showing specimens of items (shoes, handbags, turtle-shell guitars, etc) which had been siezed by Customs. Exhibits - Under microscopes: a stalked jellyfish from Black Rock, a walking jellyfish from Sydney and a geological specimen under a microscope don- ated to the FNCV by Dr. Wishart. Mr. Dan McInnes, - Fungal spores and a Eucalyptus leaf epidermis under a microscope. Mr. Urwin Bates. - An album of old FNCV photographs. Mrs, Sheila Houghton. ~ An exhibit of Baragwanathia and older Silurian flora from Yea has been sent to a geological conference in Canada. Dr. Jack Douglas. Nature Notes - И was observed that on a reef at Cronulla, N.SW., there was a lot of Cunjevoy and a much higher density of sea urchins than can be seen locally. The urchins were about 5cm in diameter and more than 50 could be counted in a 3m circle. Mr. Dan McInnes. - Populations of Silver Gulls have increased well beyond their natural limits and they are outcompeting other native sea-birds for breeding sites. Although this is recognised there is a lot of debate in many quarters about whether and how to control them. Mr. Tom Sault. - Goannas were observed in kakadu standing upright and looking like a stump. Miss Marie Allender. — The dramatic landforms of Kakadu and their beauty especially in the morning light were remarked on by Mr. Andy Blackburn. и Proving their point ‘Ants are among the most ubiquitous, abundant and familiar of insects’ So begins the introduction to a book which arrived recently in the Club's library. When the sticky tape was removed and the cardboard container opened thousands of ants swarmed from within. And the book? Vol, 2 of the Zoological Catalogue of Australia = on ants! We hope the performance will not be repeated with the arrival from Canberra of Vol. 3 – on spiders. == General Meeting Monday, 10th August The Speaker for the evening was Dr. Robin Hirst, Director of the Planetarium at the Museum of Victoria, who gave a talk entitled “Where on Earth Are We?” He began by pointing out that just as a building, like the Museum, has an address 162 and may be located by referring to the other buildings and streets in the City, so may our Earth be located among the other planets of the Universe, After locating the position of the Museum on the Earth, Dr. Hirst began a journey outward from the Earth through the Universe. He discussed such things as: the relationship of the Earth to the Sun and the Victorian Nat. Continued from inside front cover. Geology Group — First Wednesday Wednesday, 7th October. Some Aspects of Volcanics in Victoria (title to be confirmed) Mr. Е, B. Joyce. Wednesday, 4th. November. Mr. Marcus Marsden. (subject to be confirmed) Wednesday, 2nd December. Member's Night, Mammal Survey Group - First Tuesday Tuesday, 6th October. To be announced. Tuesday, 27th October (November meeting) to be announced. Tuesday, Ist December. Christmas Member's Night. Microscopical Group — Third Wednesday Wednesday, 21st October. “Movie and Still Photography through the Microscope” Dr. E. Peters. Wednesday, 18th November. “Тһе Ostracoda!’ Mr. Russell Ward. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members and visitors are invited to attend any Group Excursions. Botany Group Saturday, 24th October. Bush Reserves at St. Andrews and Panton Hill. Leader: Ms. Dorothy Mahler. Saturday, 28th November. Sorrento Back Beach. Mammal Survey Group Saturday, 31st October – Tuesday, 3rd November. Camp. Summer in Bogong National Park ALPINE WILDFLOWER RAMBLES Environment sensitive, small group holidays visiting Victoria’s magnificent high country. Our fully accommodated, leisurely 5-day trips provide an interesting learning experience and a comfortable and memorable holiday for the nature conscious traveller. Escorted by local nurserywoman & wildflower expert. Home-cooked meals. Commence in Wangaratta December to February $395. Brochure & details: BOGONG JACKADVENTURES. PO. Box 221, Oxley 3678. Telephone: (057) 273382 or Victour offices. other planets of our Solar System, other objects such as comets and meteors in our Solar System, the position of our Sun amongst the other stars in our galaxy, the Milky Way, and the fact that our galaxy is only one of so many in the Universe. The talk was well illustrated by slides and many questions followed. Exhibits — under microscopes: a section of a rock containing ocolites (small spherical rock particles with a concentrically laminated structure), crystals of Salacene illuminated with plane polarized light and a slide of butterfly scales arranged to look like a vase of flowers. Mr. Dan McInnes. - Minerals: Australite and a portion of an iron meteorite from Central Australia and Fulgarite (sand fused by a lightning strike) from Fraser Is., Qld. Mr. Andy Blackburn. — A copy of the 1871 edition of “The Mammals of Australia" illustrated by the Scott sisters (from the FNCV library) and a recent article in "Aust. Nat. History" on the Scott sisters and a specimen of the fungus Calostoma fuscum. Mrs. Sheila Houghton. — А Blackfellows Bread fungus. Mr. Tom Sault. C. M. Ashburner Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: FNCV, c/- National Heibariüm, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS? To ай, interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as e Ss naturalists. Patron 14“ d His bd v ud The Rev Dr John.Davis* Mevaughey The Governor of Victoria. ++ Кеу OtfiesBearers 1987-1988 MW President: Dr JACK DOUGLAS, 43 'Sünhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 A.H.) Vice President: Mr G. “LOVE, Р.О. Вох 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary: Mr. RON PEARSON, 23 Avenza St., Mentone, 3194 (584 7443) Hon. Treasurer: Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Cres., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 А.Н.) Subscription-Secretary: Мг М. STANFORD, с/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Editor: Mr. R. THOMSON, РЕМСУ, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (344 5704 B.H.) Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, ЕМСУ, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 A.H.) Excursion Secretary: Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter: Conservation Co-ordinator: Мт. STEPHEN HENRY, 22 Odenwald Rd., Eaglemont, 3084. Sales Officer (Books): Mrs H. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148. (211 4997) Microscopical: Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. api i ae rates for 1987 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) РЕН 55020 $25.00 Joint Metropolitan Members . ha АЕРУ У ЗАЛА: $27.00 Country/Interstate/Retired Members st се А „ыу ttret лекс: - $23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members............ НЕЕ: МЕГЕ Е ..$25.00 Student (full-time) . - — T qur mene AB EIU Junior (under 18; no ‘Victorian Naturalist) Subscription to Victorian Naturalist 122-7 - k Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist... ... о А РЕНИ $30.00 Affiliated Clubs ... а URL DERE ВИ $25.00 Subscriber Clubs aq Е p HDI ANS det eee К $23.00 Individual Journals x песен = ^ с $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after end of March тако Гы O8. gdoct-6009 7 ер JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD. 1-13 ABBOTSFORD ST WEST MELBOURNE. 328-4774. \ Мо!. 104, Мо. 6 Мом December 1987 "err OF ор alg ae i Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA $3.50 Registered by Australia Post, Publication Мо. V.B.P. 1268 ЕМСУ DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS Note: Until further notice, General Meetings will be held at the Royal Society Hall, 9 Victoria Street, Melbourne. Monday, 8th February, 8.00 p.m. Cam Beardsell “Fauna of the Melbourne Area”. Monday, 7th March, 8.00 p.m. Robert King “Conservation of Geological Features". New Members Metropolitan: Mr. Stephen Holliday - North Balwyn. Miss Lesley Wheeler — Glen Iris. Mr. Richard Kastraby - Altona. Mr. Gary Richardson – Frankston. Joint Metropolitan: Mr. Ian D. Enderby and Mrs. Margaret Enderby - Montmorency. Ms. Dianne Beevers and Mr. Geoffrey Beevers – Fitzroy. Mr. Angel Villamarzo and Mrs. Valentine Villamarzo - Box Hill. Country: Mr. Alan Jenkins - Ballan. FNCV EXCURSIONS Friday 8th - Saturday 16th Jan. 1988. ‘Tasmania. See Sept-Oct Victorian Nat. for details or ring Marie Allender. January 23rd-26th. Annual Australia Day Alpine Campout. Dargo High Plains. Contact Will Ashburner 789 8485 (AH). Sunday 7th Feb. Mt. Donna Buang. Insects and General. Leader: Peter Carwardine. Coach will leave Batman Ave. at 9.15. Fare: $14. Bring a picnic lunch. Saturday 12th - Monday 14th March. Please keep this date free for the Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association Weekend. Program details will appear in the next Victorian Naturalist. GROUP MEETINGS Note: Until further notice, Group meetings will be held at the Astronomers Residence, Birdwood Avenue. (A few metres nearer the Shrine than the Herbarium.) Botany Group - Second Thursday Thursday, llth February. “Food Plants of Butterflies and Moths”. Mr. John Reid. Mr. Reid will lead an excursion on 27th February to follow up this talk. Contact Margaret Potter. Day Group – Third Thursday No meetings in December or January. Thursday, 18th February: Garden City and West Gate Parks. Meet at the bus terminus 11.30 am, or catch bus 201 at Corner Flinders and Elizabeth Streets at 11.10 am. Microscopical Group - Third Wednesday Wednesday, 20th January: Members’ night, bring your own exhibits. Wednesday, 17th February: Making your own micro- scope. For beginners. Mammal Survey Group First Tuesday, 2nd February. Dr. Cath Handesyde “Life style and veneral diseases of the Koala”. Easter Trip: Meds Corner, Mallee. — Volume 104, Number 6 А November Decemb à _ ISSN 0042-5 оа ао NOLO. еб «A ау о о WAIL а Е 168 Notes from the National Herbarium of Victoria Мо. 6 - Recording the Distribution of Weeds in Victoria by P. S. Short........... 169 Naturalist Note: Prey Constriction in the Adelaide Hills Copperhead Australaps labialis by T. P. Могејеу......................... 175 Habitat of Gunn’s Orchid (Sarcochilus australis) from the Northern Atrzeleckis, Victoria byiDavid- Cheal, peri obey oy ee 176 News: Green's Bush, Mornington Peninsula.................. 177 News: Rivers ald “Streams inr VIelotias оаа. 177 Notes on Birth and Early Development in Three species of Common Victoriam Reptiles ЬН Banks У с See e.a па ан amp Ttg a wi 178 Naturalist Note: A Puzzling Bottlebrush from Western Victoria by TE кекш а ГЕЛ эу А, Эв АЛАК IU 183 LOG Ва РАНО d ALL ККЕ AMI moon STI GVA ON ae ауле Л 184 External Sexing of Galaxid Fish by Paul Humphries........... 185 Naturalist Note: The Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster in Melbourne ty MELON) ва О О олор Ы Ено 186 Naturalist Note: Behaviour of Common Imperial White Butterflies py Michael «Buabu uidet cede ЗА pce alata om йу Не Er P SCENE 187 Naturalist Note: The Smokey Mouse (Pseudomys fumeus) Outside Miclora и Ву С Мау л А „Ж е. Ол 188 Australian Natural History Medallion 1987: Robert G. H. Green 189 Naturalist Review: ‘Flora of Australia’ V 45 by D. B. Foreman. . 190 ЕМСУ trip report: Kangaroo 151апа......................... 191 VENCA menm теро mm tor рн ны а ти ме 193 Cover Illustration: Gravid Southern Water Skink, Sphenomorphus tympanum (see page 178) photo: Chris Banks. President’s Note It won’t be long before it’s time to pay Club subscriptions again, and I’m worried about the increasing numbers who fail to renew each year. There will always be some who for one reason or another are unable to do so, but despite regular Club intake of new members, there has been a decline in membership over the past few years. For most of you the ‘Victorian Naturalist’ is your only regular contact, and your Council feels that it may not be offering what you seek. The best way to rectify that is to contact me with your suggestions, or better still, send your contributions to the Editor who will consider offerings in all appropriate sections. Country members in particular should be able to provide considerably more input of ‘Naturalist Notes’ theme than we receive at present: – Something after the style of the Platypus sightings on page 122 of the last July/August issue, for example. We want to ensure that the Club remains a large and respected natural history association, and your continued membership is vital for this. I also remind you that for many members (students, teachers, scientists, for example) subscriptions may be tax deductible. Jack Douglas President, FNCV 168 Victorian Nat. An analysis of the flora of Victoria by Ross (1976) showed that 747 (22.49%) of 3,322 species of vascular plants were naturalized aliens. Previous records (Ewart 1931) reveal that in 1909 there were 363 alien species in Victoria, By 1928 the number had increased to 461. The figures indicated an addition of almost six alien species per year for over 100 years. The naturalization of alien species is an on going process and in 1984 approximately 825 naturalized species were recorded for Victoria (Forbes et al. 1984). Some naturalized species, such as cereals and pasture grasses, are valuable additions to Victoria and are of little threat to native flora. However the majority cannot be seen in this manner. Many infest agricultural land (there are over 100 declared noxious weeds in Victoria) and some invade tracts of native vegetation, Furthermore many alien species, although as yet untroublesome, have the potential to become a problematic addition to our flora. For example Conran (1987) has recently drawn attention to a population of Kniphofia uvaria (L.) Hook.f. (Red Hot Poker) which is established on Phillip Island. In the 1985-86 season it was esti- mated that the 61 mature plants in the colony produced 550,000 seeds. The high fecundity of the population is also reflected by the presence of 15-20 seedlings and immature plants per square metre, The population of K. uvaria is established in a dune swale and the species certainly seems to have the potential to spread further in the dune system, to the detriment of native vegetation. The recognition of weeds, both natural- ized and native, and their distribution in Victoria is clearly of concern to conserv- ationists and agriculturalists. But how many * National Herbarium of Victoria, Dept, of Conservation Forests and Lands, Birdwood Ave., South Yarra 3141. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) Cut ГА 4 r У. l < ir concern in a изеји ап constrigtive manner? Ноу тапу rea collect weeds, Гог. Пе. National Нох of Victoria? The National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL), since its inception in 1853 by the then Government Botanist, Ferdinand Mueller, has been the State Government of Victoria’s centre for taxonomic research. It has been and remains the most important Victorian repository of dried plant specimens. This suggests that anyone wishing to obtain information on the intro- duction, spread and general distribution of weed species need only consult herbarium specimens at MEL. Well documented herb- arium collections should after all give information as to the locality, date of collection and collector’s name. In theory it should be possible to construct historical distribution maps of weed species from coll- ections. Sadly this is rarely possible. Even common weeds such as Cichorium intybus L. [Chicory], Hypochoeris glabra L. [Cat's- ear] and Chondrilla juncea L. [Skeleton Weed] are poorly represented. We may know, or think we know, the distribution of our weeds but clearly many of our distri- butional records are not substantiated by herbarium specimens deposited in MEL. In the absence of such specimens how can we be certain that a species recorded for a particular area was correctly identified? Anyone concerned about the intro- duction and spread of weeds and wishing to produce useful information should seriously consider collecting specimens for the National Herbarium of Victoria. Notes on collecting and preparing plant specimens are available from the Herbarium. Despite a general paucity of collections of many weeds it has been possible to compile historical distribution maps for some species and they are incorporated in this article. In the case of noxious weeds 169 distributions based only on herbarium records are compared with distributions recorded by Parsons (1973), who included both vouchered and unvouchered records in the preparation of maps. (The reference in the figure caption to ‘all records’ thus refers to records published by Parsons plus records based on herbarium specimens.) The dearth of herbarium collections in such cases is all too apparent. In including unvouchered or unsubstantiated records 1 have assumed that the species concerned were correctly identified. This applies not only to maps published by Parsons (1.c) but to published reports by others on the distribution and spread of species. Although few in number, collections housed at the Botany Department, Univers- ity of Melbourne (MELU), аз уе аз MEL, were consulted before distribution maps were compiled. The possibility that histori- cally interesting herbarium specimens are housed at MELU can never be overlooked. This is, at least partly, a reflection of the fact that Professor A. J. Ewart was associated with both MEL (as part-time Government Botanist) and the University of Melbourne (as Professor of Botany). Ewart also com- piled a Flora of Victoria (Ewart 1931) and wrote a number of articles on weeds (e.g. Ewart & Tovey 1906, Ewart 1909). Chrysanthemoides monilifera (L.) Norlindh [Boneseed| Compositae Boneseed, a native of South Africa, was cultivated in the Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne as early as 1858 (Mueller 1858), For a considerable time it seems to have stayed within the confines of gardens and Ewart (1931) merely recorded it as an ‘occas- ional garden escape’. Wheeler (1964) stated that boneseed ‘became established at Chel- tenham in 1908 and Brighton Beach in 1910. Ten years later it was spreading rapidly along coastal regions from Point Lonsdale to Lorne, and about the same time from Frankston to Arthur’s Seat, on the Mornington Peninsula’ (p. 225). Wheeler also noted that С monilifera was first noticed on the western slopes of the You Yangs in 1950. Parsons (1973) stated that ‘in 170 1910 it [was] recorded as being established at Cheltenham and Brighton Beach and soon afterwards in the You Yangs and on the Mornington Peninsula, but by 1930 it was still recorded as only an occasional escape. Since the 1940s the spread and development of boneseed has been remarkable. . > (p. 101). An examination of collections at MEL and MELU (table 1, fig. la-c) does not confirm the establishment of C. monilifera at either Cheltenham in 1908 or Brighton in 1910. A collection from the former locality does not seem to exist and that from the latter is labelled as being а cultivated specimen. The earliest specimen which may be wild collected was gathered near Geelong in 1910 (table 1). However the occurrence of boneseed at Lorne in the early 1920s is confirmed by the Gates' collection. The herbarium collections also fail to highlight the remarkable spread of boneseed, alluded to by Parsons, since the 1940s. It is also surprising that we lack specimens from the You Yangs, an area well known to be infested by the species. Norlindh (1943) recognized six subspecies of C monilifera. All collections cited in table 1 are referrable to the subspecies monilifera, However whether the unsubstatianted records only pertain to this subspecies is open to question. Jacobs and Pickard (1981) record C. monilifera subsp. rotundata (DC.) Norlindh for New South Wales as do Simmons and Flint (1986) in their study of the two subspecies in South Australia, Victoria and New South Wales. С. monilifera subsp. rotundata has also recently (5 Sept. 1985) been gathered by Randell Robinson (MEL 1553295) from Studley Park. Robinson has also gathered specimens (e.g. MEL 1553297) from Studley Park with morphological attributes somewhat intermediate between subsp. monilifera and subsp. rotundata. Dittrichia graveolens (L.) Greuter [Stinkwort] Compositae Stinkwort is native to the Mediterranean region and until recently was referred to the genus Jnula L. A record (Anon. 1893) of plants natural- ized in Victoria since 1889 listed 52 species, Victorian Nat. опе of which was Dittrichia graveolens. Ewart (1909) recorded that Stinkwort entered Victoria via South Australia and subsequently stated (Ewart 1931) that it is ‘a fetid weed, proclaimed for the whole State...widely spread in Victoria, and recorded as naturalized in 1893. This weed first appeared in 1850 in South Aust- ralia. ..and did not reach Gippsland until 1919 (Nowa Nowa)’ (p.1146). Parsons (1973) noted that the weed became firmly est- ablished in the Wimmera and southern Mallee during the first 20 years of this century. The collections at MEL and MELU (table 1, fig. 1 d-f) generally confirm the published findings on the weeds intro- duction to Victoria, at least in regard to the direction and timing of its spread. However its early abundance in the Western Districts is by no means indicated and there are mark- ed discrepancies between the maps prim- arily based on unsubstantiated records and those compiled entirely from herbarium specimens. Hypericum perforatum L. [St. John's Wort] Guttiferae This weed, a native to Europe, has long been known to have medicinal properties. Gerard (1597) noted that 'St. John's woort, with his flowers and seede boiled and drunk- en, provoketh urine, and is right good against the stone in the bladder and stoppeth the laske. The leaves stamped are good to be laide upon burnings, scaldings, and all wounds; and also for rotten and filthie ulcers. . . Dioscoroides saith, that the seed drunke for the space of fortie daies togither, cureth the Sciatica, and all aches that happen in the hips' (p. 433). French (1905) recorded that St. John's Wort was introduced to a garden in Bright in the 1880s by an elderly lady seeking to make use of its medicinal properties. Parsons (1982) says that the lady was a German midwife who acquired the plant because of its alleged ability to induce abortions. In any case her garden at Bright was soon overrun and seeds from uprooted plants thrown over her fence were quickly conveyed by stock to the Bright race-course andin a short time had spread along stock- Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) routes radiating from the township. , The plant was considered to be naturalized in 1893 (Anon. 1893). Its abundance in the Bright district was noted by Maiden (1900), who stated that ‘it is very abundant in paddocks and along the side of the road, the district being over large areas ablaze with its yellow flowers. . . ту driver called [it] the pest of the district’ (p.44). French (l.c.) recorded that by 1905 H. perforatum had spread from the Ovens Valley to Benalla, Rutherglen and Tallangatta and had successfully established itself around Omeo and the Dargo region. It was estimated that over 10,000 acres had been invaded in the 20-25 years since its introduction. Parsons (1973) noted that by 1917 it had spread further, with over 200,000 acres infested. Apparently it was dispersed by gold-miners то places such as Bendigo and Newstead, the seed being a contaminant of the chaff for their horses. The construction of railway lines also hastened its spread. From the accompanying maps (fig. 1 g- i) and the data in table 1 it is apparent that the published records and the information recorded by herbarium specimens match well, at least until about 1930. The collection from Box Hill Railway Station, gathered by French in 1908, does not seem to have been noted in publication, but is consistent with the observation that the species has spread along railway lines. However there are con- siderable discrepancies when the total dis- tribution of the species as inferred from herbarium records is compared with pub- lished records. Marrubium vulgare №. [Horehound] Labiatae Horehound, a member of the mint family is a native of Europe. Ferdinand Mueller (1885), in a book de- tailing plants suitable for cultivation in Australia, said horehound ‘can nowhere be unwelcome, as it does no unduly spread, ...has important medicinal propert- ies...and excellent honey’ (p. 209) M. vulgare was in fact cultivated at the Melbourne Botanic Gardens in 1852 (Ginn 1852). Ewart (1931) recorded that it was 'a 171 Table 1: Earliest Victorian records of Chrysanthemoides monilifera subsp. monilifera, Dittrichia graveolens, Hypericum perforatum, Marrubium vulgare and Senecio elegans at MEL and MELU. MEL, Date Locality Collector (MELU) number Chrysanthemoides monilifera subsp. monilifera 1910 Brighton Beach - cultivated — Tadgell 49304 1910 Geelong Williamson (19232) 1921 Lorne Gates 49305 1940 Black Rock Goudie 49310 1943 Frankston Smith 1535443 1949 Red Cliffs Parke (19230) 1959 Hurstbridge Aston 49308 1959 Anglesea Smith 1527791 1961 Warburton Giovanni 49309 196] Frankston Hallet (19229) 1962 Somers Hay 49306 1965 Portland Anway 49307 Dittrichia graveolens 1892 Dimboola Reader 1553391 1892 Lowan District Ав, Dept. 553397 1897 Rosstown Aron. 649240 1897 Rostown Baker 650148 1905 N. Victoria Gamble 553394 1906 Wannan District Shire Secretary 553398 907 Mansfield Thom 1553389 908 Deer Park Read 1553400 1910 Benalla St, John 649241 912 Oakleigh Dixon 553392 917 Eltham Truill 553407 917 Tyabb Kreouse 553393 1920 South Yarra Tovey 1553399 921 Kew Pocket 553395 922 Fawcett Taylor 553396 929 Mildura Paret 553408 1943 Heidelberg Smith 534063 Мати ит vulgare 18805 (2). Geelong Wilson 1553405 1887 Junction of Darling & Murray Minchin 553403 1892 Grampians Fiddian 353404 1903 Altona St. John 575427 1910 Wilsons Prom, Audas & St. John 682078 1912 Pi. Lonsdale Tiden 553402 1922 Dandenong Williamson (17570) 1943 Williamstown Smith 533994 garden escape. . .widely spread in Victoria and recorded as naturalized in 1870. . .used medicinally for catarrh’ (p.991). His refer- ence to 1870 as the date of introduction seems to refer to Bentham’s (1870) account of the Labiatae in Flora Australiensis. Bentham noted that M. vulgare had been gathered in Victoria. Ewart (1909) recorded that the plant was widely spread early this century, so much so that it was proclaimed as a weed under the Thistle Act for the Warrnambool District in 1905 and for the 172 MEL, Date Locality Collector (MELU) number Hypericum perforatum 901 Eldorado Welsh 643951 1903 Ernani Cowle 579657 1908 Box Hill Railway Station French 643962 908 Eldorado Anon, 643952 909 Woodfield district Anon, 643955 1909 Bright St, John 62320] 1913 Shire of North Ovens Anon. 643959 913 Shire of Newstead Anon. 643953 1916 Majorca Outtrim 643960 916 Muckleford James 643963, (15473) 917 Huntly Anon. 643956 919 Cathkin Robertson 643961 9227 Limonite Notl 643958 1922 Mı. Clear via Ballarat Vaudeary 643950 922 Jumbunna Cruishshank 643957 928 Lang Lang Williamson (15474) 928 Bright Pitcher 643965 933 Eurobin Black 643943 935 Eurobin Anon, 643944 941 МЕ, Buffalo Smith 1533164 Senecio elegans 1893 Port Fairy Williamson 684185 1895 Mouth of Hopkins River Williamson (19124) c, 1898 Mouth of Hopkins River Williamson 684183 1910 Wilsons Prom. Audas & St. John 648812 1912 Darby River bridge Anon. 648811 1916 Warrnambool Anon. 684184 1929 — Wilsons Prom, Anon. 684182 1935 Warrnambool Robbins 539464 1942 Bridgewater Bay Beauglehole 539002 1952 Bridgewater Bay Melville 536697 Shire of Maldon in 1908, He (Ewart 1931) subsequently reported that it had been proclaimed for Colac, Dundas, Minhamite and Ramsey. Horehound is currently represented in MEL and MELU by over 50 collections from Victoria. Although this is a sizeble number there are still marked discrepancies when the distribution of the species dis- cerned from the collections is compared with the map (fig. 1 j-l) based on all records. The recorded history of the spread of the Victorian Nat. Fig. 1. (a-c)Distribution of Chrysanthemoides monilifera in Victoria; a – herbarium specimens pre 1940, b, - herbarium specimens pre 1986, с – all records. (d-/)Distribution of Dittrichia graveolens in Victoria; d - herbarium specimens pre 1910, e — herbarium specimens pre 1986, f - all records. (g-i) Distribution of Hybericum perforatum in Victoria; g - herbarium specimens pre 1910, A – herbarium specimens pre 1928, 7— all records. (/-/) Distribution of Marrubium vulgare in Victoria; j - herbarium specimens pre 1913, К - herbarium specimens pre 1986, / – all records. (т) Distribution of Senecio elegans in Victoria; dots refer to pre 1936 collections, triangles to post 1936 collections. (n) Distribution of Pittosporum undulatum in Victoria; circles refer to pre 1940 collections, dots to post 1940 collections. The natural range of P undulatum is considered to be to the seaward side of the Great Dividing Range and is indicated by the broad line on the map. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) 173 species is also not well reflected by the specimen data, Pittosporum undulatum Vent. [Sweet Pittosporum] Pittosporaceae Pittosporum undulatum apparently occurs naturally on the seaward side of the Great Dividing Range, extending from near Brisbane to Western Port Bay (but excluding Wilsons Promontory). Populations in the environs of Melbourne, along the Otway Coast, the Mornington Peninsula and in the vicinity of Portland have only become estab- lished in recent years. The spread of the species has been documented by Gleadow and Ashton (1981). They have suggested that its increasing abundance in the Melbourne area is, to some extent, the result of vigorous fire-supression policies in Victoria since 1939. For that reason the distribution map (fig. 1 п) displays collections gathered prior to 1940 and after 1940. The distribution map published by Gleadow and Ashton (Lc) is not too dissimilar to that in Fig. 1 although there is an absence in both MEL and MELU of specimens to substantiate some of their locality records along the Otway Coast and the Mornington Peninsula. Senecio elegans L. [Purple Groundsell] Compositae Thís species was cultivated in the Melbourne Botanic Gardens as early as 1852 (Ginn 1852) and is now to be found along much of the Victorian coastline. Ewart (1931) described it as an annual but noted that in cultivation this 'handsome weed, native to South Africa...grows as а biennial or even perennial, and may develop double forms with numerous ray florets' (p. 1173). Senecio elegans presumably became established as a weed following its escape from gardens. The first published record of this species as a naturalized plant in Victoria appeared in this journal in 1905. It was noted that Mr. H. B. Williamson had exhib- ited a dried specimen of the plant from the mouth of the Hopkins River. Ewart (1931) 174 subsequently referred to this note and gave the localities *Hopkins River from 1898; Darby River, National Park, from 1900. Five mile Beach, 1910; There is no collection from the Darby River at MEL or MELU for 1900 but the early occurrence of S. elegans in the vicinity of Wilsons Promontory is recorded (see table 1). In fact published records and information from herbarium records are in general agreement. However just how the species has spread along the coast is open to conjecture. Do seeds spread by wave action or wind? Has the species spread as the result of one or several introductions? And how accurately does the map (fig. 1 m) reflect the true distribution of the species? Acknowledgements I thank Miss K. E. Wilson for assisting with the compilation of distribution data from MEL specimens, Mr. I. Clarke for access to the MELU collections and both Dr. J. H. Ross and Mr. S. J. Forbes for comments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Anonymous (1893). Recards of plants, naturalized in the Colony of Victoria since 1889. (52 species). Victorian Nat. 10:144-]47. Bentham, G. (1870). Flora Australiensis Vol. 5. Reeve. London. Conran, 1. С. (1987). The genus Kniphofia Moench (Aloeaceae) in Australia, Muelleria 6:307-310. Ewart, A. J. (1909). The weeds, poison planis, and naturalized aliens of Victoria. Govt. Printer, Melbourne, Ewart, A. J. (1931), Flora of Victoria. Govt. Printer, Melbourne. Ewart, А. J. and Tovey, J. К, (1906). The Proclaimed Plants of Victoria. Victorian J. Agric. 4:558. Forbes, S. J., Gullan, P. K., Kilgour, К. A, and Powell, M. A. (1984). A census of the vascular plants of Victoria. Dept. Conservation, Forests & Lands. French, c. (1905). St. John's Wort. Victorian J. Agric. 3:624-630. Gerard, J. (1957). The Herball or Generall Historie of Plants. London. Ginn, Н. (1852). Botanical Gardens. Govt. Printer, Melbourne. Gleadow, К. M. and Ashton, D. Н. (1981), Invasion of Pittosporum undulatum of forests of central Victoria, І. Invasion patterns and plani morphology. Aust, J. Вог. 29:705-720. Jacobs, 5. W. Г. and Pickard, J. (1981). Plants of New South Wales. Govt. Printer, Sydney. Maiden, J. Н. (1900). Some notes of a trip to the Victorian Alps. Victorian Nat. 17:43-47. Victorian Nat. Mueller, F. (1858). Annual Report of the Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens. Govt. Printer, Melbourne. Mueller, F, (1885). Select Extra-Tropical Plants, Govt. Printer: Sydney, Norlindh, T. (1943), Studies in the Calenduleae. 1. Monograph of the genera Dimorphotheca, Castalis, Osteospermum, Gibbaria and Chrysanthemoides, Lund. Parsons, W. T. (1973), Noxious Weeds of Victoria. Inkata Press, Melbourne, Parsons, W. T. (1982), Weeds. Jn Duncan, J. S. (ed.), Atlas of Victoria. Govt. Printer: Melbourne. Ross, J. Н. (1976), An analysis of the Flora of Victoria. Muelleria 3:169-176. Simmons, D. M. and Flint, P. W. (1986) Variation in Chrysanthemoides топшјета Compositae) in Eastern Australia. Weed Res. 26:427-432. Wheeler, Ј, (1964), South African bone-seed becoming à curse. Victorian Nat. 81:225-226. Naturalist Note Prey Constriction in the Adelaide Hills Copperhead Austrelaps labialis Ву T. Р. MORLEY* Shine & Schwaner (1985) presented data on prey constriction in 16 species of venomous Australian snakes, representing four genera of colubrid, six genera of elapid and one hydrophiid. The purpose of this note is to report prey constriction in an additional genus of Australian elapid. The snake continued to hold the lizard within coils of its body until only the lizard's hind legs were visible. This note is an important addition to the work of Shine and Schwaner (1985) who showed that prey constriction is quite common in venomous Fig. 1. Adelaide Hills Copperhead -Australeps labialis constricting an adult Hemiergis peronii. On the 9.V.1986, I acquired a juvenile Adelaide Hills Copperhead Austrelaps labialis (Shine, 1987), 163mm SVL and 197mm total length. For the first five months the snake ignored live, new- born mice provided as prey, and fed on small skinks (ie. Hemiergis decresiensis, H. peronii, Morethia adelaidensis and М. boulengeri) On 25№1.1986 when offered an adult Hemiergis peronii, the snake immediately seized it in the nape region and wrapped itself around the lizard in a series of coils (Fig. 1). The snake continued constricting biting the lizard for approximately five minutes before swallowing the prey, head first. + c/o Adelaide Zoological Gardens, Frome Rd., Adelaide, S.A, 5000. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) snakes, and that there is no significant difference in the proportion of venomous and non venom- ous genera utilizing constriction. Acknowledgements Many thanks to Dr. T. D. Schwaner who reviewed an earlier draft of this note, REFERENCES Shine, R, 1987. Ecological Ramifications of Prey Size: Food Habits and Reproductive Biology Australian Copperhead Snakes (Ausrrelaps, Elapidae). J Herpetol. 21(1) : 21-28. Shine, К. and T, Schwaner. 1985. Prey Constriction by Venomous Snakes: A Review, and New Data on Australian Species, Copeia 1985(4) ; 1067-1071. 175 Habitat of Gunn’s Orchid (Sarcochilus australis) from the Northern Strzeleckis, Victoria By DAVID CHEAL* In Vict, Маг. V103(6): 168-9, Barnett and Beattie listed sixteen host species for Sarcochilus australis in the Otways. This short note further characterises the habitat and host species of this uncommon epiphyte from a comparable locality in the northern foothills of the Strzelecki Ranges in South Gippsland, Victoria. The study site was in a reserve managed by the Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands. Vegetation in the Reserve varied with topography, soil type, exposure and other environmental features, but the S. australis was restricted to tall open-forest dominated by Eucalyptus cypellocarpa, with a dense understorey of mesic small trees (see Table 1), with scattered emergent Acacia melanoxylon. Methods A broad transect of 20m width and approx. 100m length was laid out through a section of forest in which 5. australis was relatively common. A 3m radius circular quadrat was taken around the first shrub encountered on the transect that supported 5. australis, All vascular plant species оссиг- ring in or projecting over the quadrat were then recorded. The girth of the trunk of the supporting shrub/tree at Im was then measured. After moving 10m along the transect this procedure was then repeated at the next shrub encountered that sup- ported S. australis. Eleven quadrats and their associated data were taken. The relative importance of each shrub species at the study site was calculated by counting the number of individuals present along a representative segment of the trans- ect (see Table 1). * Dept. of Conservation Forests and Lands, Flora Survey Group 2, Treasury Place, East Melb., 3002. 176 Results The most frequent co-occurrences of vascular plant species with 5. australis are illustrated in Table 2. The eleven S. australis occurrences studied were on Pittosporum undulatum (4), Cop- rosma quadrifida (3), Olearia argophylla (2), Pomaderris aspera (1) and a dead Bedfordia arborescens (1). In spite of extensive search- ing up and down the gully S. australis was not found on live Acacia melanoxylon, live Bedfordia arborescens, Eucalyptus spp., Helichrysum dendroideum, Olearia lirata or Rapanea howittiana. S. australis did not occur in the deeply incised gully of the study site, but on a raised Table 1. Relative Importance of Woody Species at the Study Site. Species Number of Percent Individuals of Total Pittosporum undulatum 65 47 Coprosma quadrifida 18 13 Pomaderris aspera 17 12 Olearia argophylla 15 11 Bedfordia arborescens 11 8 Rapanea howittiana 6 4 Helichrysum dendroideum 4 3 Olearia lirata 2 1 ТОТА1. 138 Table 2. Co-occurrence of S. australis and other vascular plants Species No. quadrats S. australis 11 С. quadrifida (orchid host) 11 Р undulatum (orchid host) 11 Microlaena stipoides 10 Clematis aristata 9 Pellaea falcata 5 Polystichum proliferum 9 Sambucus gaudichaudiana 9 Stellaria flaccida 9 Pandorea pandorana 8 Olearia argophylla (orchid host) 6 Pomaderris aspera (orchid host) 5 Victorian Nat. shelf 30m ог more above the creek. However, the creek banks had been severely disturbed before the reserve was proclaimed and thus the orchid may have been eliminated there. Girths, at Im above ground, of the hosts ranged from 7ст (C. quadrifida) to 83cm. (Р undulatum) with a mean of 41cm. (Ex- cluding С. quadrifida, the mean girth of hosts was 50cm.). Many of the plants at the study site attained unusually large size. The largest Olearia argophylla had a girth of 159cm at Im and the largest Bedfordia arborescens was measured as 156cm at 1m. Discussion At this study site, S. australis was restricted to dense closed-forest, with or without emergent A. melanoxylon or Eucalyptus spp. The only hosts were species found in relatively undisturbed vegetation. Woody species of marginal sites or forest clearings (such as H. dendroideum and O. lirata) did not support the orchid. S. australis was never found, even on otherwise suitable hosts, adjacent to breaks in the canopy. The two most frequent hosts (С quadrifida and P undulatum) are able to successfully regenerate in unburnt (and otherwise un- disturbed) vegetation. Not all species were equally favoured as hosts for the orchid. С, quadrifida and P. undulatum were equally frequent as hosts, but C. quadrifida was apparently favoured as host over P undulatum as there were far fewer individuals of this species at the study site (Table 1). Some woody species did not support S. australis even though they had apparently suitable niches for it. It is useful to record some indication of host species frequency and the frequency that they supported S. australis as well as a list of the host species. Summary l. S. australis clearly favours the dense shelter provided by the closed canopies of mesic closed-forest or similar under- storeys in tall open-forest. It does not occur in exposed or recently-disturbed sites. 2. Even within this habitat some species are clearly favoured over others as hosts and the reasons for this are presently obscure. Acknowledgement Dr. Paul Gullan (Flora Survey) provided useful comment and advice on an early draft of this article. Green's Bush, Mornington Peninsula This large patch of bush, currently an important remnant for the Peninsula supports a large population of Grey Kangaroos and some rare and vulnerable communities of plantlife. An appeal to purchase the land and prevent impending subdivision is underway, but recently this has been given a great boost. The Government and the Ross Trust have each offered $1 for every $1 donated i.e. your donation of $1 becomes $3. Donations also may be tax deductable. For information, contact Stephanie Rennick on (03) 578 1679. Donations to: Greens Bush Appeal, Victorian Conservation Trust, 6th floor, 250 Victoria Pde., East Melbourne. Land Conservation Council Investigation of Rivers and Streams in Victoria The LCC is preparing a descriptive reprot of the scenic, recreational, cultural and ecological values of rivers and streams in Victoria. When this report is published, submissions from the public will be invited, and will be considered in the preparation of Recommendations regarding use and management of these waterways and the ways in which their values can best be protected. Information is available from the Secretary, LCC, 4th floor, 464 St. Kilda Rd., Melbourne 3004, Phone: (03) 267 1311. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) 177 Notes on Birth and Early Development т Three Species of Common Victorian Reptiles By CHRIS B. BANKS* Introduction It is a policy of the Royal Melbourne 70075 Reptile Department to record all re- productive data arising from specimens within the collection. This applies equally to those species regarded as common due to their ubiquity, as it does to those which are rare or endangered. In 1985, representatives of three common species were received into the collection — a gravid female Jacky Lizard (Amphibo- lourus muricatus) was received as a donation and groups of Red-bellied Black Snakes (Pseudechis porphyriacus) and Southern Water Skinks (Sphenomorphus tympanum) were lodged at the Zoo as confiscated stock. Jacky Lizards are small agamids (100mm snout-vent) inhabiting dry sclerophyll forests and coastal heathlands from south- east Western Australia along the coasts and ranges to northern New South Wales and south-east Queensland (Cogger, 1986). The female received at the Zoo originated in the Buxton area, 80km north-east of Mel- bourne, Victoria (5. Eliades, pers. comm.). The Southern Water Skink is usually en- countered near or along small creeks in southern and eastern Victoria and south- east New South Wales. Isolated populations occur in the Fleurieu Peninsula, South Australia, and the northern tablelands of New South Wales (Cogger, 1986). The liz- ards lodged at the Zoo were of the popu- lation referred to as the ‘cool temperate form’ by Rawlinson (P. Rawlinson, pers, comm.). The Red-bellied Black Snake is a med- ium-large snake (1.5m total length), usually found in association with swamps and streams from far north Queensland to south-east South Australia (Cogger, 1986). * Curator of Reptiles, Royal Melbourne Zoo, P.O. Box 74, Parkville, Victoria 3052. 178 Materials and Methods The А. muricatus eggs were incubated in moist Vermiculite (80% water by weight) in a sealed plastic container positioned in a circular, still-air fowl incubator. Eggs, neonates and young specimens were weighed on a triple-beam balance to the nearest 0.12. Egg lengths and widths were measured with vernier calipers to the nearest Imm. Snout-vent and total lengths of neonates and young lizards were meas- ured against a standard 300 mm ruler to the nearest Imm, and а squeeze-box was used for the snakes (Quinn and Jones, 1974). Each group of young lizards or snakes was maintained separately in steel-framed glass aquaria measuring 530 x 250 x 310mm height. Wood-framed, fly-wire lids provided good ventilation and lighting. A 1.2m True- lite fluorescent tube was suspended 30mm above the tops of the tanks containing both groups of lizards. A substrate of washed, coarse river gravel was cleaned or changed as necessary and a network of branches was provided for the А. muricatus, Small pieces of terra-cotta plant pots and strips of bark were provided as cover for the snakes and skinks. Fresh water was available at all times. Results Amphibolurus muricatus A heavily-gravid female measuring 76mm snout-vent was received on 22 December, 1985. It was set up in a tank having dimensions and furnishings as previously described. A piece of slate was angled against à small rock in the hope that the lizard would lay her eggs in the sand cavity underneath. The air temperature in the tank at this time was 25-28°С, On 11 January, 1986, 12 eggs were deposited on the floor of the tank. They weighed 1.1-1.2g (mean 1.15g) and measured 11-12mm (mean 11.2mm) wide x 14-17mm (mean 16mm) Victorian Nat. = s, ci" long. They were incubated at a constant 28?C. Four eggs were discarded after 21 days, as they had become deeply sunken – each contained a single embryo which had died early during incubation. Hatching commenced on the 48th day with two lizards emerging. A further lizard emerged the next day and two more on day 50. Two had slightly kinked tails and the tail of a third was bent almost double, with the distal section being shorter and having a blunt tip. The remaining three eggs were opened on day 51 - one was infertile but two each contained a full-term dead foetus. One had a slightly twisted spine and the other a large, unabsorbed yolk sac. Тће young lizards were very lethargic until sprayed lightly with water. This stimulated immediate activity and drinking from the 260 240 + T 20 ELTE Ron a CH ISTE Hatching Age Imonths] branches and tank walls. Within a week the lizards were readily accepting small, live crickets (Teleogryllus oceanicus) dusted with D.C.P. 340 (dicalcium phosphate). On three occasions during the first month, ‘foot- waving’ was observed when crickets were introduced. One specimen with a slightly kinked tail died after three weeks from an unknown cause. The lizards spent the majority of the time basking on the uppermost branches under the True-lite. The temperature was allowed to decrease to 18-21°C from early June to late August, during which time feeding was curtailed. By the eighth month the only in- dividual with an obvious deformity was that possessing the tail bent double at hatching. This specimen had the greatest snout-vent length but did not appear to be as agile as | + + A ro и а = T T "EMT TUR rM Sa Б 8 9 10 1! 12 Hatching Age (months) Fig. 1. Growth rate to 12 months for A. muricatus at Melbourne Zoo. (a) Total length (upper) and snout-vent (lower). (b) Weight. (vertical line is range, horizontal bar is mean). Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) 179 its siblings, and its total length was not included in the growth data (Fig 1). All four lizards grew steadily and there was no obvious aggression from the larger indiv- iduals towards their small siblings. Sphenomorphus tympanum A group of six confiscated lizards was lodged at the Zoo on 30 November, 1985. Although none were obviously gravid, one female produced five live young on 13 December. When another specimen appear- ed close to giving birth, it was separated from the group to avoid possible injury to the resultant neonates. The lizard was maintained in a tank as previously described, and at 25-28 ^C, and produced five young on 27 December. One week following the birth she weighed 11.5g and was measured at 86mm snout-vent and 220mm total length. She was then returned to the group. The young lizards had developed a gold- ST } 40 „++ + 20 1254 56789 1011 12 Hatching Age Imonths! en-olive dorsum by one month of age. One was found to have lost the tip of its tail during the fifth month and another died from unknown causes during the eighth month. The lizards basked readily but would immediately hide at the approach of a keeper. The temperature was allowed to decrease to 17-20°C from early June to late August, during which time feeding was cur- tailed, resulting in a decreased growth rate (Fig. 2). Pseudechis porphyriacus A group of two pairs was lodged at the Zoo as confiscated stock on 17 January, 1985. The females were not obviously gravid but one, 820mm snout-vent length, prod- uced 13 young (8 dead) and 1 unfertilised ovum on 22 March, 1986. She had not fed since arrival. Тће young snakes were all thought to be dead when found but two were seen to be moving within the transparent membranes Tee ТТЕ ТЫЛ за ee Ито ви M B Birth Age months) Fig. 2. Growth rate to 12 months for S. tympanum at Melbourne Zoo. (a) Total length (upper) and snout-vent (lower). (b) Weight. (vertical line is range, horizontal bar is mean). 180 Victorian Nat, а TS "m що | seas 4004 | 380- | | 360-4 Length 4 340 immi 320 ze 280 | 260 ~ = та = 240 8 220 6 200 T T Tu C FLOTA jeu To ТЕ, [таз 66 one Piz3a 45 67 8 8 TMT Birth Age (months! Birth Age (months) Fig. 3. Growth rate to 12 months for P porphyriacus at Melbourne Zoo, (a) Total length (upper) and Snout-vent (lower). (b) Weight. (vertical line is range, horizontal bar is mean). at least four hours after being expelled. All sloughed 10 days after birth, followed by a first inter-slough period of 37-40 days. Pink mice, unscented or scented with skinks, were refused as food and the snakes were, therefore, force-fed with dead, new born mice. Early in the tenth month, dead mice rubbed with fish were accepted vol- untarily, resulting in a noticeable increase in the snakes' growth rates (Fig. 3). Discussion Only one other reference was found to incubation and hatching in А. muricatus (Lawton, 1982). This related to a dead-on- road female in the Ourimbah State Forest of central coastal New South Wales. Six fer- tile eggs were removed from the lizard and incubated at 20-30°С for 79-81 days - each produced a viable young lizard. Allowing for the larger clutch and consequently small- er hatchlings in this study, the young lizards Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) had similar total and snout-vent lengths to those arising from the Ourimbah female. Lawton (1982) did not record growth past one month of age and provided no weight data nor egg dimensions. Bustard (1970) records gravid females occurring in October and November in the northern parts of the species' range, and about six eggs being laid. Poor hatching rates and hatchling malformations in reptiles, resulting from excessively high incubation temperatures, have been reported by a number of workers (Banks, 1983; Bustard, 1969; Dunn, 1981; Zweifel, 1980). It is likely that the constant incubation temperature of 28°С produced the deformities seen here. Foot-waving, or circumduction, is well- known among agamids and that observed in the juvenile A. muricatus in this study, falls within the activity patterns recorded by Carpenter et. al. (1970). Few useful data are 181 available on growth in young agamids and those presented here are, therefore, of comparative value. Even fewer observations appear to have been made on S. tympanum, although the related 5. quoyii has been the subject of a number of studies (Daniels and Heatwole, 1984; Veron, 1969). Jenkins and Bartell (1980) state that the birth of 2-5 live young occurs in summer in S. tympanum and hence the data obtained in this study appear to be within the normal ranges for this spec- ies. Weeks (1927) suggested a snout-vent length of 30mm at birth, although this could have referred to 5. tympanum от 5. kosciusko, species which attain a similar size and are sympatric through much of the range of the cool temperature form of 5, tympanum. The growth of the young skinks in this study suggests that they would have been capable of reproduction in their second year. P porphyricaus is perhaps the most studied of these three species. In particular, Shine (1977 a,b,c; 1978) has studied the species extensively in northern New South Wales. In this study, the time of parturition, clutch size, length and weight of neonates, and female’s snout-vent length are within the normal ranges for wild specimens (Cogger, 1986; Shine, 1977b and 1978). The young snakes’ very slow growth rate over their first 12 months of age was probably due to the absence of their natural prey items of lizards and frogs (Shine, 1977 c). Conclusion Although A. muricatus, S. tympanum and P porphyriacus are regarded as common in Victoria, being found throughout the State except for areas in the west and south-west, few records have been published on their birth and early development. The data recorded here are, 182 therefore, of value despite their basis on captive animals. REFERENCES Banks, C. B. (1983) Reproduction in two species of captive Brown Snakes, Genus Pseudonaja. Herp. Rev. 14(3):77-79. Bustard, H. R. (1969) Tail abnormalities in reptiles resulting from high temperature egg incubation. Brit, J. Herpetol. 421-123. Bustard, H. В. (1970) Australian Lizards. Collins, Sydney. Carpenter, C. C., Badham, J. A. and B. Kimble, (1970) Behaviour patterns of three species of Amphib- olurus (Agamidae), Copeia (1970):497-505. Cogger, Н. С. (1986) Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia (rev. ed.) A. H. & А, W. Reed Pty. Ltd., Frenchs Forest, N,SW. Daniels, C. and H. Heatwole (1984) Predators of the Water Skink, Sphenomorphus quoyii, Herpeto- Jauna 16(1):6-15. Dunn, R. W. (1981) Further observations on the captive reproduction of Johnstone's Crocodile /nz. Zoo Yearb, 21:82-83. Jenkins, R. W. G. and R, J. Bartell. (1980) A field guide to Reptiles of the Australian High Country. Inkata Press Pty. Ltd., Melbourne. Lawton, D. (1982) Incubation of Jacky Dragon (Amphibolurus muricatus) eggs with notes on growth of the young. Thylacinus 7(1):17-21. Quinn, H. and J. P. Jones (1974) Squeeze-box technique for measuring snakes. Herp. Rev. 5:35. Shine, R. (1977a) Reproduction in Australian elapid snakes:l. Testicular cycles and mating seasons. Aust. J. Zool. 25:647-653. Shine, R. (1977b) Reproduction in Australian elapid snakes:2, Female reproductive cycles. Aust. J. Zool. 25:655-666. Shine, В. (19770) Habitats, diets апа sympatry in snakes:a study from Australia. Can. J. Zool. 55:1118-1128. Shine, R. (1978) Growth rates and sexual maturation in six species of Australian elapid snakes, Herpetol- овса 34(1):73-79. Veron, J. Е. М. (1969) The reproductive cycle of the Water Skink, Sphenomorphus quoyii. J. Herpetol. 3(1-2):55-63, Weeks, H, C. (1927) Placentation and other phenomena in the scineid lizard Lygosoma (Hinulia) quoyii. Proc. linnean Soc. NSW. 52:499-554. Zweifel, R. G. (1980) Aspects of the biology of a laboratory population of kingsnakes. In : J. B. Murphy and J. T. Collins (eds.) Reproductive Biology and Diseases of Captive Reptiles. Society for the Study of Amphibians and Reptiles. Contributions to Herpetology 1:141-152. Victorian Nat. Naturalist Note A Puzzling Bottlebrush from Western Victoria By T. E. GEORGE* In December 1953, while examining the plants growing in the creekbed below the wall of the new Rocklands Reservoir on the Glenelg River, east of Balmoral, a group of Melaleucas or paperbarks in the creekbed, excited me. I collected specimens showing flowers, seed capsules, etc. for myself and for the Melbourne Herbarium, and suggested that the plants were perhaps a natural cross between Melaleuca gibbosa aud Melaleuca decussata, as both shrubs grow in the area, but as far as I know, nothing was decided. Also growing in dense thickets in the creek bed were many thin stemmed, bright green leaved callistemons, but as the flowering season had long since finished, I collected quite a lot of mature seed capsules for growing in my nursery back home in Reservoir. Germination was highly successful, so as well as potting on single seedlings, I also potted on two or three and even up to six seedlings to each pot, just as an experiment to see if they would eventually help or hinder each other, Even though I had many varieties of calli- stemons growing in my half acre garden and nursery in Reservoir, 1 planted out perhaps a hundred in various places in the garden, singles, doubles and more, just from the pots where they had been grown on. АП grew very well, and 1 gave several to a friend in the next street, who was just starting a new garden, and also to other friends, schools and school children. All our seedlings grew very well, tall, thin and spindly, with nice, fresh, light green leaves, with a point, not as stiff leaved or hard pointed as С. rugulosus (macro- punctatus) from Yanac further north in the Great Desert, so 1 was looking forward to their eventual flowering. Perhaps because they were mostly under and near larger trees, they were extremely tardy in flowering. The flowers were all on top of all the branches, and the colour, a very pale pink, wsa not at all showy, as nearly all our other calli- stemons are. My friend was disappointed with his, but we have persevered with them, as all plants are very healthy, strong, and with a good thick rootstock. This first attracted my attention only last year, after I had read an article on phyllotaxis written by my colleague, Schleiger (1985) Phillip Institute of Technology. As well as the thickened rootstocks, lumps were also developing in various places on the trunks of these callistemons. Further #17 Ashley Street, Reservoir, Victoria 3073 Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) PET ГЇ; ле ; теле, R TIT ET e. lox wie awe L Fig. 1. Two views of the trunk of the mystery Callistermon from Rocklands Reservoir. examination has shown that the lumps are growing spirally around the stems and increase in size each year as the wood enlarges, so that you can see a gradual increase in size from year to year. Further examination shows that these lumps grow exactly where the leaf stalk grew, so that the lumps grow in spirals exactly where the leaves grew (Fig. 1). Every single individual of the Callistemon from the creek bed below the spillway, has developed the same spiralling on its stem. Not one other callistemon of all the species I have grown, and I have them in quantity, shows this characteristic, yet it has taken me all these years to notice it. I know that some plants, such as mangroves have breathing tubes ог pueumatophores, which help them to breathe in oxygen while under water, and some swamp plants have lumps on their trunks to help the same process, but to develop a whole set of spiral breathing tubes right up the trunk, requires at least some investigation. 183 The lumps are definitely not galls caused by parasitic wasps piercing the scar at leaf fall to lay their eggs, as even they could hardly be so accurate in measuring exactly where to lay them to achieve such perfect delineation. The lumps are growing tissue and all increase regularly in size with increasing age. I told my friend Dr Jim Willis of 4 my predicament and he suggested that I contact Mr Peter Lumley of the Herbarium who is in charge of reviewing the callistemons. Mr Lumley has already been out and is sending collectors to find the plants in situ, if still there after thirty- four years. If not, they could be lost except for those I grew from seed collected thirty-four years ago. Finally, perhaps the lumps are a series of гите tt developing root and leaf buds in anticipation ог рае dang ле, preparation for a coming flood or ice age, or, more likely is this callistemon an ancient survivor of glacial movement from the Antarctic continent, like some of our other plants? Our plants have developed over millions of years, and many are the ways and means of survival. Although I have been growing, studying and loving Australian plants for over fifty years, I must admit with Yul Brynner in ‘The King and I’ the “It’s a puzzle- ment”. Any help in solving this ‘puzzlement’ would be greatly appreciated. REFERENCE Schleiger, М. W. (1985) Pine Cones, Dandelions, Fibonacci Numbers and All That in Mathematics Curriculum Teaching and Learning, Peter Sullivan Fig. 2. Another view of the mystery Callistemon showing (ed), pp. 375-387, МАУ, 191 Royal Parade, Parkville the spiralling of lumps on the trunk. 3052, 100 Үеаг< Адо During the past ‘ew weeks the director and assistant director of the Zoological and Acclimatisation Society have been very busy distributing young English trout in various rivers and creeks in the Upper Yarra and Gippsland districts, and also several creeks in the Dandenong Ranges. Altogether about 15,000 young fish have been turned out. About 3,000 of these were hatched at the Royal Park, having been purchased as ova from the Salmon Commissioners of Tasmania. The remainder were hatched at Sir Samuel Wilson’s estate, Ercildoune, near Ballarat, and presented by him to the Society for distribution. [tis also intended to stock the Wimmera with a large number of different varieties of carp, Victorian Nat. У.3 (8) Dec, 1886 p. 111 184 Victorian Nat. External Sexing of Galaxiid Fish By PAUL HUMPHRIES* Many species of fish have distinct secondary sexual characters by which the sexes can be distinguished. These can range from bright colours in males, to nuptial tubercules, to specialised intromittent organs involved in reproduction. Such organs are well known in the class Chon- drichthyes where males of many species tal papillae, such as Gobiomorphus сохи, Gobiomorphus australis (Hoese et al., 1980) and the Tasmanian whitebait, Lovettia sealii (McDowall, 1980). the occurrence of sexual dimorphism based on secondary sexual characters within the family Galaxiidae is rare and has been thought to be restricted only to Galaxiella pusilla (and possibly G. A % Г ү ГА Fig. 1. Diagram of the genital papilla of a mature female spotted galaxias (A) апа a mature male spotted galaxias (B). 1: anus; 2: genital papilla; 3: anal fin. possess clasping organs and in live bearing poeciliids where males have gonapodia. Sev- eral Australian fish species are sexually dimorphic in the shape and position of geni- * Zoology Department, University of Tasmania, GPO Box 252C, Hobart, Tasmania 7001. Present Address: School for Environmental and Life Sciences, Murdoch University, Murdoch, Western Australia 6150. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) munda and G. nigrostriata), where the male is smaller than the female and has a distinct red stripe down its flanks (McDowall, 1978). During a two year study of four Tasman- ian populations of the spotted galaxias Galaxias truttaceus, from March 1985 to October 1986 (Humphries, 1987) the shape of the genital papilla was recorded for all live, sampled fish. The fish were then pre- 185 served in 10% neutral buffered formalin (Hale, 1965), dissected and sexed by macro- scopic examination of the gonads. The sex of all maturing, ripe and spawn- ing fish could be distinguished externally on the basis of the genital papilla immediately anterior to the anus in the male and immediately posterior to the anus in the female. In maturing females the papilla formed into two lobes (Fig. 1A), whilst males possessed a single elongate structure (Fig. 1B). The papilla of immature fish was not developed and sexes could not be distinguished externally at this stage. The papilla regressed after spawning. The existence of distinctive genital pap- illae has not been recorded in galaxiids before and their functions, if any, are not known, During the present study these pap- illae were also observed in the golden gal- axias, Galaxias auratus and the climbing galaxias, G. brevipinnis. The occurrence of genital papillae and the ability to sex some galaxiid fish by external examination only, may prevent killing of fish unnecessarily. This may prove useful in the study of small populations and possibly endangered species of galaxiids. REFERENCES Hale, L. J. (1965) Biological Laboratory Data. Methuen, London Hoese, D. F., Larson, Н. К. and Llewellyn, L. С. (1980) Family Eleotridae : Gudgeons. In McDowall, В. М, (Ed.) Freshwater Fishes of South-eastern Australia. Reed, Sydney. Humphries, Р. (1987) Life History Strategies of Diadromous and Landlocked Populations of the Spotted Galaxias, Galaxias truttaceus Valenciennes in Tasmania. M.Sc. Thesis, University of Tasmania. McDowall, R. M. (1978) Sexual dimorphism in an Australian galaxiid (Pisces : Galaxiidae). Aust. Zool. 19 : 309-314. McDowall, R. M. (1980) Freshwater Fishes of South- eastern Australia. Reed, Sydney. Naturalist Note The Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster in Melbourne By IAN FAITHFULL* On 6th October 1986 at 7.10 p.m. I was surprised to see a Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster in the Yarra River under Princes Bridge, Melbourne. On the south- west side of the bridge there is a powerful floodlight which illuminates the bridge and a section of the water. The rat was first seen swimming on the surface and making brief dives. Its prominently flattened head was apparent. After a short time it emerged onto a narrow mud flat on the river edge and pro- ceeded to devour a small item it had collect- ed. The long tail with long white tip was clearly visible. After this meal the animal * 83 Easey Street, Collingwood, Victoria, 3066. 186 swam under the bridge and was lost to sight. I have also seen the species in the pondage above Dights Falls, Collingwood, and in the Merri Creek under the Eastern Freeway Bridge. On 13th April 1986 at least two animals were seen at this latter locality. Seebeck (1977) reported that the number of Water Rats seemed to be decreasing downstream from Heidelberg, so it is pleas- ing to note their continued existence in the inner city. REFERENCE Seebeck, J. H., (1977). Mammals in the Melbourne metropolitan area. Victorian Nat. 94:165-171. Victorian Nat. А Naturalist Note Behaviour of Common Imperial White Butterflies By MICHAEL Е. BRABY* Perhaps one of the most splendid butterflies to be seen around Melbourne is the large and beautiful common imperial white Delias harp- alyce (Donovan). This attractive insect, when in the adult state, has on the wing undersides con- spicuous bright yellow-gold and crimson mark- ings against a dark background of velvet black and silver-grey. In contrast, the wings above are pearl-white in the male and olive-green in the female, and the wing margins, in both sexes, are jet black with the forewings possessing a series of terminal white (male) or cream-yellow (female) spots. The species is not uncommon through the suburbs (I recently saw one heading north along Spring Street, Melbourne on 25th March 1987) and breeds on several species of mistletoe (Loranthaceae). It has a long flight period, spann- ing over ten months. My earliest observation near Melbourne is late August (26th August 1987, Steels Creek) and my latest is early May (9th May 1987, Christmas Hills), and I have recorded adults in each month between August and May. Two gen- erations are said to be completed annually, al- though usually three broods are actually complet- ed (Е, Douglas, pers. comm.). The beauty of the imperial white is further revealed by its habits of flying gracefully about the upper canopy. Let me quote a passage on the behaviour of this butterfly as described by two of our pioneer lepidopterists, E. Anderson and F. P. Spry: “This fine butterfly has earned its common name from its habit of soaring with out- stretched but motionless wings round the lofly gum trees that support its foodplant when in the larval state, thus it will soar with majestic air as though conscious of dominion over all the rolling sea of tree-tops sloping down the hill sides and stretching away into the grey distance. But not always is this kingly flight, at times we observe a sportive mood, and down by creeks and watercourses one тау see his erstwhile unapproachable majesty play- fully darting at his own shadow in the placid water, rising and falling every few minutes n much the same manner as the swallows in their untiring flight? (Anderson and Spry, 1893). * 21 Cromwell Street, Eltham, Victoria 3095. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) The imperial white spends much of its time gliding effortlessly high around the tops of trees, and as a consequence of this behaviour, is usually difficult to net. I have noticed that adults also devote a good deal of time to feeding, extracting the rich nectar from eucalypt blossoms and а variety of plants. In February and March, and sometimes during April, large numbers of im- perial whites may be observed feeding on the attractive, scarlet flowers of box mistletoe Amyema miquelii, one of its larval host plants. Wood whites Delias aganippe also feed on these flowers at the same time, and thus they may compete with imperial whites for nectar. Male imperial whites, in particular, exhibit a distinct tendency to congregate on hill-tops (referred to as “‘hill-topping”), a behaviour that is believed to be a mate location strategy in which virgin females instinctively seek hill-tops to mate. On prominent peaks, hills and ridges males are frequently seen patrolling the tops of the tallest trees, This behaviour is generally restricted to days which are cool but sunny. On very warm days such activity is usually confined to the cooler hours of the morning, and only rarely have 1 observed imperial whites hill-topping on hot days. During very hot weather this behaviour appears to cease altogether. I have often wondered why hill-topping behaviour in this species apparently varies with temperature, while in other species it appears to have little effect. Burns and Rotherham (1980) state that; “On very hot days they (imperial whites) often come down to ground level in shady gullies, and rest on leaves with their wings folded over the back? This behaviour probably accounts for the general absence of imperial whites on hill- tops during hot weather. But why? Perhaps the imperial white is unable to tolerate hotter, drier conditions and by becoming less active it con- serves moisture and reduces the risk of desic- cation. The species is largely confined to coastal and mountain areas of south-eastern Australia and such a possibility may be one factor limiting its distribution from the hotter inland areas where the species is generally absent. On two extremely hot and windy days earlier this year 1 was fortunate to observe this inactive, resting behaviour of imperial whites. The behav- iour which I observed, and will describe, seems to support the notion that adults dishke high temperatures. 187 While exploring the bush at Christmas Hills, some thirty-five kilometres north-east of Mel- bourne, on 31 January 1987 and again on 7 February 1987 (maximum temperatures were 35°C and 40°C respectively) I found two relatively large congregations of butterflies (over twenty in each) at the entrances of two disused gold mine- shafts located at the bottom of a steep, sheltered, and ferny gully, The adults, most of which were males, were not active but at rest in the quiet shade. Most butterflies were situated on several large, moist rock slabs forming the entrances of the mine-shafts, though some were delicately poised on the fronds of various ferns. They sat remarkably still; with their wings closed they beautifully decorated the excavated rocks. All butterflies were quite oblivious to my presence as 1 could approach them with extraordinary ease, even pick them up with my fingers! This non- active, resting behaviour was in contrast to their familiar habits of soaring high about the tree canopy. Temperatures at the entrances of the mini- shafts were considerably cooler than elsewhere, and as no adults were seen flying about the nearest peaks and ridges they were clearly seeking refuge from the prevailing hot northerly wind and taking advantage of the sheltered, and cooler conditions provided by the mine-shafts. This resting behaviour, as opposed to flying, would no doubt reduce body moisture loss, and apparent preferences for the coolest sites may indeed suggest that imperial whites are not adapted to very hot conditions. REFERENCES Anderson, E. P. and Spry, F. P. (1893). Victorian Butterflies and How to Collect Them. H. Hearne and Co., Melbourne. Burns, А. М. and Rotherham, E. В. (1980). Australian Butterflies in Colour. A, Н. and А. W. Reed, Sydney. FURTHER READING Barret, С. L. and Burns, А. М. (1951). Butterflies of Australia and New Guinea. М. H. Seward, Melbourne. Common, I. Е В. and Waterhouse, D. Е. (1981), Butterflies of Australia, Revised edition. Angus and Robertson, Sydney. McCubbin, С. (1971). Australian Butterflies. Nelson, Melbourne. a_r Naturalist Note The Smokey Mouse (Pseudomys fumeus) Outside Victoria ВУ С. МАҮО* This note reports the capture of ап adult specimen of Smokey Mouse Pseudomys fumeus in Namadgi National Park, ACT. This animal was trapped near the summit of Mt. Kelly at an alti- tude of 1,800 metres in February, 1987. While the animal was released, А. Cockburn confirmed its identification from the photographs taken. This is only the second specimen of this species to be trapped outside Victoria; the first being near * C/O John Curtin School of Medical Rsearch, Medical Molecular Biology Unit, Australian National University G.P.O. Box 334, Canberra, A.C:T. 2601. Bulls Head in the Brindabella Ranges, some 37 kilometres north of Mt. Kelly. Subsequent inten- sive trapping of the Bulls Head site has been un- successful (Osborne and Preece, 1986). The capture of Smokey Mouse on Mt. Kelly is also noteworthy in that it is the highest altitude at which this species has been trapped. (A. Cock- burn, personal communication). REFERENCES Osborne, М, S. and Preece, M. А., 1986. Extension of the range of Smokey Mouse, Pseudomys fumeus (Rodentia: Muridae), into the Australian Capital Territory, Australian Mammalogy 10:35-36. Past Issues of the Victorian Naturalist Do you have any unwanted copies of past Victorian Naturalist issues? Dan McInnes (Victorian Nat. Sales Officer) frequently gets requests for past issues, and stocks are running low for some volumes. In particular, Vol 103 No. 2 (March/April, 1986) is in low supply. If you have any old copies of the Naturalist you wish to donate to the club, please contact Dan McInnes, 129 Waverley Road, Malvern, 3145. Phone: 211 2427. 188 Victorian Nat. AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION 1987 Robert G. H. Green In selecting Dr Robert Green to receive the award for 1987 the Award Committee has achieved another landmark in the history of the Medallion. This is the second time that the Medallion has gone to a Tasmanian, but Bob Green is the first man from that state to receive it, the award in 1976 having gone to Dr Winifred Curtis. Bob Green is Curator of Zoology at the Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston, a position he has held since 1961. Born in Launceston in 1925 he attended Launceston Grammar School, but left at the age of fifteen to work on his father’s property at Antill Ponds in Tasmania’s midlands. During the next twenty years he developed a keen interest in natural history, especially in ornithology, and was appointed Honorary Ornithologist to the Queen Victoria Museum in 1959. The establishment of what is now the finest scientific reference collection of Tasmanian oological material in existence, is testimony to his abiding interest in birds, as is the fact that of eighty photographs by him, held in the National Photographic Index of Australian wildlife, the majority are of birds. As Curator Bob Green has built up zoological research and reference collections which have achieved national and international importance. The wide range of his interests and his willingness to help people both in Australia and from overseas with their research is evidenced by the long list of books and journals in which his assistance is acknowledged, including Ride A guide to the native mammals of Australia (1970), Hall and Richards Bats of eastern Australia (1979), Blakers et al. Atlas of Australian birds (1984), and articles on mammals in Sports illustrated (U\S.A,) 1981 and Equinox (Canada) 1983. He has undertaken many collecting and field survey expeditions to various parts of Tasmania and the surrounding islands, the results of which have appeared in the Records of the Queen Victoria Museum. He made several trips overseas during the 1970$, visiting museums, wildlife reserves and research stations in south-east Asia, Europe and North America, which have resulted in numerous exchanges of data and specimens. Bob Green has always been concerned with the preservation of wildlife. From 1960-65 ће was the representative of the Tasmanian Farmers, Stockbreeders and Orchardists Association on the Animals and Birds Protection Board (now the National Parks and Wildlife Service), and from 1970-83 a member of the Wildlife Advisory Committee of this service. He was a foundation member of the Conservation Programme Committee of the World Wildlife Fund Australia. In 1975 he established a Museum field station on Maggs Mountain in Tasmania's Central Highlands to monitor the changes in fauna distribution caused by clear-felling. The work of a curator involves not only collection and preservation but also interpretation and education, Bob Green has given many talks to field naturalists’ clubs, adult education groups, Rotary clubs and the like, and is always available for radio and television interviews when newsworthy items of a zoological nature occur, He has not hesitated to involve himself in local environmental issues. Bob Green lists as his principle fields of activity, ornithology, mammalogy, herpetology, ichthyology, entomology, marine biology, ecology and conservation. The range of subjects in articles in The Emu, the Tasmonian naturalist, the Tasmanian rover, the Australian bird bander and others bears witness to this, as docs the list of eight species named after him, which include molluscs, insects and a lizard. In April 1987 the University of Tasmania conferred on him an Honorary Doctorate of Science in recognition of his contribution to zoology, and we congratulate him on adding the Australian Natural History Medallion to his achievements this year. Bob Green was nominated for the Medallion by the Launceston Field Naturalists’ Club, with supporting nominations from the Burnie Field Naturalists’ Club, the North East Tasmanian Field Naturalists’ Club and the Federation of Field Naturalists’ Clubs of Tasmania. Sheila Houghton Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) 189 NATURALIST REVIEW By D. B. FOREMAN* ‘Flora of Australia’ Volume 45 (Hydatellaceae to Liliaceae). Australian Government Publishing Services, Canberra (1987) Bureau of Flora and Fauna, Canberra. (Griffin Press, Netley, South Australia). (25.5 x 18 ст. 521 pp., 6 col. plates, 125 fig., 477 distribution maps. Price $54.95 (Casebound) $44.95 (Softbound) Although the eighth volume of the ‘Flora of Australia’ to be published is the most expensive issued up to the present time it is also by far the biggest. At 521 pages Volume 45 (Hydatellaceae to Liliaceae) is more than twice the size of Volume 46 (Iridaceae to Dioscoreacee) which was recently reviewed by Mr Stephen Forbes in the ‘Victorian Naturalist’ and about 100 pages longer than Volume 8 (Lecythidales to Batales) which was the previous longest volume, The layout of Volume 45 follows that of recent issues with the distribution maps being conveniently grouped together towards the end of the text. Unlike previous volumes the colour plates have been grouped together at the beginning of the text and make an impressive introduction to the work which follows. After some problems in earlier volumes the quality of the line drawings has steadily improved and it is reassuring to see this quality maintained in Volume 45. It is also pleasing to see that several authors have also included scanning electronmicrographs of seeds of some species in their treatments. As with previous уоште of the ‘Flora of Australia’ the system of classification follows that proposed by Arthur Cronquist in the 1981 edition of ‘An Integrated System of Classification of Flowering Plants’, As a consequence of this, readers will find members of the widely accepted family Amaryllidaceae included in the family Liliaceae which is treated іп a very broad sense. Another family to be embraced in the Liliaceae which will be familiar to some Victorian readers is the Hypoxidaceae. On the other hand Trithuria submersa, which is placed in the Centrolepidaceae in Willis’ ‘А Handbook of Plants in Victoria’ Volume 1, is now found in the Hydatellaceae. The treatment of Typhaceae by Dr B. С. Briggs indicates that there are 3 species of Typha in Victoria although no specimen is cited for Т: domingensis for Victoria. This differs significantly from the earlier treatment by Dr Jim Willis in Volume 1 of his ‘Handbook’ where only one species was recognized. Although no taxa occur naturally in Victoria most readers will find something of interest in the treatment of the Haemodoraceae including a number of new taxa in genera such as Conostylis (Cottonheads) and Angiozanthos (Kangaroo Paws and Catspaws). By far the largest family treatment in Volume 45 is the Liliaceae with the work being shared between 15 contributors. The number of changes to the taxonomy of this diverse family have been kept to a minimum by adopting the broad view of the family taken by Cronquist rather than adopting what to some people seems the more radical approach of Dahlgren, Clifford and Yeo (1985). Of particular interest to Victorian readers will be the new species and varieties in Hypoxis, Dionella, Caesia and Corynotheca proposed by Mr К. Henderson. Also specimens from Victoria and other eastern Australian states previously referred to Laxmannia sessiliflora * National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, Victoria, 3141 190 Victorian Nat. have now been placed in a new species, Laxmannia orientalis by Мг G. J. Kerghery. Brief Latin descriptions are given for all the new taxa in the Appendix. In contrast to the brief Latin descriptions of the new taxa the new combination and lectotypication of Bulbine glauca by E. M. Watson is accompanied by a quite lengthy discussion. Unfortunately there was a slight lapse in the usually very high editorial standards we have come to expect in the ‘Flora’ with labelling errors occurring on two figures, Dr Roger Hnatiuk in a note in a recent issue of the Australian Systematic Botany Newsletter advised on the following corrections: Figure 59 (p. 174) of Neoastelia spectabilis: the lettering was left off. It is as follows, starting at the top of the plate and working left to right: “А” is the top illustration; then “В”, “Е” and “D” in the next row; below “Е” is “С”; “H” is in the lower left corner; “Е” is above the two black seeds which are “J” and “К”; “С” is next to the right; and “T” is in the lower right corner. Figure 118 (p. 399) Wurmbea centralis: the illustration immediately below “F” is unlabelled and should be “H”, the one immediately below “С” should be “I”. The illustration at the centre, bottom row, already labelled “H” should be changed to “J” and the one to the right labelled *I" should be changed to “К”. The purchase of Volume 45 is strongly recommended and both amateur and professional naturalists alike will find it an invaluable addition to their library. * The *Flora' is available through the Club's Book Sales Officer. REFERENCES: Cronquist, A. (1981). An integrated system of classification of flowering plants. Columbia University Press, New York. Dahlgren, В. M. T., Clifford, Н. T. and Yeo, P. Е. (1985). The families of the Monocotyledons, Springer-Verlag, Berlin. Forbes, S. (1987). Flora of Australia, Volume 46 (Iridaceae to Dioscoreaceae) – Naturalists Review. Victorian Nat. 104:49-50. Willis, J. Н. (1970). А Handbook to plants т Victoria. Volume 1, 2nd ed., Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. Notes on the F.N.CV. trip to Kangaroo Island, 22nd-28th November, 1986 Our party, happily augmented by friends from the Latrobe Valley and Frankston and numbering thirty, was taken by bus from the overnight train to the Short 360 plane for the twenty-five minute flight, Adelaide to Kingscote. Once the Island came into view, lines of trees bordering farms and roads stood out, and Elsie Costermans could tell us these were the endemic eucalypt with leaves which point up, Eucalyptus cneorifolia. We later learnt that the conservation policy for Kangaroo Island requires that at least 25% of all land be kept under native vegetation and that the roadsides be preserved. Certainly, in the western half of the Island, these are a joy when one is driving past bush gardens of grass trees (Xanthorrhoea australis) with varying flashes of colour — gold of the pennants and the pea flow- ers, mauve and blue of the endemic Zerratheca halmaturina and Dampiera, and pinks of Boronia edwardsii and В, filifolia, with sometimes a canopy of small trees and Eucalyptus remota (again an endemic) in flower. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) We were fortunate to have Miss Jean Galbraith with us and were able to seek her help in iden- ‘Шуше plants and flowers. Our bus driver for the tour was Tom, a proud islander of four years standing, who had a planned itinerary but was happy to make an earlier departure daily, to allow for the interests of bird watchers, botanists and photographers necessitating many stops en route. The first afternoon was a short historical tour to the old Kingscote site – Pt. Rickett – and the meeting-house cum school at Wisanger. At Emu Bay a hooded dotterel with young skipped past the sea-weed on the beach, delighting the viewers. The trip on the 23rd took us past Pelican Lagoon, with a short stay near Pennington Bay, where we walked among a sea of Orthrosanthos, Scaevola and Lasiopetalum, and to Dudley Con- servation Park, where we found the large endemic “burr daisy”, Olearia rudi and the scarlet flowered mint bush, Prostanthera aspalathoides. The day ended with a visit to Willoughby Lighthouse and 191 the Devil's Kitchen blowhole on the most easterly, point of the Island. The following day we visited the only National Park, Flinders Chase, Tom paused once to point out the expanse of bush all round, with the sandy road visible in places ascending and descending among the low growth. He said he finds that with Americans it is “the bush" they associate with Australia and what they hope to see. We lunched at Park Headquarters after unsuc- cessfully looking for signs of platypus in the Rocky River. After offering the bread provided to the K.I. kangaroos, Marie's camera was poised when one “toddler” in the pouch came out, went to his reclining mum’s head, stretched himself tall to at least one foot, then teased his mum about the head until she called a halt, a playful act we had not seen before. The Cape Barren Geese were in great numbers grazing on the flat, only out- numbered by the clumps of rushes and flowering Orthrosanthos. Here we also counted seven koalas in the treetops, one nursing a youngster while she held on Lo the swaying branch. Koalas, like the geese, have been introduced to the Island. The highlight of the day must have been to reach and explore the Remarkable Rocks, though gale force winds made us wary of unsheltered areas. In spite of conditions, and flying into the wind, there was a constant stream of Short-tailed Shearwaters. We went on to see historic Weir Bay and the picturesque Admiral's Arch where three alba- trosses were seen, probably Black-browed. The strong wind enhanced the wonderful vistas of seaspray being thrown against the rocks of Casuarina Islands (The Brothers) lying south of Cape Du Couedic, Occasional seals where spotted resting on the shores below. We added another endemic flower to our list - the pink Adenarithus macropodiana flowering at the Remarkable Rocks area and Weir Bay. We later saw the cream form at Western River Con- servation Park when Mrs. Ida Jackson told how it was named macropodiana for the Island by an Irish naturalist doing his Master’s thesis on the plant. A Gould's goanna was seen crossing the road when we were on our way to Kelly Hill Caves next day and during lunch at the Caves Park the 192 promised “regulars” appeared to the smell of the barbecue; and also a КЛ. wallaby surprised us by nibbling a chop bone. Some of the party toured the caves while others went bird watching, and orchid hunters found several - one almost certainly Caladenia filamentosa. There was a profusion of Prostanthera spinosa in flower and the bright yellow Hibbertia stricta. We crossed to the northern shores to visit Cape Borda lighthouse and glimpsed the spectacular 700 foot cliffs of Harvey's Return. Passing a recently burnt area of Flinders Chase, we searched for orchids in a promising roadside area and were pleased to find some lovely specimens of Thely- mitra fuscolutea and photographers were soon zooming in. The Seal Bay trip was a day we all enjoyed, and the seals appeared to accept our presence on their beach - mostly with indifference: one lady had the bag on her arm inspected by an inquisitive nose and found she had swinging company as she moved along the beach. On again to Vivonne Bay, a lovely sweep of blue sea this day, and we walked among interesting rocks at Point Ellen and found some penguin young, safe in their burrows. The last day started with a detour to pick up Mrs. Ida Jackson, a resident botanist, and Miss Galbraith enjoyed being able to share the ques- tions, The destination was Western River Con- servation Park, with selected stops where Mrs. Jackson knew of special botanical treats. At Amen Corner there were numerous blossoming plants with the endemic Pimelia macrostegia gracing the roadside with its large drooping creamy flowers, and at Watters Mailbox we had the promised introduction to the Накеа enigma which never sets seed, reproducing vegetatively. Тћеге was a pleasant walk through the Park when we learnt among other things, the difference between the /sopogon and the “wild Irishman” of K.1., the Petrophile which hapily, often grew side by side. Last chance to stretch out legs and bend backs was at Snelling Beach, where we crouched to walk through the natural rock tunnel – and someone sighted an osprey. We all enjoyed an informative week and a comfortable Motel, and our thanks go to Marie for all her work and care in the organisation. Dora Lee Victorian Nat. Report on Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association Meeting at Inverloch (Labour Day Weekend) March 7th, 8th, and 9th 1987. Some 50 people attended this meeting from 12 Clubs, some camped, some were accommodated at the Inverlock Motel and some were ai the Esplanade Hotel, where the Annual General Meeting was held on the evening of Saturday March 7th. The Association was very much indebted to the invaluable help given by Mr. and Mrs, Оз. Brew- ster during the entire weekend, who guided us initially to their Environmental Centre, а con- verted butchers shop, almost opposite the Hotel. The Brewsters had arranged the speakers and excursion leaders, all local and all of a very high quality, in the absence of our pre-arranged leader. Eulalie Brewster then acted as courier in the bus and gave a brief resume of the history of the area, Samuel Anderson, after whom the Inlet was named, was one of the first settlers on the Bass River in 1835. The Tarwin River enters Andersons Inlet at Inverloch and the word Tarwin was said to be of Aboriginal extraction meaning thirsty. We were taken to admire the extensive view from Townsends Bluff, Townsend was Assistant Surveyor sent in 1840 to suryey Anderson’s Inlet. We drove down Henderson Road; apparently the Henderson Bros. were the first settlers on the Inlet, circa 1870. In the Harbour there were a few cray- fish, abalone and shark boats at anchor, but their numbers have decreased in recent years. We found 4 common eucalypts on this coast; (a) Swamp Gum (Eucalyptus ovata) (b) Narrow-leaved Peppermint (E. radiata) (c) Coastal Manna Gum (E. viminalis) (d) Messmate (E. obliqua) The town water supply is from the Lance Creek Reservoir and is chlorinated, some people com- plain of the taste, but we visitors noticed nothing disagreeable. We next visited Screw Creek by walking along the firm sand. Along the banks of Screw Creek are the White Mangoves (Avicennia marina) which appeared to be spreading into banks of Rice Grass (Spartina sp.) introduced т 1957 which could seemingly cause some serious silting of the creek mouth where it enters the Inlet. Along the banks were Brookweed (Samolus ушегапаа) and a yellow statice (Limonium australe) and a top heavy looking yellowish-green plant of Lawrencia spic- ata, of the Malvaceae family. From here we travelled 10 the jetty, labelled “unsafe” because of the depredations of Teredo worms, the original jetty was apparently built more than 100 years ago and stretched much further out into the Inlet. Vol. 104 No. 6 (1987) A new jetty was built in 1962 and this was washed away, We were shown where the Customs shed, store shed and where the rocket house had stood, the rocket house is still there but apparently in another position. It is said that the only time rockets and breechers buoy were used in a real ship-wreck was when the N.Z. boat Manawta was wrecked and at this time (early in this century) one of the operatives became tangled in the line and fouled the rescue procedure! Further north- west we visited the original site of the entry of three creeks into the inlet, now represented by а concrete drain and then we visited the Shell Trust in which is housed an historic and extensive collection of Australian and some other shells. The Annual General Meeting of the МЕМС.А. was held in the Upstairs Lounge of the Esplanade Hotel after dinner and it was unanimously decid- ed to rotate the positions of President, at present held by Mr. Albert Perry of the Creswick .N.C., and of the Secretary/Treasurer Dr. Elizabeth Turner of the Victorian ЕМ.С., Melbourne, so that these positions would be held for 12 months by the President and Secretary/ Treasurer of the Host Club in the area designated for the holding of the next 6 monthly Get-together meetings, After the meeting, Dr. Andrew Chapman, à local scuba diver who had assisted the Museum of Victoria to investigate the waters along the Bunurong Coast, gave a fine illustrated lecture with slides of unique beauty of the marine gardens in this area. At the conclusion of the evening, a cold rain was descending, whipped along by a strong wind, and the bus had flat batteries, thus the Motel guests had to be “ferried” home by the private cars and taxis. Next morning, Sunday March 7th, the excurs- ion to Walkerville and Cape Liptrap was delayed iwo hours until new batteries could be found for the bus. The excursion was most ably led by Graeme Rowe, a teacher from the Leongatha High School, who had prepared and distributed an ex- cellent pamphlet on the geology and the area, accompanied by a comprehensive geological time scale and maps. He also acted as courier on the bus and pointed out the ancient shore line, the meanderings of the Tarwin River and how it drains the South Gippsland highlands; the lower Devonian Liptrap formation and the upper Ordo- vician or Silurian Bald Hills and Hoddle Range. We travelled the full length of Venus Bay along the old floor of the Bay. He explained how the 193 mesozoic bedrock was of mud stone formed from the erosion of granites and laid down some 130 million years ago. Above Cape Liptrap we search- ed for and found Selaginella and Clubmoss (Lyco- podium varium) but the wind was too cold and strong for more than a short wandering through low growing Meleleuca with yellow blossoms. However, here we found Platysace heterophylla in flower and the leaves of Orthoceras strictum (the horned Orchid) and Sowerbaea, which also grows on Wilson's Promontory. It was low tide when we reached Waratah, now called North Walkerville, and walked along the coastal rocks to Bird Rock (made of Waratah Limestone series with tunnels and a collapsed cave) then south, past the ruins of the old lime kilns constructed of brick and limestone and cap- ped with yellow Pleistocene sediment. Ellen Lyndon also pointed out the beach where fossil- ized footprints of a large bird were found, esti- mated by the late Edmund Gill, former member of the ЕМСХУ, to be approximately 2,400 years before present and mentioned in *The Victorian Naturalist”. We visited the Cape Liptrap lighthouse but the fierce gale prevented us from walking far enough out on the cliffs to obtain a good view of the fold- ing of the rock strata to the north. A cairn commemorating the settlement of War- atah was constructed of greenish serpentinised gabbro, a Plutonic rock, like the granite of Wil- son's Promontory, it was once a hot liquid which cooled slowly underground, forming large сгуз- tals. The tide and the weather inhibited our further walk south, past Digger Island to Bell Point. After dinner, Club Reports were given by members of the 12 Clubs represented. Mr. Dan McInnes from the Melbourne F.N.C V. told about the Day Group which had been in action for 14 years and met on the 3rd Thursday of each month, at a place accessible by public transport. Irene Gibbs reported that the Albury-Wodonga ЕМС. was endeavouring to have the sewerage plant declared a refuge park for water birds. Jane Priest of Benalla F.N.C. reported that members were concerned about lowering of the water level of Lake Mokoan. The Immediate Past President of the УЕМС.А., Mr. Albert Perry, gave a brief report on the Creswick ЕМС. Ellen Lyndon of Leon- 194 gatha reminded the meeting that both she and Eulalie Brewster were honorary members of the ЕМСУ. and felt that they belonged to all clubs, she gave a brief report of the Latrobe Valley and Gippsland Clubs – including Bairnsdale, Sale, Traralgon and Warragul. Florence Hosking reported for Peninsula Club and displayed their new club badge depicting a yellow sun orchid. Ringwood was represented by a relatively new member Ken Ward who told of the recent 25th anniversary of their club which was presided over by Mr. Jack Hyett, their founder President, and that 14 foundation members attended. А report of the activities of the Stawell Club and of the Western Victorian Club Association was given by Win MacPhee. She was asked to con- vey to her club the sympathy of the assembled members, who learned of the illness of Ian McCann and Bob Humphries. She reported that the Arnhem Land Safari had been a great success and that they proposed a safari to W.A. next spring, also that Cliff Beauglehole's next study book will be launched soon at their Little Desert meeting. Marie Allender reported for the ЕМСУ. Melbourne. On Monday morning Mr. Peter Duck and his wife Jenny both local teachers and their 2 children, Catherine and Joshua, led us along the Bunurong coast - first, to note how the Banksia integrifolia were dying along the foreshore and how prolific was the growth of Sweet Bursaria, which was in flower and also in seed and how the N.Z. mirror bush coprosma had established itself amongst the coastal vegetation. At Cape Kruger and later at Cape Paterson we explored the rock pools and caves along the cliff face, and noted the Шас coloured Lobelia alata growing on the cliffs. We also discovered unusual marine algae including a cricket-ball sized codium or “еа spud". After lunch at Cape Paterson, thanks and fare- wells were said and the bus began its journey back to Melbourne - stopping at Bass to view the worlds longest earth worms up to 3 metres (10 feet) long on display "live": The Springtime get- together of the V.E.N.C.A's is to be held on October 16, 17 and 18th at Waranga Basin Camp, near Rushworth. Elizabeth Turner. M.D. Victorian Nat. FNCV Reports General Meeting, Monday 12th October. Dr. Jim Bowler spoke on ‘Environmental changes and Human occupation during the last 60,000 years’. He said that today 75% of the Aus- tralian Continent is arid land but this was not always so. 60,000 years ago the climate wetter and warmer, therefore more vegetated. This was to change by the peak of the Ice Age, 20,000 years ago when it was colder and drier. He concentrated his talk on the Willandra Lakes area in South Western N.SW., and also Northern Victoria. Before the Ice Age the Willandra lakes, which include Lake Mungo a freshwater system abun- dant with fish and other life both in and out of the water and ideal for human occupation as it has now been proved. Two separate peoples осси- pied the area, one with a high forehead, large brows and strong facial features, the other with a more rounded skull and less prominent facial features. At the onset of the Ice Age the land became drier. Strong prevailing winds from the west removed soil and sand causing Lunettes to form on the eastern side of the lakes. The first formed were domes of quartz sand which were later covered with higher clay domes. When the lakes began to dry up 25,000 years ago, water from the higher surrounding water table drained back into the lakes carrying salt with it, thus creating salt lakes in place of the original fresh water. Dr. Bowler said that radiometric readings prove human remains from Lake Mungo are about 36,000 years of age. He said that human remains from Kow-Swamp in Northern Victoria gave а reading of 11-12,000 years, but he pointed out that some anomalies occur in the present dating methods and the age of the Kow-Swamp remains may be much closer to the Lake Mungo remains than the present results show. He finally said that work begun by the late Edmund Gill опа site near Warrnambool may well prove to be the oldest evi- dence of human antiquity in Australia, far exceed- ing the Lake Mungo sites. Exhibits Mr. D. McInnes. A number of exhibits under the microscope, 1. The Medusa of the jellyfish stage of the Hydroid, Сатопета haswellii. А walking jellyfish with upto 20 or more branched tentacles. 2. The Medusa or jellyfish stage of the Hydroid, Aequorea albida?, A swimming bell shaped jellyfish with only two tentacles for a start. More will grow later. Е 3. Hydroid stage of Obelia australis showing gonotheca from which Medusae hatch. 4. The Medusa ог jellyfish stage of the Hydroid Obelia australis. A swimming jellyfish that is turned inside out with many tentacles, The bell is flat like a saucer. Mr. 1. Bates. Larvae of the Cup Moth. Mr. A, Blackburn, A number of Artifacts from New Guinea including Lime-bottles Spatulas, Belts, String bags, Stone-axes. ЕМСУ Club Reporter The Club wishes to thank Christine Ashburner (лее Shankly) for her excellent service as Club Reporter. For several years Christine provided the Victorian Naturalist with her clear and concise reports of the Club’s activities. Her labours are sorely missed. Ed. Club members who are frequent attenders at meetings and activities are asked to consider taking on the position of Club Reporter. Please contact Jack Douglas or another Council member if you are interested. Angahook-Lorne State Park Resource Inventory The Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands has prepared a Resource Inventory for Angahook-Lorne State Park, listing the known natural and cultural values of the park. This will form the basis for the preparation of a Proposed Management Plan. Copies can be obtained from the Information Centre, DC FL, 240 Victoria Pde., East Melbourne 3002 ($5, or $7 by mail) Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: ЕМСУ, ¢/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. | Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1987-1988 President: Dr JACK DOUGLAS, 42 Sunhill Rd., Mt. Waverley, 3149 (277 4804 A.H.) Vice President: Mr G. LOVE, Р.О. Box 2018, St. Kilda West, 3182. Secretary: Mr. RON PEARSON, 23 Avenza St., Mentone, 3194 (584 7443) Hon. Treasurer: Ms YVONNE GRAY, 46 Albany Cres., Surrey Hills, 3127 (890 1488 А.Н.) Subscription-Secretary: Мг М. STANFORD, с/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Editor: Mr. В. THOMSON, FNCV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (344 5704 B.H.) Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, ЕМСУ, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708 A.H.) Excursion Secretary: Miss MARIE ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Club Reporter; Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr. STEPHEN HENRY, 22 Odenwald Rd., Eaglemont, 3084. Sales Officer (Books): Mts H. STANFORD, 100 Middlesex Road, Surrey Hills, 3127 (830 1505) Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (29 2779). Day Group: Mr D. Е. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Mammal Survey: Mr JULIAN GRUSOVIN, 17 Sutherland Street, Chadstone, 3148, (211 4997) Microscopical: Mrs ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine, Subscription rates for 1987 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) . . у revos Et, я $2590 Joint Metropolitan Members ......... ee ва ED Et ..$27.00 Country/Interstate/Retired Members ........ 1... AEE ЕРУ АНА 252-2. 2800 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members........... ‚ = bp АУЛ - -$25.00 ЈАТ А n rte ee ври» КЕЛН лса” ла. —€ sree „18.00 Junior (under 18; no Victorian Naturalist) .... -__- EY АРРА ссе МЕС $5.00 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ............. : НЫ Жуунуу CES ceo Hd Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist , Viri $c DU. im EIE E ciem ITIN $30.00 Affiliated Clubs ........... ее и АБА АЛ E reU 525.00 SubscribegGlubs. t cc Sian lee Gad СЕКА T3 ХЕЕЕ . -$23.00 Individual Journals ............ CREE C Mee Ah а ы», see AP AX ЧА. $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after end of March. I 6t doch ес аттата CD $2.00 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS РТУ. LTD. 1-13 ABBOTSFORD ST. WEST MELBOURNE. 328-4774